Home

E3 User`s Manual - Elipse Software

Contents

1. 9 Data DemoTag1 z Query functions 15 2 3 Usage If the selected function has any filter then itis necessary to inform a filter value before executing a Query on the configuration dialog box on Visualize tab or via script by using the SetVariableValue method Example Set Chart Screen Item E3Chart1 Set Query Chart Item Query1 347 Storage Query SetVariableValue StartTime Chart IniDate Query SetVariableValue EndTime Chart EndDate Query SetVariableValue TimeInterval _ rs Fields SampleInterval Value Chart Queries UpdateData 15 2 4 External Query Tools When users are developing an external application using languages such as Java Visual Basic or C and they want to retrieve data stored by a Storage then they can perform calls to Stored Procedures created by a Storage on a Database There are seven Stored Procedures which correspond to some Query options as described on the next table Available options for queries QUERY FUNCTION STORED PROCEDURE Lastvalue CES LastValue ArchivedValue E3Archive E3Archivelnterpolate CompressedDataNValues E3NCompData CompressedDataStartEndTime E3CompData SampledData E3SampledData CalculatedData E3CalculatedData Stored Procedures that use Date type parameters receive them as a Float number instead of a DateTime This increases E3 precision because using a DateTime format allows a maximum precision of 3ms while a Float type allows 1ms p
2. Edit Standard gt Data Folder AR Analog Alarm y Demo Tag X Delete AB Dead band Alarm Internal Tag rl sive cases a Discrete Alarm S Object Counti ie armbar AR Rate of Change Alarm H Import iw Export W Document Scripts Check Edit links Copy Links Show in Editor ME Show in Explorer A Properties Inserting a Timer Tag 2 The system opens up a window asking the number of Tags to create in the Server as well as their names This name will be auto incremented if this option remains blank Tags will be created with a default name Data Server 272 Adding Timer Tags Some Timer Tag properties can be configured using the Properties List without creating scripts for this To configure any property just locate it on the Properties List and perform the necessary adjustments 273 Data Server CHAPTER Database An E3 Database is used to store project information regarding Historic objects Formulas Alarms and Storage It supports Access mdb Oracle and Microsoft SQL Server formats To use this feature right click the project s name in Explorer mode and select the Insert Database option In Domain mode right click the Server objects Databases option select the Insert Database in option and then the project s name ty Domain Project 1 H E Settings i Objects Library m View E Pi Server objects G Drivers and OPC H t Data objects E JE projetos Sj E
3. Object border options The available options are described on the next table 469 Reports Available options for object s border OPTION DESCRIPTION Specifies the style of object s external border Line Styles Specifies the style of object s borderline Previews object s settings color specifies object s border color shadow Enables or disables object s shadow By using the Reports toolbar users have access to all features described in the next sections for a Report 22 3 1 Preview By using this option users can view how a Reportis printed Itis also possible to check settings such as margins figures etc Reports 470 B Se DA DB Aan vjs B ete oer eae regen See re7e1ge1g14g14 9162163169 145168167 168163120129 122 SS BUR et ew boo tee oe rere too ito ts ERS Report s printing preview The available options are described on the next table Printing Preview settings 471 Reports ICON DESCRIPTION Zooms out this page 100 Zoom percentage for this page T page 22 3 2 Report Settings By using this option itis possible to configure Report specifications such as page printer grid and style The Page Setup option sets up specifications referring to Report s page Report Settings Ee Top Margin 1440 Preview Bottom Margin fao Left Margin 14400 Right Margin 1440 Gutter 0 Mirror Margins Cancel Report s Page Setup The ava
4. 7 3 14 Set Default Style Sets the options configured on Shadow and Draw toolbars as the default for the other Screen objects that will be created To use this resource follow these procedures 1 Select the object that will be the template for the others 2 Right click the object and select the Set Default Style option 3 When creating a new Screen object this object s Shadow and Draw configurations will be used as the initial configurations for the next objects 7 3 15 Apply Style Applies the style configured as default in the Set Default Style option to previously created objects To use this resource follow these procedures 1 Select the object to which the default style must be applied 2 Right click it and select the Apply Style option 7 4 Color Formatting In Color type properties changing a value can be performed using dialog boxes such as the one displayed next available in the Properties window by clicking l There are two ways to selected the intended color via Default tab where itis possible to select from pre defined colors or via Customized tab where users can type color information by using its components 223 Screens and Screen Objects Current Colors The Other option allows users to select a color from anywhere on a Screen inside or outside E3 Studio Click al and then the intended color to capture it to the color window To customize a color users can combine two diffe
5. A E Servers and connection options Main server Backup server OO O Examples PCNAME Note Do not use IP address PCNAME Advanced Domain user Don t specify anonymous Use the following account Remote Domains tab Domains 128 In this case the Domain referenced by this configuration is the Server Domain Users can also have Domains referencing each other playing the role of both server and client for Remote Domains To configure a Remote Domain follow these procedures 1 Typean alias for the Remote Domain in the Name field This field is not case sensitive This nameis used in an application to refer to objects accessed on the Remote Domain 2 Specify the path of the dom file of the Remote Domain This path must bea network sharing that allows access to this dom file 3 Inform the name of the main server which must be the server containing the Remote Domain specified by the dom file path This configuration is used to find Remote Domain objects at run time The Servers and connection options item contains an Advanced option which allows performing specific connection configurations among Domains using the window displayed on the next figure Connection Options x Connection timeout ms 2000 Call time out ms 0 IW PING check PING timeout ms 2000 V Use connection heartbeat Heartbeat interval ms 2000 Use asynchronous link creation x e
6. Connection Options window The options on this window are described on the next table 129 Domains Available options on Connection Options window OPTION DESCRIPTION Connection timeout ms This options controls the maximum time that a Client Remote Domain waits to establish a REC connection with the E3 Server of the Server Domain Its goal is the same as the ConnectionTimeout key configurable using E3 Tweak Default value for this option is 2000 ms Call time out ms This option controls the maximum time a Client Remote Domain waits for the return from a call to a Server Domain If this time is exceeded this connection is closed bythe client even if the limits established by the PING check and Use connection heartbeat options is not exceeded yet Default value for this option is 0 zero which disables this limit time This option allows that using an ICMP protocol echo request a Remote Domain checks if the Server replies within a time out If there is no answer for any reason that computeris considered as offline or turned off This check if enabled occurs before the connection avoiding an attempt to connect to an unavailable computer and while the connection is active forcing an immediate disconnection acs eg O Coc in milliseconds fora ping check Default value for this option is 2000 ms Use connection heartbeat This option allows that using a REC protocol mechanism the Client Remote Domain che
7. 229 Screens and Screen Objects Text formatter DATA FORMAT FORMATTED OUTPUT ee Abc Abc yz menre 7 5 1 3 Non Decimal Base Formats Formats for non decimal bases always present the whole part of the formatted numerical value and they are also not sensitive to signs As in decimal bases if the number has more digits than required in this format these digits are presented anyway Currently these formats are limited to 32 bit numbers In case the value s whole part exceeds this limit this format returns an error Examples Formatters for Non Decimal Bases DATA FORMAT FORMATTED OUTPUT ss Ox XXX OxOFF 12345 loooolo 800710 psy Bid 8421011011 a2 8 BBB BBBB 0000 1100 7 5 1 4 Date and Time Formats Date and Time format syntax differs a little from spreadsheets following the mode used by Windows region and language configurations Dates are numerical values where the integer part represents days since December 31st 1899 and the fraction represent hours in day fractions The minimum year supported is 100 and the maximum is 9999 This guarantees a resolution of at least 1 ms in the whole interval Names of months and week days default day month and year sort order and the date and time separators are all used according to Windows region and language configurations On the next table users can check the format and its formatted output for values Formatters for Date and Time DATA FORMAT FORMATTED OUTPUT 1
8. Database Please inform if your application will store data on disk E 4 E3 can store Alarms Historics and Formulas in a database Please gt configure the database service for your application Do you want to store data in a database C No Yes Enter the database name MDB C Example Data mdb lt Back Next gt Cancel Database screen Click Next to proceed 3 8 1 6 Alarms On this screen users can add an Alarm Server and an Alarm Configuration object to this project The Store alarm events in the database option enables users to store information regarding alarms on disk as long as a Database had been added to this project 95 Domains Alarms Please inform if your application will handle alarms You can define an Alarm Server for your application The Alarm Server manages all alarms and events in the application Do you want an Alarm Server in your application No C Yes _ Store alarm events in the database Alarms screen Click Next to proceed After that the system displays the Wizard s final screen with a message indicating the end of the process of creating an application Domains 96 Application Wizard Ea The Application Wizard has all the information needed to create your application Click Finish to create the application lt Back Cancel Application Wizard s final screen End the process by clicking Finish 3 9 Configuration When
9. MV Connect at startup Network Address Server ID Browse Get Version Vendor Info ee Import Server Settings Background reads Vv Check OPC servers V Enable every z j Scan jio seconds 1000 vy Recover lost connections every DeadBand 50 seconds k Close Exporting OPC Server s settings and Tags 3 Selecta file s location and name to generate In addition to this file with OPC Tag settings a new file is generated with the same name followed by an _Alarms suffix This file is used later when importing alarm configurations to E3 To import these OPC Tags to E3 follow these procedures 1 In Organizer inserta new OPC Driver 2 Rename this OPC Driver to the same OPC Driver s name used in Eli pse SCADA application so that all OPC Driver s Tag references are correctly imported later 3 Right click this OPC Driver and select the Import option E3 Studio 68 4 On thelist of file types select the Elipse SCADA files e2f option and then select the file previously exported without the Alarms suffix There is no need to select a template 2 6 5 4 Alarm Configuration An Alarm Configuration is exported automatically when exporting Tags by following the previously described steps In addition to the file with Tags a file is generated with the same name followed by an _Alarms suffix For example if the selected name is InternalTags then the generated files are Internal
10. E3Chart can only be performed directly in E3 Studio or in Report s own scripts For further information on this object please check the E3Chart chapter 22 4 Creating a Report in E3 This example shows how to create a Report in E3 to extract data froma Historic object 22 4 1 Defining Areas A default Report created when a new Report is added to a project contains the following areas e Page Header Area shown in all Report pages as a header Detail Area Area repeated as many times as required it is Report s body e Page Footer Page footer works in the same way as a Page Header There are two types of Areas e Report Header Footer Areas that are printed only once regardless of the number of pages of a Report This area appears as a Report s opening or closing e Group Header Footer A group is used to divide a Reportin equal sets of values of the same variable This area repeats whenever a group is displayed In the example shown here no construction of this type is used These areas always encompass a detail area These two areas can be accessed by right clicking a Report and then selecting the Insert option 22 4 2 Query Setup To extract data from a Database it is necessary to configure a Report s query There may be many different queries for the same Report but only one can be active ata specific moment To do so follow these procedures 1 Configure the DataSource property name of a Database where this
11. Enables ordisables the visibility of the variable outside the library that is determines whether the variable is public or not Determines whether the variable is saved in the project or not Determines whether this property is retentive or not Value O Specifies the initial value of the variable ee ee declaration and documentation text Only properties with simple types Variant String Date Double etc can be retentive the view automatically deselects the column if the property type changes to an object type and only XObject properties can be retentive NOTE Using retentive properties in ElipseXs may increase the starting time of an application and also increase memory consumed by E3Run process These times vary depending on the number of XObject instances number of retentive properties on each XObject and the amount of these properties that have its value changed if the property never changes its retentive value remains zeroed In an XObject can be inserted any E3 modules executed on the server as for example e O Driver and OPC Driver 255 Libraries Alarms Server and alarms Database Server Formulas Data Server Historic objects This allows users to define as a library a complex management system that can be easily replicated as many times as itis required in an application Users can insert XObjects in any Data Server by right clicking the Data Server in Domain mode selecting
12. Failure when creating que Cannot create a query Error when executing que Cannot execute a query 421 E3Chart SCMESSAGE C C d C ENNC NNNN T MEANINGT ssid server from server existing records froma server beginning record retrieval from a server server pene ee retrieving query data from a server E3Chart 422 CHAPTER E3Playback A playback tool aims to facilitate post operations specially analyzing occurrences Its need is justified because it allows users to view variations of events and analog points in real time by using its monitoring screens in a past time which can be in some cases complicated only by observing reports on events and analog values It is important to notice that a playback is a tool that permits an expert operator that knows the process to clearly interpret facts It is not the scope of a playback to automatically identify a solution or a cause of an occurrence A practical example of playback usage may be the following A user when starting his working shift is informed of a severe occurrence that happened at night around 3 15AM Then this user can open on a playback tool a screen that contains the point that generated this event and other related points just by moving a clock to 3 10AM and clicking Play When observing an animated screen with historical data this user easily monitors the general status of this process by moving back and forth freely in
13. Ga Copy Cut X Delete A Find Replace Object Counting WH Impor Export y E Document Scripts 3 Check Edit links Copy Links E Show in Editor ME Show in Explorer Properties Inserting an OPC Tag New Folder amp OPC Block OPC Tag SA Analog Alarm AB Dead band Alarm A Digital Alarm A Discrete Alarm AB Rate of Change Alarm 2 Studio then opens up a window asking for a number of Tags to create in this Group as well as their names This name is auto incremented and if this option remains blank Tags are created with a default name Drivers 164 Adding OPCTag Quantity Adding OPC Tags Some OPC Tag properties can be configured using Properties List without creating scripts for this To configure any property locate it on Properties List and perform the necessary adjustments For more information on properties please check the Scripts Reference Manual 4 3 5 OPC Block An OPC Block allows reading or writing a set of values For Tag writing users must set a new value to Tag s Value property Tag reading is performed automatically by an OPC Server with a scan time defined on its OPC Group The Size property determines the number of Tag Elements on a server To use this resource follow this procedure 1 Right click an OPC Group and select the Insert OPC Block option 165 Drivers Lan Tag counting New
14. On the Scripts separator window users can define a text that is stored between scripts in a documentation file Users can choose between blank or customizable lines and also inform how many of these lines are inserted into this file Script documentation wizard x Scripts separator Configure the text to be recorded between scripts in your documentation file To facilitate the document reading process lines are inserted to separate one script from another You can define the kind of separator to be used in the documentation Which script separator do you want to use Blank line Customizable line V Type number of lines of separator 1 Scripts separator Users can select a Blank line or a Customizable line If they select the Blank line option the documentation file has a blank line between each script If they select the Customizable line option then they can inform one or more characters to compose the line used as a script separator These characters are informed in the Type line text field If they select the Repeat until the end of the line option the informed characters are repeated up to the line s size limit which is 80 characters 33 E3 Studio Users can also use more than one line as a separator blank or customizable Just inform a number between 1 and 100 in the Type number of lines of separator field Click Next to finish the configuration After that this wizard shows a message indicati
15. Database lo stAccess v Access Database MDB file C Example Data mdb ae DB password Configuration for an Access Database The available options for this tab are described on the next table Available options for Configuration tab paa eI le the project s Database type 0 stAccess 1 stOracle or 2 stSqlServer MDB file Name of an mdb file used in the project NOTE This field accepts an absolute path as well as a path relative to the Domain s current folder The full path must exist for this mdb file to be created or found correctly DB Password Access Database password user Database user connected via E3 Database 276 OPTION DESCRIPTION logon Test Connection Tests a connection with the Database 3 Inthe Database field select the 0 stAccess option 4 Type the file name whether it exists or not in the MDB file field according to the previous figure 5 If necessary configure the User Password and DB Password options according to Access definitions These items can remain blank and in this case an application assumes E3 s default settings 6 Click OK to finish these settings 12 2 Oracle Using Oracle as a Database server for E3 is only possible when an Oracle server or client is installed in the machine where E3 server is running This installation must contain OCI Oracle Call Interface support and OLEDB Provider for Oracle required for communication between E3 a
16. Dead Band Alarm Out of alarm en Time Setpoint Dead Band This type of alarmis indicated when a reference SetPoint varies and also when users want to avoid an unnecessary amount of alarms for small oscillations in the monitored variable Item Source Formatting Links Dead band Setpoint 0O Need ACK Message text Severity High v 37 o Alarms The available options on this tab are described on the next table Available options for Dead band tab OPTION DESCRIPTION A Link to a reference variable so that users can monitor a difference relative to a monitored variable Enables a dead band which is a feature used to avoid that a variable generates an unnecessary amount of messages when oscillating around an alarm limit Value Indicates the difference between the monitored variable and the SetPoint from which this alarm must be indicated It must be informed in engineering units of the monitored variable Message Text Allows specifying a text displayed to users when this alarm is in an active condition ais A cou an alarm level s severity it can be High Medium or Low eae __ as or disables alarm acknowledgment Delay ms Specifies a delay time in milliseconds When this value is equal to 0 zero default no delayis applied Return message Allows specifying a text displayed to users when this alarm is notin an active condition 13 3 4 Rate of Change
17. E3 User s Manual Copyright 1999 2015 Elipse Software Ltda All rights reserved Version 4 7 234 10 02 2015 Table of Contents T Introdugti M sss enne esee oee nennen ereus Ees ten e Kesa oons io EEE secs eussasthcebavecbatevelsaaenstacentecdesees 1 1 1 General Description asrsnsnaninnn nna h VE N RE 1 TZ Archit AUE r a h Heiscecazcussvscivcsesckcccaessteds cctacnvateccescaceccsencdovek anvendsonettoutisnscasindesat ene 3 1 3 Block Diagram arb TA DOMAIN St UCtUN Cs wiee esccesscscssciscesesctoseseeasspecssnsessevstecenseadeasotesecevesecsscesceseapensessssecvensesetes 5 1 5 Limitations of Demonstration Mode sscssscsssssscsssecscecsssssscsseescesssssssesceesecessesees 6 DIES SUUGIO B E ES AE A E AE EN A E ATA E EAA 7 2 4 Starting a Proje Ct saasina raria a a R OE E Ea REES ESS EIRA 8 2 2 Working Area iii o hie B A AT RE AEAEE TEE ENE ATEA EE EE T A EEE 2 4 Kolo s APAE EEE EEEE EEE EEEE E 2 5 Organize T ivccsscsceccecsessessessonssansesscedessessenseusesbessssucedesuesves ves SEn SaS S eE Ea oE SEa SECES ESKS Sia 37 2 6 Import and Export onenian e a eee i i e o eeii o aeia 42 2 7 Properties List ZB GAMO Vinen a VTE A NE RN e Oe PA iN oJ o 1 OATI T A REAA E E T SEE E EEE 2 10 Connect TO csssscsccsscnscsscssccsccsccnccscsceseseesscescescescescescenscnseuscuscuscsecseesscssessersersensecees 81 B DOMAINS is ccsccevssncccssezeucssassssccussosoasaencvesescussesssvosesssesecesesavesussusessseve
18. Each one of these packages is dimensioned according to the number of points Tags and Alarm Sources stored on a database For example a Basic Playback 1000 allows performing a playback on a database with up to 1 000 points If a database has more points than the available licenses a database assembling process fails and an error message is then displayed indicating that there are no available licenses to execute a playback An E3 Studio license includes an Advanced Playback license with no limit on points although it is limited to the last six hours of data stored on a database This allows an application developer to test playback without purchasing licenses for this E3Playback 448 In Demo mode when there is no protection device playback also works in Advanced mode without a limitation on points although limited to display only the last six hours of data stored on a database relative to the current server time 449 E3Playback CHAPTER Formulas Formulas are modules that store and transfer sets of values to specific groups of variables to create predefined settings They are composed of three parts Templates Units and Value Sets Users can use Formulas to make industrial processes easier For example a beverage factory makes several types of juice and each type has a different recipe In this case Templates represent juice flavors orange grape tangerine etc Units represent tanks where this juice is produced
19. Login window If the Windows authentication mode is selected the User name and Password fields are disabled and filled in with the name and password of the currently user logged in the network domain To select another user belonging to a network domain click Other user If the E3 authentication mode is selected fill in information about a user and a password for an E3 Domain s user in the User name and Password fields respectively When the This user is an administrator option is enabled for a given user this user can at run time change all configurations displayed on the Users tab These privileges can be configured via scripts using Viewer s UserAdministration method which enables a user s dialog box at run time NOTE Only an administrator has access to Viewer s UserAdministration method When clicking Remove an application shows a message box asking to confirm whether users really want to remove that user Users can also belong to a group thus sharing the same configurations with other users of that group To do so the list Available groups contains all groups available 493 Security in an application that may contain the selected user and the list Belongs to contains a list of groups to which the selected user already belongs To add a user to a group follow these procedures 1 2 3 4 Select a user to insert into a specific group On the list Available groups select a group to which this user is going to b
20. Moves the shadow under the object Moves the shadow above the object Moves the shadow to the left of the object 219 Screens and Screen Objects OPTION DESCRIPTION object 7 3 13 Draw It allows applying or editing color information for Screens and Screen objects and border information for Screen objects Drew CX cS Ee ee Draw options To use this resource follow these procedures 1 Insert or select the object Screen or Screen object whose colors or borders will be edited 2 Changeits properties according to the options available on Draw toolbar The available options on this toolbar are Available options for Draw toolbar OPTION DESCRIPTION Background Color Allows selecting the Screen s or Screen object s background color from a list of pre defined colors or creating a new custom color Foreground Color Allows selecting the Screen s or Screen object s foreground colorfroma list of pre defined colors or creating a new custom color Border Color Allows selecting the Screen object s border color from a list of pre defined colors or creating a new custom color Screens and Screen Objects 220 ICON OPTION DESCRIPTION Border Style Allows choosing the type of border displayed by the Screen object from a list of pre defined styles a continuous line different types of dotted and dashed lines or simply a a Border Thickness Allows choosing the Screen object s border thickn
21. Remote pplications I Databases Bp Watcher SR Steeplechase a OPCServers Server UserList Close Exporting RAM and Demo Tags 3 Selecta file s location and name to generate In addition to a file with Tag settings a new file is generated with the same name followed by an _Alarms suffix This file is used later when importing alarm configurations to E3 To import these Tags to E3 follow these procedures 1 Insert a Data Server in Organizer 2 Rename this Data Server to Data so that all Screen object Links are correctly imported later 3 Right click this Data Server and select the Import option 4 On thelist of file types select the Elipse SCADA files e2f option and then select the file previously exported without the Alarms suffix There is no need to select a template 67 E3 Studio 2 6 5 3 OPC Server s Tags and Settings 1 In Elipse SCADA s Organizer select the OPCServers item and click the desired OPC Driver 2 Click Export Tags Screens Alarms e Recipes E Historic E Reports Eh Drivers B Drivert H RemoteApplications I Databases Bp Watcher SS Steeplechase OPCServers i E Server UserList il l H General Cross Reference Name New Tag Server Description __New Group OPC Server Connection Logging MV Keep server connection V BlockMode Export
22. Start windowed Width pixels Height pixels 7 Centralize window Viewer s title V Title bar V Border V Close button V Sizing border Minimize button V Move window V Maximize button Z Always on top E Small titlebar Viewer resolution Setting tab Each field on the Settings tab has a corresponding property The available options are Viewer 194 Available options for Settings tab OPTION OE DESCRIPTION Start Maximized Minimized Windowed Determines how Viewer s window will start This field is equivalent to the Viewer s WindowStyle property and has the following options e 0 Maximized Screen starts maximized e 1 Windowed Windowed style thatis Screen s height and width are configurable e 2 Minimized Screen starts maximized Disable task switching Disables window switching This field is equivalent to the Viewer s DisableTaskSwitching property This option can be modified at run time by using the Frame s SetDisableTaskSwitching method cee I a title bar This field is equivalent to the Viewer s TitleBar property Enables a border around the Viewer s window This field is equivalent to the Viewer s WindowBorder property Sizing border Indicates if the window can be resized This options only works if the Border option is selected This field is equivalent to the Viewer s WindowResizable property Move window Indicates if the window can be moved This field i
23. This field is equivalent to Pen s MaxGapTimeColor property Specifies a style fora connection line This field is equivalent to Pen s MaxGapTimeStyle property data calculations 406 Pen properties General Data Style Connection type Statistical Data V Calculate statistical data Show average line Show minimum and maximum Cancel Apply Statistical Data tab Each field on Statistical Data tab has a corresponding property The available options are displayed on the next table Available options for Statistical Data tab OPTION DESCRIPTION Calculate statistical data Enables statistical data calculation Displays an average line for statistical data Please check the NOTE further on this topic Show average line 407 E3Chart OPTION DESCRIPTION Show minimum and maximum Displays minimum and maximum values for statistical data 19 1 4 Legend Tab A Legend is used to show visible Pens ona chart as well as information about them such as color Pen s name status etc 100 04 07 30 04 07 40 04 07 50 04 08 00 04 08 10 04 08 20 Data DemoTag1 Data DemoTag2 Data DemoTag3 A Legend object at run time On Legend tab users can configure information referring to a Legend object and its columns E3Chart 408 E3Chartl properties E3Chart E3 Item Position General Axis Pens Legend Queries Font Links V Show legend at the bottom Size pixe
24. e Although a Storage is activated normally it does not generate tables nor changes its indexes e The Create Table option on Properties window the Create DB Structure option of its contextual menu and the g option on Storage s toolbar return an error message indicating thata database structure cannot be created because there are no defined fields e An empty Storage is usually listed on a Query s Server Name combo box e Thereis no need for Storage licenses when querying external data only for writing 15 2 Table Configuration Users can access table configurations used in a Storage in two different ways 1 By clicking Properties e 2 By right clicking this object in Organizer and selecting the Properties option Storage 340 Storagel properties DB Historian amp Item Alarms Area Storage Links Database Server om Table Type database s table name use this name later in queries Table name Discard Discard data from the main table 1 Month s 1 Month s r Discard from backup data older than 12 Month s Database structure creation Click the button to create Storage tables Create Table Storage tab Each field on Storage tab has a corresponding property The available options on this tab are described on the next table Available options for Storage tab OPTION DESCRIPTION Database Server Defines a Database server This field is equivalent to the DbServer
25. e If their passwords expire expiring date can be global by group or a single user attribute e If users mistype their passwords a certain number of times in a row thatis a login failures Once blocked a user account does not allow login anymore This condition remains until an Administrator manually unblocks that password or until blocking timeout expires 103 Domains 3 9 3 Viewer Groups Tab Users can specify according to Viewer s IP if it can connect and with which license type Viewer Full or Viewer Only With this resource users can completely block a connection or limit the amount and type of licenses to use simultaneously by a certain group of IPs To access Viewer groups right click E3 Admin s icon on Windows Notification Area select Domain Options and then Viewer groups tab The window on the next figure is then displayed 2 E3 Admin Domain Configuration Se a Options Security Viewer groups Events recording Projects Servers Remote Domains Properties Name Group name Default ia Local Be Viewer Full licenses V Allow Viewer Full connections Limit simultaneous license use 0 H4 Viewer Only licenses V Allow Viewer Only connections Limit simultaneous license use Viewer groups tab The available options on this tab are described on the next table Available options for Viewer groups tab OPTION DESCRIPTION Name Lists names for all View
26. 30 Columns width 90 Style tab Each field on the Style tab has a corresponding property The available properties are described on the next table Available options for Style tab OPTION DESCRIPTION Grid style Specifies E3Browser s grid style This field is equivalent to the GridLinesType property Header height Specifies E3Browser s header height in pixels This field is equivalent to the FixedRowHeight property First column width Specifies the width of the first column on a table This field is equivalent to the FixedColumnWidth property Row height Specifies the height of the remaining rows ona table This field is equivalent to the RowHeight property Columns width Specifies the width of table columns This field is equivalent to the ColumnWidth property 18 2 2 Options Tab On the Options tab informa time interval in which data is stored and updated in an E3Browser Updates occur in milliseconds ms Users can choose to not update E3Browser 382 data causing records to remain unchanged In the Choose selection type option inform which selection type is performed on a table E3Browserl properties E3Browser 3 Item Position Query Style Options Color Font Links Choose refresh type Don t refresh C Refresh every ms 0 Choose selection type Select cell C Select row Options tab Each field on the Options tab has a corresponding property The available pr
27. An OPC Block Element allows reading or writing one of the Elements of an OPC Block where itis inserted An OPC Block reads a data table and this object is always linked to a position defined by its Index property For example an OPC Block Element with Index equal to five and inserted into an OPC Block with a size of 10 whose data is read as on the following table It would have its Value property equal to three according to the previous table NOTE E3 can create OPC Block Elements automatically For more details please check the Import Tags item on Configuration topic To use this resource follow this procedure 1 Right click an OPC Block and select the Insert OPC Block Element option Drivers 168 E a Domain Project H E Settings Ja Objects Library Server objects Drivers and OPC B Driver S S OPCDriver1 o OPCGro Create Block Elements ome GiGi Dota objects o co ae a a pare AA Analog Alarm ay Explorer 3a Copy An Dead band Alarm ut j igital Alarm C Digital Al D Discrete Alarm AB Rate of Change Alarm X Delete A Find Replace Object Counting Import Export Document Scripts Check E Edit links Copy Links Show in Editor ME Show in Explorer F Properties Inserting an OPC Block Element Some OPC Block Element properties can be configured using Properties List without creating scripts for this To configure any prope
28. E3 Item Position Formatting Links Sample Date formats display date and time serial numbers as date values Use Time formats to display just the time portion Value Format window The following format categories are available 227 General There is no specific format It is performed automatically depending on data type Number Presents integers and fractions allowing users to define the number of decimals and the use of commas to separate thousands For numbers that are either too big or too small use the Scientific format The symbols are the ones defined at Control Panel Regional Configuration Date Time Presents numerical values Gregorian format for date and time when they are valid Percent Multiplies the number by 100 and adds the percent symbol to it also defining the number of decimals Scientific This format presents a number with a mantissa and an exponent ideal for numbers of different magnitudes allowing users to choose the number of decimals and formats Special Allows formatting integers in non decimal bases hexadecimal octal and binary Screens and Screen Objects 7 5 1 Other Formats In the Other option users can create any type of format even one from the previous section by typing a format code as text The text format is made of up to four fields separated by a semicolon The first field is always applied when there is no other field more appropriated for that value
29. This field is equivalent to Pen s DataSourceType property E3Chart 400 OPTION DESCRIPTION Vertical axis link Name ofa Link used to plot data ona vertical scale This field is equivalent to Pen s YLink property Horizontal axis link Name ofa Link used to plot data ona horizontal scale This field is equivalent to Pen s XLink property Number of samples kept in memory Specifies the number of samples in real time Pens This field is equivalent to Pen s BufferSize property Use TimeStamp Enables or disables a timestamp A timestamp is a time value that accompanies a Tag value indicating the moment when this value was changed This field is equivalent to Pen s UseTimeStamp property If this field is enabled the Horizontal Axis Link option remains inactive Local query Determines a Query linked to this E3Chart that is used on Axis data This field is equivalent to Pen s QueryName property External query Determines an external query that is data received from a query outside this E3Chart Vertical axis field Name of a Query field used to plot data ona vertical scale This field is equivalent to Pen s YField property Horizontal axis field Name of a Query field used to plot data ona horizontal scale This field is equivalent to Pen s XField property Use automatic query Indicates whether this Pen must use an automatic query An automatic queryis not used if E3Chart uses a user customized SQL code if itis using a St
30. e Links Default value is disabled If enabled Links and XObjects Link type properties are evaluated during standby activation 1 O Drivers no communication Default value is disabled If enabled OServers are created during standby activation NOTE This option is important in applications with several I O Drivers Scripts Default value is disabled If enabled all object and library event scripts are compiled and activated during standby activation Database Default value is enabled This means that a Database is connected during standby activation If disabled it only prevents connection to a Database from being created during standby activation This option is automatically enabled when the EnableSynchronization property is set to True IMPORTANT When a Domain starts executing E3 Server always picks an active server alphabetically regardless of this one being selected as main or backup This criteria is used whenever more than one server is a candidate to execute a Domain For further information please check chapter Hot Standby When Hot Standby is turned on the following procedures are necessary 101 Defining a shared network directory to contain the main copy of Domain files This directory must be placed in a computer that is not part of the E3 Domain Creating a directory in every E3 Server where an updated copy of Domain files is kept E3Run uses this local copy of PRJ and LIB files Always opening the same net
31. in Float format e strFields List of fields Usage example DECLARE MyStartDate FLOAT SET MyStartDate dbo E3GETFLOATVALUE 10 10 2004 12 00 00 DECLARE MyEndDate FLOAT SET MyEndDate dbo E3GETFLOATVALUE 10 10 2006 12 00 00 EXECUTE E3SampledData STOXX 10 MyStartDate MyEndDate Data DemoTag1 2 1 15 2 4 7 E3CalculatedData Equivalent to the CalculatedData function Formal description is E3CalculatedData iSubType int strTableName VARCHAR 100 iModMin int dStartDate float dEndDate float strFields VARCHAR 10 strWhere VARCHAR 4000 type anit bQuality int Where e iSubType Calculation sub type 0 Total 1 Minimum 2 Maximum 3 Standard Deviation 4 Amplitude 5 Average and 6 Median Usage example DECLARE MyStartDate FLOAT SET MyStartDate dbo E3GETFLOATVALUE 10 10 2004 12 00 00 DECLARE MyEndDate FLOAT SET MyEndDate dbo E3GETFLOATVALUE 10 10 2006 12 00 00 EXECUTE E3CalculatedData STOXX 10 MyStartDate MyEndDate Data DemoTagi 2 1 Storage 352 CHAPTER Historic Historic objects are modules responsible for storing application data ona Database They also store process data for future analysis Users can create as many Historic files as needed each one with different Tags or expressions Each Historic can either create or use an independent table on a Database whose storage may be defined by Time or by Event
32. violated POSSIBLE CAUSE Whenever there is an attempt to write a record where a field defined as the primary key has a duplicated value this writing is refused and this message is displayed Note that a key name is displayed in this case SYSTEM E3INDEX key as User KeyName Depending on the project this error is expected but most of the time itis important to check if this key is adequate These two cases illustrate that Frequently Asked Questions 526 situation e Power Measurement Systems Aiming to store all data froma single day routines used for collecting admit upper and lower tolerances in their timestamps for the collecting process Thus some records must be written more than once In this case this error is expected e Alarm maintenance For this case there may have been more than one error per second on an application If the E3TimeStamp field is used as a primary key there may have been losses of some alarm occurrences which may lead to a misinterpretation of events In this case rethinking a primary key can be the adequate solution SOLUTION There are two ways to solve this issue 1 Users must create a unique index for these key fields 2 Users must check that application so that it does not send repeated key values for recording 27 6 Data Server The Retentive property of an Internal Tag is not working because it does not save the last value when stopping a Domain What can be wrong The Retentive propert
33. 1 4 SQL Tab On this tab SQL syntax is displayed as a result of all parameters passed Users can edit a query directly by selecting the Enable SQL customization option 375 Query Fields Variables Visualize SQL JV Enable SQL customization SELECT Storage E3TimeStamp Storage Field D Storage Quality Storage FieldValue FROM Storage WHERE Storage E3TimeStamp gt lt StartDate gt AND Storage E3TimeStamp lt lt EndDate gt SQL tab When deselecting the Enable SQL customization option all changes are lost and this Query returns to options selected on the Fields Variables and Visualize tabs Query definition es A E Are you sure you want to disable direct SQL edition All configured SQL statements will be lost Ce e Warning when disabling SQL customization 17 2 Using Query Filters via Scripts To setup and confirm whether a query is correctis only one of the steps when using a Query Runtime usage and modifications on filter values for a query can be seen in the next script The SetVariableValue method is responsible for defining query parameters according to values passed via script Set query Screen Item E3Browseri Item Query1 Query SetVariableValue IniDate _ Application GetObject Data InternalTag1 Value Query SetVariableValue FinalDate _ Query 376 Application GetObject DataFH InternalTag2 Value Screen Item E3Browser1 Requery The Requery met
34. Available options for Edit Links window OPTION DESCRIPTION 241 Links OPTION DESCRIPTION Property Event Determines the object s property that contains this Link Connection Determines a Link type Simple Bi directional al Analog Table Reverse Source Determines a Link s source Options for Link type properties CCPTION ess s s siSY DESCRIPTION Object s name Determines the name of the object that contains this property Property Event Determines property s name Connection it is always the same Link Source Determines property s value Options for User events OPTION DESCRIPTION Object s name Determines the name of the object that contains this event Property Event Determines the name of a user event Connection Determines an event type OnEvent WhileEvent or OnValueChangeEvent Source Cd Expression related to this event On the Edit Links dialog box users can modify the following options e Links Can be modified except for object s name e Link type properties Can be modified except for object s name e User events Can be modified except for object s name and event s name By clicking 2 users can remove the selected Link The Show links properties window option determines whether Link minidialogs are displayed when a rowis selected If this window is visible then users can edit Link properties Its default value is enabled Links 242 Data IntemalTa
35. BAD Quality SUBSTATUS DESCRIPTION LIMIT NoumiT Low HIGH ___ CONSTANT Non specific This value is bad but no specific reason is known Configuration There is Error some specific configuration problemina server For example this specificitem may have been deleted 179 Drivers SUBSTATUS DESCRIPTION lt s s siMITT i O NO LIMIT Not Connected Input must be logically connected to something butitis not This quality may reflect that no value is available at that time because this value may have not been provided bya data source Device Failure A device failure has been detected HIGH _ CONSTANT TH Drivers sS 0 eje Last Known Communicati Value on have failed However the last known value is available Notice that this value s age maybe determined Sensor Failure A sensor failure has been detected the Limit 17 18 field may provide additional information SUBSTATUS DESCRIPTION LIMIT Noumit Low HIGH _ CONSTANT Communicatio Communicati n Failure on have failed There 37 is no last known value available Out of Service Block is off scan or 31 locked Substatus for UNCERTAIN quality SUBSTATUS DESCRIPTION LIMIT NO LIMIT CONSTANT ow HIGH Non specific There is no specific 067 reason W200 Drivers SUBSTATUS DESCRIPTION Last Usable Value Drivers A device providing t
36. Client xxx der where xxx is a random generated code If this certificate is deleted a new one is automatically generated whenever an OPC UA Driver tries to establish a connection with a server Drivers 176 4 4 4 Limitations on Reading Data Types E3 OPC UA Driver supports basic data types and one dimension arrays as well as a few types of structures defined by the OPC UA standard The following types of scalar values and arrays are supported Fully supported types SByte Byte Int16 UInt16 Int32 Ulnt32 Int64 UiInt64 Float Double Boolean String DateTime and ByteString e Supported types with limitations DataValue ignores timestamp and quality LocalizedText ignores locale QualifiedName ignores Namespacelndex StatusCode converted to SCode or HRESULT Guid converted to text e Supported types converted to one dimension arrays with fixed size These data types are returned as arrays of Variants where each one of these fields is an array item If a field is another object Variant contains another array and so on Supported types are ServerDiagnosticssummaryDataType SubscriptionDiagnosticsDataType SessionSecurityDiagnosticsDataType SessionDiagnosticsDataType ApplicationDescription Argument Buildinfo ServiceCounterDataType ExpandedNodeld and Nodeld In query fields text of Tag paths follows OPC UA standard for relative paths Components of this path are the following e slash mark Indicates a
37. E R S E T R S 266 T12 Counter aE ra eo eea ccusiacesscaccssucececcssecadeavsceecadceasccescssoncsetraseessedsose 267 TLS Demo 1 T AEAEE AEA E A 269 1124 TN A LE I ET a E A E E AE AAE EA E A A E A 270 11 5 Timer Tag 12 Database EEEE A EA A E E a i N a o o EEE EE 12 2 OVACIE sn R E E I E ER ERRES 123 SQL Ser VE ii c2ccciciscteacecesescsseccsescssscsces lt csssntesscoececenuseced skccescveescecsoensseassseesensckedsceesdaseces 281 12 4 E3 Objects and Permissions essssessesesosssesesesosssescscsnsesescseseseoesnssssesossnssesesesssesese 285 TS ALAC IMS AEI coset cits A AEAE SA EAE ETS AN 13 1 Alarm Configuration 13 2 Alarm SErVE P aret resres torao o n isa rina eroas Eoi EN EER S ESEA SEE N ER I ES 13 3 Alarm ESTOIT a e EE AEST T T TE 13 4 Alarind Fiter sicesisccseccsssesscsscssecsesecsvssassesensscossssnssesssnscssensenssnccsvesusscusenssssevssdetascvececsseane 14 YNET ap E AEEA EE E E E E 14 1 Settings 14 2 RUNTIME Behavi isseire osooso arnis pisri sias o ras S a EE aS ABRI o A A A E E E E E E E E E A E E EE 15 1 Config rati N dsicscsccs sncsecessessceosscsus sos szecesetscssssnsdessdigsunsuestsceuavsvescncedsacenconeseneesccseses 15 2 Table Configuration 16 Historic 16 1 SOUUINGS ciessecuccssciccasencessonccncensendenssnsencencacesctscoscusceevschestyensesdeosuccesencdesesesscessevaussavsa s D7 QUOI Y AASE AAE AT EE E E EE TAE EEA EA E A 17 1 Creating a QUELY ncscias aa aial i
38. E3 Query object to be compatible with tables using a TIMESTAMP type users must enable the Use ADO Oracle drivers ption Use ADO Oracle drivers Allows using Oracle s ADO Activex Data Objects interfaces so that an E3 Query object recognizes a TIMESTAMP type Thus itis possible to read records from Oracle tables with a precision of milliseconds User CCC Database user connected via E3 logon Test Connection Tests connection with the Database 3 Inthe Database field select the 1 stOracle option 4 Ifthe Oracle server is a local server the Connection field may remain blank because E3 automatically retrieves this information Otherwise the connection is created using an Oracle client installed in the machine 5 If necessary configure the User and Password options according to Oracle settings Such items may remain blank and in this case an application assumes E3 default configurations 6 Click OK to finish these settings When inserting a Database in an application some options regarding Database Server types are enabled A Database Server is responsible for managing and storing information about objects that use this service 12 2 2 Accessing Oracle via Scripts Scripts are programming language modules in which users can create source code that allows great flexibility to associate actions to specific events Each item of an E3 project has a list of previously associated events So users can create progra
39. E3 Server E3 Runtime Scripts amp Links Report Srv Alarm Srv Formula Srv Storage Srv Nn T v 47 O 2 2 T Data Server Security Server Resource Server Screen Server Library Server OPC Client DB Servers I O Server 1 O Server 1 O Server E3 s block diagram 1 4 Domain Structure Each group of servers is composed of either one E3 Server operating isolated or two E3 Servers in a Hot Standby configuration Actually each Viewer connects to a Domain rather than to a single server After connecting server and client exchange information and check for the existence of registered and updated system objects on the client computer If such objects are not found the server uploads object definitions such as user libraries according to the need to open each Screen From a client s point of view the download starts on the first Screen graphical interface including any internal objects that will be saved to a cache directory This process can take a few seconds depending on the application but it brings more benefits next time the user opens the same Screen because the Viewer performs disk and memory cache If the Viewer is not closed by the second timea Screen is opened and itis not reconfigured itis already in memory thus reducing pagination time If the Screen is modified the Viewer must download it again and restart the process After opening a Screen the server and the client exchan
40. E3 Tweak User s Manual can be opened on the Start Programs Elipse Software Elipse E3 Documentation E3 Tweak Manual menu E3 Tweak can be opened using three different ways e Via Start Programs Elipse Software Elipse E3 E3 Tweak menu e Via Tools E3 Tweak menu in E3 Studio e Via Shortcuts E3 Tweak item of E3 Admin s contextual menu on Windows Notification Area 523 Advanced Settings CHAPTER Frequently Asked Questions This chapter aims to answer frequently asked questions about E3 There are also errors that may occur and their solutions 27 1 Tab Order What is the relationship between creation order of objects on a Screen and their tab order at run time When creating a new object on a Screen it receives the first position in tab order and itis sorted in descending order relative to the other Screen objects For more information about this issue please check the topic Tab Order among Objects on chapter Screens and Screen Objects 27 2 Overlaying Animations in Objects I created a Rotation or Translation Animation on a Screen but decided to change it creating a new Animation However when running this application this object appeared as the initial Animation not as the current one Why is this happening POSSIBLE CAUSE This new Animation was created without removing the old one SOLUTION To solve this issue follow these procedures 1 Right click the desired object and select the Remove
41. E3Chart to perform this Set Pen Screen Item E3Chart1 Pens Pen Item Pen Name ShowBadPoints False Notice however that this solution is only valid for historical values At run time this value is always plotted regardless of Tag quality 27 12 Historic How to disable recording of historic records by scan Configure the Interval between records ms option on Historic tab of Historic s properties window with a value of 0 zero If users want to perform this by script property s name is ScanTime Thus values are not recorded automatically forcing a recording via script using the WriteRecord method 27 13 Links How to create an Expression Tag in E3 Linking an Internal Tag s Value property to this expression This expression can be simple and may contain arithmetical and logical operators involving constants and other Tags How can I change the color of an object when moving the mouse over it Creating a Digital Link between object s ForegroundColor and MouseOver properties The MouseOver property has a Boolean type and assumes a True value when mouse is over this object and False when the mouse is outside this object s area 531 Frequently Asked Questions How can I create a multilingual application There are two ways of performing this One is creating an Internal Tag in Viewer for each String and link these Tags to these properties to translate or use Tags on scripts in case of using the Msgbox method The
42. Even when there is no Hot Standby configuration there is a control over the Remote Domain connection between Client and Server E3 Servers This connection uses the REC protocol the same one used between E3 Server E3 Viewer and E3 Studio Therefore a REC connection port and its possible firewall configurations also apply to Remote Domains Once connection is established there should be a running Domain In this process a connection is reestablished whenever a problem occurs After finding a running Domain its correct name is checked as well as the user login if necessary Similar to what happens with E3 Studio s and E3 Viewer s REC connections communication statistics of Remote Domain connections can be viewed on E3 Server s Statistics window available via E3 Admin icon on Windows Notification Area 3 11 7 Disconnection A Client Domain may not be able to establish a connection to a Server Domain for several reasons which might be e Client or Server machine is not connected to a network e Server is not running an E3 Server e Server s E3 Server does not have the correct Domain or Domain has not been started yet e Server Domain does not accept the user specified by the Client Domain Domains 134 Client s or Server s E3 Server does not have a Remote Domain license Server s E3 Server version is an older one 2 5 or previous There is a firewall blocking the port used by REC or Client and Server ports do not match e D
43. Good according to its usage inside E3 and also according to OPC standards e Index Creates a relationship between the stored field and its respective name stored on _Fields table e Value Stored value For an analog table it is a Double type field a real number for a digital table itis an Integer and for a text tableitis a variable sized NVARCHAR field as specified in the StringFieldSize field 15 2 1 Execution When starting the execution of an application and receiving the first value notification for each one of the stored variables a Storage stores this value obtained with Bad quality and right after that with the sent quality if itis Good This occurs because when performing a query users view that an interruption in Storage 344 Storage happened After that as new values are obtained for variables an algorithm for record checking interprets this sequence and decides whether each point must be stored or not This algorithm known as BoxCar BackSlope creates two variation bands whose amplitude is given by this variable s dead band of a stored point The horizontal band BoxCar defines a common dead band verification Asecond diagonal band BackSlope defines a variation upwards or downwards the dead band Therefore if this variable is in a descending or ascending continuous derivative it is only necessary to store the initial and final points on this straight line So an analog variableis only recorded if its valu
44. Layers option is selected the following dialog box is shown Screens and Screen Objects 216 x A Use layers to group screen objects that will be shown hidden together Define the screen layers and check the layers you want to make visible Layer Low zoom High zoom Source 0 1000 1 E Camada Layer Configuration The Layer Configuration window has the following options Add Layer F to create a new layer Remove Layer X to remove the selected layer and Edit Layer to edit the selected layer By clicking or the following dialog box is opened Visibility This layer will be visible when the screen zoom factor is between Low zoom 0 High zoom 1000 v EF use a visibility condition Adding or editing layers The available options are 217 Screens and Screen Objects Available options for Layers OPTION DESCRIPTION Layer name Determines the layer s name zoom on the layer the layer Use a visibility condition Enables the use of an additional zoom visibility condition This condition can be a variable or any other property Establishes a Link or property that once active different from zero also displays the layer the Zoom and Source options are not exclusive that is the layer can be activated when either conditions are active For further information see the Scripts Reference Manual 7 3 10 Lock When this option is selected E3 Studio
45. Object Counting W Import W Export i Document Scripts A Check Edit links Copy Links Show in Editor ME Show in Explorer A Properties Activating OPC Driver communication When communication is activated the Server Information and Import Tags options are enabled and also the Deactivate Communication option To use these options right click an OPC Driver and select the preferred option 157 Drivers BE A Ganaa 41 8 Objects Librar lia View Close a Server object a Drivers al aj Import tags a E Deactivate Communication a M Server information H a Data obje w U Database 33 Tag counting St Alarms Ea Explorer Insert gt Rename Edit X Delete A Find Replace Object Counting H Impor W Export G Document Scripts A Check Edit links Copy Links Show in Editor ME Show in Explorer A Properties Enabled options when an OPC Driver is active The Server Information option shows a window with Driver configurations 158 Current Status The server is running but it is unconfigured Group count 0 Band width undetermined Manufacturer E3 OPC Server 4 6 128 c Elipse Software Ltda Version 4 6 128 Start Time 2014 08 11 13 25 00 965 Current Time 2014 08 11 13 25 14 048 Last update time 2014 08 11 13 25 00 965 OPC Server information By using the Import tags option users can import
46. Plugue0 Connected to Center in XControl1 Rectangle1 V Use as object s Anchor Point a New Connection Point window The available options on this window are described on the following table Available options on the New Connection Point window OPTION DESCRIPTION Connection Point name Allows defining a name for this Connection Point Connected to Shows to which Connection Point of the Screen object the XControl Connection Pointis connected Use as object s Anchor Point Selects this Connection Pointas object s anchor point This anchor point can be changed when the XControl is inserted on a Screen Please check also the topic Anchor Point for more information Screens and Screen Objects 204 To edit or exclude a previously created point right click this point and select the Remove Connection Point or Edit Connection Point options according to the next figure A connection point can also be excluded by clicking it with the CTRL key pressed Remove Connection Point Edit Connection Point Removing or editing a connection point If there is no Connection Point defined for Screen objects inserted in an XControl there is no way to connect this XControl to any other Screen object when it is inserted on a Screen 7 2 3 Rectangle It allows drawing rectangles created from two vertexes To use this object follow these procedures 1 Select the Rectangle L on Screen toolbar 2 Click
47. Return Message This message is stored in the alarm event s Message field when it is inactive that is it can be viewed on an E3Alarm alarm summary stored on a Database etc There are several types of Alarm Sources that can be inserted into Server objects The available options are described on the next topics 13 3 1 Analog Allows monitoring an analog variable by specifying up to four alarm levels which are LoLo Very Low Lo Low Hi High and HiHi Very High Ansloghisind properties D8 AnelogalantSource E Item Source Formatting Links Analog Limit Message Severity Need ACK Event Moo of fh E Pu af i Vv a Dre 72 fih Vv ia Mai o f fih 7 E Delay ms o0 Deadband o Return message Pp 0 Analog tab The available options on this tab are described on the next table Available options for Analog tab OPTION DESCRIPTION Enabling LoLo Lo Hi HiHi Enables checking the selected alarm type Alarms 304 OPTION DESCRIPTION Indicates a level in which this alarm is triggered Message text Allows specifying a text displayed to users when this alarm is in an active condition Severity Specifies an alarm level s severity it can be High Medium or Low acknowledgment sub condition as an event Specifies a delaytime in milliseconds When this value is equal to 0 zero default no delayis applied Deadband Enables a dead band which is a feature used to av
48. Round Rectangle the Ellipse the Arc the Freehand the Polygon and the Curved Polygon When clicking Lon the Screen toolbar the objects previously cited display their connection points as in the following figure Connection points of Screen objects To connect two objects just click one of the connection points of the first object and then click one of the connection points of the second one When moving the mouse pointer over a connection point its icon changes from x to indicating which point will be connected After creating a Connector itis also possible to disconnect its vertexes To do so drag the vertex away from the object s connection point To reconnect it drag it near 203 Screens and Screen Objects to a connection point until its icon changes to E To create a connection among more than two connection points just keep the CTRL key pressed while selecting all points To exclude a Connector just select it and press the DELETE key If an object with a Connector is excluded the Connector is not excluded For information about Connectors inside XControls see the next section 7 2 2 1 Connectors inside XControls Screen object Connectors created inside XControls must have their connection points defined previously by clicking kon the Screen toolbar When selecting this tool and clicking a connection point the window on the next figure is then displayed New Connection Point Xs Connection Point name
49. SEREM X Edit links Copy Links Show in Editor Me Show in Explorer o gt Properties Inserting an Alarm Area Some properties of this object can be configured in the Properties List without scripts To configure any property locate it on the Properties List and proceed with the necessary adjustments More information on the functionality of this object s properties can be found on the Scripts Reference Manual in its respective chapter Alarms 288 13 1 1 1 Server Objects as Alarm Areas Server objects have the possibility of behaving as Alarm Areas These objects now have an additional tab Alarms Area where this behavior can be enabled and configured The next figure shows that tab on an I O Driver Driverl properties ODrv JODriver B Item Alarms Area Links Work as alarms area Here you can redefine the user fields sources for this area s alarms Blank sources keep the source defined in the alarm server or in the areas above thi Alarms Area tab The available options on this tab are described on the next table Available options on Alarms Area tab Work as alarms area Enables or disables an Alarm Area behavior for this Server object This option corresponds to the IsAlarmArea property Check alarms Enables or disables alarm check on this object This option corresponds to the AlarmVerify property Please check topic User Fields Settings for more information
50. Screen Instead the result of these filters can be consumed through several alarm counters or through the collection of events NOTES e The Alarm Filter object can be inserted on a Screen on Viewer on a Viewer Folder or on a Data Folder e Alarms cannot be acknowledged using an Alarm Filter To insert this object on a Screen for example follow this procedure 1 Right click a Screen and select the Insert Standard Alarm Filter option 311 Alarms a g Domain Project1 Ja Objects Library m View m Viewer and Frames _ gj Resources Fit to Splitter yi Server objects Gece M coo Rename MSForms gt Edit Panel gt Standard kd Alarm Filter X Delete E3Alarm E Query E3Browser A Find Replace oS See ka Object Counting a ee 4z ESPlayback re RMChartx id Export i Document Scripts A Check Edit links Copy Links gt Show in Editor Show in Explorer F Properties Insert Standard Alarm Filter option Some properties of this object can be configured on the Properties List without creating scripts for this If users need to configure a property locate it on the Properties List and perform the necessary adjustments 13 4 1 Configuration To configure an Alarm Filter right click this object and select the Properties option 13 4 1 1 Connections Tab The Connections tab allows managing Alarm Filter connectio
51. Screens C scrBiodiesel scrBiodieselWide scrDestilacaolnici scrDestilacaolnici Lil al p j 4 m J saBiodiese Panel Saeen w 9 X f SEN Find p Property Value i Backg _ 236 234 A Caption O Screen Title A DocStr O aP FilStyle 8 bkGrad Foreor 255 2563 P Grade 4 bottomUp 4 ni r Jia 4 gt r Design 4 Scripts For Help press F1 h 953 159 w 0 0 Ty 37042 25586 E3 Studio s working area A Title Bar shows application s path and name or the name of an object whose view is currently shown on working area A Status Bar shows help information about the screen area under mouse pointer A Toolbar shows objects components and other resources that can be used on Screen and on E3 A Working Area is where views are displayed 2 3 Settings E3 allows users to personalize some E3 Studio resources such as toolbars keyboard menus mouse etc 2 3 1 Appearance To customize E3 Studio appearance click the View Customize menu The available options are e Commands tab Defines icons for every toolbar To do so click an icon on Commands list and drag it to the preferred toolbar E3 Studio 10 Customize x Commands Toolbars Menus Appearance Options Commands tab The available options on this tab are described on the next table Available options for Commands tab OPTION DESCRIPTION Categories S
52. Start E3 Server option 3 10 9 Close E3 Admin E3 Admin can be closed without closing E3 Server via Close E3 Admin option When this happens E3 Server continues executing but no icon appears on Windows Notification Area In this case when E3 Admin is not open error messages appear as message boxes to all users logged in and active on the machine running that E3 Server 127 Domains At any time E3 Admin can be restarted to control the E3 Server currently executing by simply starting E3 Admin without parameters The installer also creates a shortcut to open E3 Admin directly 3 11 Remote Domains A Remote Domain configuration establishes that different servers and Viewers can communicate where one application provides data and the other application receives it The Domain providing data is called the Server Domain The Domain using that data is called the Client Domain A Domain configured as a Client Domain can also work as a Server Domain and vice versa Remote Domains are not available in Demo mode 3 11 1 Connection Configuration Configuring connections with other E3 Domains is performed on the Client Domain by right clicking E3 Admin icon on Windows Notification Area selecting the Domain Options option and then selecting the Remote Domains tab TB Admin Domain Configuration x Options Security Viewer groups Events recording Projects Servers Remote Domains properties Name Remote1
53. Status Information By using status information a default OPC functionality an OPC client can identify whether an E3 server is currently with no Domain is in standby or is running normally Possible values for OPC status are the following Domain running normally OPC_STATUS_RUNNING e Domain in standby mode OPC_STATUS_SUSPENDED Drivers 152 e Domain stopped or no Domain OPC_STATUS_NOCONFIG 4 2 3 Disconnection For OPC clients that support a shutdown feature a warning is always sent whenever a Domain is stopped or is in standby mode After that warning all OPC clients are disconnected 4 3 OPC Driver An OPC Driver is a module responsible for collecting data from external devices executing an OPC Server which can be supplied by any manufacturer Tags can be imported to an OPC Driver inside E3 in this case working as an OPC client or even created in E3 To use an OPC Driver follow this procedure 1 Right click project s name and select the Insert OPC Client Driver in option E 4 Domain Project 1 m i Objects Library lt Server objects ota Eee ce t Data ob L Insert VO Driver i in UJ Databas m AE in gt Sa Alarms tj Insert OPC UA Dri a aia cele nse river in ie rae Projectl prj prj Find ee Object Counting Document Scripts Check FETT Edit links Load All Objects Close All Objects g Save All Objects Inserting an OPC Driver When inserting an OPC Drive
54. This field is equivalent to the BackupDiscardinterval property and the field to select a time unit for this interval is equivalent to the are added to the alarm table and in which order those columns are Create table Generates an alarm table on the specified Database 293 Alarms The available fields on the Alarm Server to generate an alarm table are described on the next table Available fields for Alarm field tables DESCRIPTION Informs whether an alarm was acknowledged or not This field assumes values 0 Not acknowledged or 1 Acknowledged Determines an automatic acknowledgment of this alarm This field assumes values 0 Automatic acknowledgment or 1 Manual acknowledgment Stores E3 s date and time at the moment an alarm is acknowledged or zero 12 30 1899 while itis not acknowledged For alarms that do not require acknowledgment this field assumes E3 s time stamp at the momentthis alarm becomes active AckTimeDbl Similar to the previous field Itis used to store Double data types for Oracle or SQL Server databases Name of the operator who acknowledged this alarm It can be e The user logged on Viewer when acknowledgment happened on E3Alarm or No user if there is no user logged in System when acknowledgment is automatic thatis foralarms that do not require acknowledgment A name passed via script for example by using Alarm Server s AckArea AckAllAlarms or LogTrackingEvent or Alar
55. accessed remotely In addition to the Read Only access mode it is possible to block remote access completely which demands that the connection with the Remote Domain specifies a given user to grant access to remote objects This is performed via the Remote Domain access permission also on Domain security item 133 Domains NOTE The Remote Domain access permission always precedes the Remote Domain write access permission This means that when the first permission is denied the second one is not used even when explicitly granted When no access permission is configured any Domain can connect remotely to another one by using an anonymous user 3 11 5 Hot Standby A remote connection to the Domain has native support to Hot Standby Domains To do so just specify two different server names main and backup in their respective items in the Identifying servers in the network field on Remote Domains tab Users should notice that for Hot Standby proper work these names must be the same ones configured by the Remote Domain being accessed Once this configuration happens at run time the E3 Server will constantly try to connect to both servers routing access of all Application GetObject methods and Links to the first accessible server and that indicates it is running the Domain In case the server names change when the Client Domain is running it will disconnect and restart a connection with these new servers 3 11 6 Connection Management
56. ah e a n Standard gt E2Gauge ort oS E E3Alarm E E2Setpoint L Document Scripts T Check GJ E3Browser E2Text b E3Chart Edit links E E3Playback Copy Links D RMChartX Show in Organizer FE Show in Explorer F Properties Inserting a graphical object on a Screen Non graphical objects can be used on applications via scripts and they are created with VBScript s CreateObject standard method 10 1 Microsoft Forms To insert one of the Microsoft Forms previously registered in E3 on an application there are two options 1 Right click the Screen and select the Insert MSForms option 2 Select the intended object on Objects toolbar then click the Screen to establish the object s initial point and drag the mouse diagonally until the object reaches the desired size and position The objects from Microsoft Forms library that are available in E3 are described in the next sections 10 1 1 Check Box Indicates whether an option is selected or not or even if itis partially selected It allows multiple selections inside a group Itis inserted on a Screen by selecting the M icon ActiveX 262 10 1 2 Option Button Indicates whether an option is selected or not Unlike the Check Box though only one of these objects can be selected at a time in E3 this control must be performed manually via scripts that set the remaining Option Button s Value properties as 0 zero when one of themis clicked It is
57. an application Security 498 OPTION DESCRIPTION Security Items The available securityitems are Screens Allows users to enable or disable access to Screens In an application all users or groups have access to the main Screen Alarms Enables or disables alarm acknowledgment fora user ora group In a project itis possible to display alarm information to several subscribers of that information by using a Screen object such as an E3Alarm Domains Allows users to configure permissions to execute stop oredita Domain and remotely access a Domain among other permissions Viewer Allows users to use a Viewerin Viewer Full or Viewer Only mode according to its settings Itis a filter for configuration options By enabling this option itis possible to view only registered users in an application Itis a filter for configuration options By enabling this option itis possible to view only registered ps in an application Permissions Shows user or group permissions relative to security items Screens Alarms Domains and Viewers Disable permissions check Disables any permission check Please check the following note about the behavior of this option NOTE The Disable permissions check option must be used carefully because it implies the following behaviors e A login always works even when a password is wrong or when using a non existent username e Actions are always allowed even for anonymous users For e
58. and runs the Domain Saves all project configurations runs a Domain and then executes E3 Viewer e Runs Stops Domain Executes or stops Domain execution e Runs Stops E3 Viewer Executes E3 Viewer or stops its execution in case it is already open 509 E3 Viewer and E3 WebViewer When E3 Viewer is executed the window on the next figure is displayed indicating a connection status A Viewer connection Ear Connecting to the server This operation may take a few minutes Server Status SERS 6 Server has been checked Connecting to Domain New Viewer Cancel E3 Viewer connection status Whenever loosing a server connection E3 then tries to reconnect automatically according to server s configurations To determine which server performs a connection in case of an E3 Viewer failure itis necessary to configure the Servers option configured via E3 Admin as explained in chapter Domains 24 2 2 Via Command Line E3 Viewer can also be accessed via command line Viewer server_name options The server_name parameter stands for the name of a machine where E3 Server is executing If not informed a dialog box is displayed asking about application s server path as when executing E3 Viewer from the Start menu as shown in the next topic Configuration options for this command prompt are e screen or screen Allows users to informa valid initial Screen different from the one configured in a Domain
59. animation option 2 Apply the new Animation NOTE Do not try to remove an Animation from an object using the Organizer because this action removes the object itself 27 3 Screen Objects I cannot rotate a picture inserted using the Gallery Why is this happening Users must convert it to a symbol This allows using commands and options available to native E3 objects For example using a Rotation Frequently Asked Questions 524 27 4 SQL Server Databases This is a list of all possible errors that may occur when testing a connection to this Database ErrorLocal Open Connection ErrorError 0x80004005 Description DBNETLIB ConnectionOpen Connection SQL Server does not exist or access denied Source Microsoft OLE DB Provider for SQL Server SQL State 08001 NativeError 17 POSSIBLE CAUSE Wrong Server Name on a DBServer configuration or this user has no access to that database SOLUTION Check the server name and if this user has permission to connect to that database ErrorLocal Open Connection ErrorError 40x80040E4D Description Login failed for user WrongUser Source Microsoft OLE DB Provider for SQL Server SQL State 42000 NativeError 18456 POSSIBLE CAUSE Wrong user name or password SOLUTION Use an user registered on that database or check the password used ErrorLocal ExecuteSql ErrorError 0x80040E14 Description There is already an object named E3Index in the database Source Mi
60. check the Report and E3Browser chapters Some of this Query properties can be configured using the Properties List without creating scripts for this To configure any property locate it on the Properties List and perform the necessary adjustments For more information please check the Scripts Reference Manual 17 1 Creating a Query When creating an E3Browser or a Report in a project a Query is automatically inserted as a child object named Query1 To use this feature follow these procedures 1 When right clicking a Query and selecting the Configure option a window is then displayed asking for an application s Database Server 367 Query Please type your database server before creating your query Database server Definition of a Database Server in a Query 2 After defining a Database server a new window appears with all tables found on that Database allowing their selection Select the tables you want to use in your query Alarms Alarms_Fields Adding a table 3 Select all tables to use in this query and then click OK 4 After defining all tables the Query s definition window is displayed with four tabs e Fields e Variables Visualize Query 368 Fields Variables Visualize SQL Click in button to add tables in this query Selected fields to query Query setup These tabs are described on the next topics 17 1 1 Fields Tab Thi
61. client computers Viewers Frequently Asked Questions 540 elipse Headquarters Taiwan Rua 24 de Outubro 353 102 andar 9F No 12 Beiping 2nd St Sanmin Dist 90510 002 Porto Alegre 807 Kaohsiung City Taiwan Phone 55 51 3346 4699 Phone 886 7 323 8468 Fax 55 51 3222 6226 Fax 886 7 323 9656 E mail elipse rs elipse com br E mail evan elipse com br Check our website for information about a representative in your city or country www elipse com br kb elipse com br forum elipse com br www youtube com elipsesoftware elipse elipse com br Gartner 2014 CooMendor mn 7y Gartner Cool Vendors in Brazil 2014 April 2014 Gartner does not endorse any vendor product or service depicted in its research publications and does not advise technology users to select only those vendors with the highest ratings Gartner research publications consist of the opinions of Gartner s M icrosoft Pa rtne r research organization and should not be construed as statements of fact Gartner disclaims all warranties expressed or implied Gold Independent Software Vendor ISV with respect to this research including any warranties of merchantability of fitness for a particular purpose
62. contains the user s login name whose account was blocked 3 9 4 7 Domain Started Domain has been started by user USER in SESSION in machine MACHINE Generated whenever a Domain starts executes where e USER contains the user s login name who executed this Domain or Anonymous if no authentication was requested when this Domain was Domains 112 executed SESSION contains Studio or E3 Server menu on Windows Notification Area MACHINE contains the name of the computer where the command to execute this Domain was generated 3 9 4 8 Domain Closed Domain has been closed by user USER in SESSION in machine MACHINE Generated whenever a Domain stops where USER contains the user s login name who stopped this Domain or Anonymous if no authentication was requested when this Domain stopped SESSION contains Studio or E3 Server menu on Windows Notification Area MACHINE contains the name of the computer where the command to stop this Domain was generated 3 9 4 9 Domain Updated Domain has been updated by user USER in SESSION in machine MACHINE Generated whenever a Domain is updated by clicking Mon E3 Studio thatis whenever changes performed on PRJ and LIB files are applied on E3Run where USER contains the user s login name who logged in E3 Studio or Anonymous if no user is logged in SESSION contains Studio MACHINE contains the name of the computer where E3 Stud
63. counting process What is the easiest way to perform a blink in the color of a Screen object when there is an I O error Create a Digital Link between this object s ForegroundColor property and the expression TagName Quality lt 192 with its blink option enabled The Quality property represents the status of Tag s value quality in OPC standard and it may vary from 0 to 255 and that quality is good only above 192 How can I display I O errors on Screen By enabling Viewer s View communication errors option on Communication Errors tab How can I change the default color of I O errors in SetPoints and Displays Go to Viewer s properties window and change that color on Communication Errors tab 27 8 Alarms There was an error in the number of columns of a CSV file when importing an Alarm of type lt typename gt Would you like to proceed the import of the other Alarms ignoring these errors POSSIBLE CAUSES A CSV file with Alarms to import has an error in its columns of the indicated type Alarm files must always have the minimum number of columns expected according to every type Extra columns are skipped To know the correct way to create a CSV file for Alarms please check topic Generating a CSV File Manually on E3 Studio chapter SOLUTION There are three possible answers to that question in the error message e Yes This process of importing Alarms inside this CSV file proceeds ignoring Frequently Asked Questions 5
64. does not allow the object to be moved avoiding unwanted movements After locking an object the mouse displays a pointer with a locker when moving over the object To enable this option right click the object and choose Lock a Locked object To disable this option right click the object again and choose Unlock 7 3 11 Anchor Point An Anchor Point defines the coordinates that mark the starting point of an object The anchor point is initially linked to the object s coordinates To enable this option right click the object and select the Define Anchor Point option The object then appears with an X icon next to it from where it can be moved to any place on the Screen When dragging the object with the new anchor Screens and Screen Objects 218 the point that was defined will be fixed to the grid points and the object will be displaced with the same proportions relative to the anchor This is viewed only if the Snap to Grid Grid properties option is enabled aa See erry eee eee E Object with an anchor point 7 3 12 Shadow Itallows applying or editing the shadow effect on a Screen object Shadow options To use this resource follow these procedures 1 Insertor select the object to which the shadow will be applied 2 Change its properties on the Shadow toolbar according to the following options Available options for Shadow toolbar OPTION DESCRIPTION Eoo Koo or disables a shadow effect on the object
65. ezai Find p Property Value 9 DeviceHigh 1000 9 DeviceLow a0 A DocString P P EnableDriverEvent O False Pi EnableScaling O False A EU Q 9 EUHigh G 1000 9 EULow a0 9 Index 1 Pi sAlamArea O False A Name Hement2 A PathContainer O Driver1 A PathName O Driver1 Block1 Element2 A PathVolume O C Program Files Elipse Sof 9 PercentDeadband O 0 P UseBitFields O False Name Retums sets the name of the object Properties List sorted alphabetically The Properties List of the next figure displays the previous object with its properties sorted by category E3 Studio 74 Property Value E Alarm a Pi IsAamArea O False amp Behavior F EnableDriverEvent 2 False 9 PercentDeadband O 0 P UseBitFields O False E Identification A DocString Q Name Hement2 A PathContainer O Driveri A PathName O Driver1 Block1 Element2 A PathVolume O C Program Files Elipse Parameters 9 Index 1 Scale 9 DeviceHigh Q 1000 9 DeviceLow a0 Name Retums sets the name of the object Properties List sorted by category Properties List s footer displays a quick description of the selected property The available options on this window are described on the next table Available options on Properties List OPTION DESCRIPTION Sort by category Displays all properties of the selected object organized by category Sort alphabetically Displays all properties of the selected object organized alphabetically 75
66. file that contains a Driver is displayed according to the next figure 137 Drivers 1G Browse Driver Lookin J System32 J e EB a Name Date modified Type Recent Places S modemui dll 7 13 2009 10 15PM Applic Desktop montr_ci dll 7 13 2009 10 15PM Applic moricons dll 7 13 2009 10 06 PM Applic a MP3DMOD DLL 7 13 2009 10 15PM Applic Libraries MP4SDECD DLL 7 13 2009 10 15 PM Applic P A MP43DECD DLL 7 13 2009 10 15 PM Applic ee MPG4DECD DLL 7 13 2009 10 15 PM Applic Computer S mpr dil 7 13 2009 10 15PM Applic Ty mprapi dll 11 20 2010 7 29 PM_ Applic mprddm dil 11 20 2010 7 29PM Applic mordim dll 7 13 2009 10 15PM Anplic 4 m p File name Modbus dll pd Files of type E3 Drivers dil v Cancel Selecting a Driver For more information on individual settings for each Driver please refer to their respective help files where information on P parameter s configuration is available as well as other properties available on Driver settings window 4 1 1 1 Communication Test When configuring an I O Driver users can perform a test procedure to check whether its values are correct and being updated with no problems When clicking an I O Driver the Activate Driver option is then opened Thus the specified I O Driver is loaded and its variable values can be viewed in each Tag s Value field on its design view In case there is a Tag with its A
67. from the selected server are located The Leave it blank Use DOM file s folder option is default and indicates that files are on the same folder of the Domain file dom If users select the Use the following local folder option the path typed in that specific field must only contain a folder without Domain s file name or extension dom Maintenance mode disabled This option allows disabling a server thus not using it when executing the Domain When this option is enabled the icon indicates that this server is not used Otherwise the icon indicates that this server can be used 3 9 7 Remote Domains Tab This tab allows adding removing or editing Remote Domains Use the list on the left to select one or more servers to change To open this item right click the E3 Admin icon on Windows Notification Area select the Domain Options option and click Remote Domains tab The window on the next figure is displayed 117 Domains 2 E3 Admin Domain Configuration x Options Security Viewer groups Events recording Projects Servers Remote Domains Properties Name Name Remote1 Domain File P Servers and connection options Main server Backup server Examples PCNAME Note Do not use IP address WPCNAME Advanced Domain user Don t specify anonymous C Use the following account an e Remove Co J ces e Remote Domains tab The available options
68. helps users to develop their applications by informing a logical expression a Link or a value for the property currently manipulated according to the selected object Thus itis possible to minimize errors during the development of an application Initialscreen H 5 Viewer Application i Specifies the Screen s background pT set filling color In scripts use the _ VBScript s RGB method to gather the color to be associated to this property The default value of this property is gray RGB 192 192 192 How do you evaluate information on this topic C Unsatisfactory Satisfactory Good K m Excellent NERSES TA S AE E I E E EN AppBrowser 77 E3 Studio The left panel displays E3 objects that can be used to compose the text that is the result of using AppBrowser According to its usage context some objects cannot be used and are not even displayed here The center panel shows selected object s methods and properties and on the right panel there is a help text for the selected property or method The panel at the bottom displays the resulting text from AppBrowser next to the Paste and Cancel options Click Paste to accept the result and copy this value to the desired area Click Cancel to ignore it There are three different ways to use AppBrowser e Via scripts e Via Links e Via some object s properties with the name of another object as their value Each one of these ways i
69. hiding or displaying code blocks in scripts Marginsze Size of the margin containing code blocks Enables line numbering in Scripts Editor numbering Scripts Editor OoOO ee the size of the font used in Scripts Editor 17 E3 Studio NOTE Close all open Scripts Editors to apply these changes e Files tab Enables or disables the Ignore CRC check option Options 3 General Scripts Editor Files Ignore CRC check Files tab Every time a project or library is created E3 internally stores a CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check code for this file s data Every time a file is opened this CRC code is then checked In case that check fails that is its CRC code does not match data loading this file is aborted indicating file s data corruption This may be due to hardware failures such as memory network storage device etc However if a project created with the latest version is then modified in a version previous to 1 00 019 build 203 this CRC code is not updated This means that a file cannot be opened again in new versions because its CRC check fails even though this fileis not corrupted To solve this question enable the Ignore CRC check option Thus a project can be opened in the current version E3 Studio 18 In this case this option must remain enabled until all objects edited in previous versions are saved by the current version which then updates its CRC code NOTE It is not recommended to edit prj files
70. icons ona toolbar 2 3 2 Other Settings Users can configure E3 s Scripts Editor as well as other options for Domain files by using the Tools Options menu where users have access to the configuration window on the next figures e General tab Configures the behavior when double clicking objects in Organizer when an object s view is already open 15 E3 Studio Options Ea General Scripts Editor Files Configure double click in object to Activate Script view C Open Properties Window V Show close button on active tab Cancel General tab The available options on this tab are described on the next table Available options for General tab clicking an object double clicking an object Show close button on active tab Allows closing the active tab when clicking its Close button Clearing the selection of this option places the Close button on view s right side e Scripts Editor tab This item configures E3 s Scripts Editor E3 Studio 16 Options Ea General Scripts Editor Files Window MV Collapsible nodes Margin size 15 Line numbering Margin size 15 Tabs Tab size 4 Font Font Size ty courier New 16 Note Close all opened script editors in order to apply changes Cancel Scripts Editor tab The available options on this tab are described on the next table Available options for Scripts Editor tab OPTION DESCRIPTION Collapsible nodes Allows
71. inserted on a Screen by selecting the icon 10 1 3 Combo Box Combines the functionality of a List Box and a Text box with this object users can either type the value directly or select an item froma pre established list It is inserted on a Screen by selecting the E icon 10 1 4 Command Button Used to execute specific actions when pressed such as opening a window printing a report etc Itis inserted on a Screen by selecting the salicon 10 1 5 Label Displays text messages that cannot be edited by the user such as control descriptions or captions It is inserted on a Screen by selecting the icon 10 1 6 List Box Displays a list of items that users can choose one or more items Itis inserted on a Screen by selecting the E icon 10 1 7 Scroll Bar Facilitates navigation through a long list of items or a big amount of information either horizontally or vertically Itis inserted on a Screen by selecting the icon 10 1 8 Spin Button Used to increment or decrement values by using a pair of arrows Itis inserted on a Screen by selecting the Sl icon 10 1 9 Text Editor Enables users to insert and edit texts Itis inserted on a Screen by selecting the abl icon 263 ActiveX 10 1 10 Toggle Button Allows users to set one of two states to another Screen object It is inserted ona Screen by selecting the icon 10 2 Elipse KeyPad Elipse KeyPad is an ActiveX control developed by Elipse Software that allows us
72. is only used in case the Source field contains an expression for example Driver1 Tag1 Driver1 Tag2 So if expressions are not used in the Source field there is no need to care about a field s name The available options are described on the next table Available options for Storage view OPTION DESCRIPTION aa Storage table configurations Database Determines data source to link to this field Type Determines this field type on a Storage table If this column changes to Bit Text or Integer the MinRecTime MaxRecTime Scan Dead Band and Unit columns are disabled 339 Storage Storage table OPTION DESCRIPTION MinRecTime Minimum time for data insertion ona table This field is calculated in milliseconds MaxRecTime Maximum time for data insertion ona table in seconds If this time exceeds data is considered old and therefore stored Scan time of this field If it is O zero this column is disabled and displays a value defined in MaxRecTime in milliseconds IDeadBand o o o o y y Dead Band Dead band to calculate the algorithm modification 15 1 1 Creating an Empty Storage A Storage object can be created without configuring its fields For this just fill in the DBServer and TableName properties when creating it This configuration allows creating a query only Storage which is very useful when accessing data generated by external applications Some restrictions apply in this situation
73. its values FieldType Field s type FieldVARTYPE Field s native data type 0 Undefined 3 343 Storage Storage implementation allows users to not worry about how data is stored on tables However for a better understanding on how this module works and also to allow access to other programs table format is explained next Options for table management described in the previous item actually apply to three table sets generated by a Storage according to the Table Name field This happens because for every type of stored magnitude a set of tables is automatically generated a set for analog Tags another one for texts and one more set for digital Tags This way every Storage can manage up to seven tables if users specify that three types of Tags must be stored e lt TableName gt _Fields e lt TableName gt e lt TableName gt _Text e lt TableName gt _Bit e lt TableName gt _Backup e lt TableName gt _Text_Backup e lt TableName gt _Dig Backup The _Fields table contains a description of fields to store which usually store the same information defined in Storage s fields configuration in addition to link an automatic index to each field All other tables havea fixed format e E3TimeStamp Field that stores date and time of a Tag variation If the communication protocol supports sending time information this field contains device s timestamp e Quality Contains information about point s quality Bad Uncertain or
74. mode is performed via StartReadOnly property either True or False If there is no such item then it assumes a False value this behavior is compatible with previous versions Example var content lt object classid clsid 7EB4D157 FACC 45BB 9536 C14B9DCE3CA7 content width 100 height 100 gt content lt PARAM NAME Domain VALUE 192 0 0 21 gt content lt PARAM NAME Screen VALUE gt content lt PARAM NAME CachePath VALUE gt content lt PARAM NAME Ping VALUE gt content lt PARAM NAME StartReadOnly VALUE FALSE gt content lt object gt document write content In both cases this configuration is only effective when opening E3 WebViewer If this property is changed at run time E3 WebViewer s connection or reconnection are not affected at all Both servers and E3 WebViewer can execute on the same machine or on different machines The next topics show how these situations apply 24 4 1 Internet Information Services To view on the Internet as well as on an Intranet or a local machine itis necessary to install and configure IIS internet Information Services or another Internet server IIS is supplied along with Windows To install and configure it follow these procedures 1 Open the Start Control Panel menu on Windows Server 2003 SP2 Windows XP SP3 Windows Vista SP2 and Windows 7 SP1 or open the Apps Windows System Control Panel it
75. next line by typing in screen_name a valid application s Screen name lt param name Screen value screen_name gt In case users want to inform whether a ping command to a server must occur before trying a connection change the next line Its value can be either True or False lt param name Ping value TRUE gt If this line is omitted a ping command is executed In case users want to navigate to a page other than default after loading E3 WebViewer they must change the value attribute of the URLToLoad parameter to a new address lt param name URLToLoad value url gt If this line is omitted e3web2 asp page is then loaded In case users want to specify a different directory to save Viewer s cache change the next line If itis omitted this value is Windows default temporary directory the TEMP environment variable lt param name cachepath value cache_directory gt In case users want WebViewer to search for other servers on a network if it cannot E3 Viewer and E3 WebViewer 514 connect to a server specified on the Domain parameter they must change the next line If this parameter is not informed WebViewer tries to connect only to a server specified by the Domain parameter which is its standard behavior a True value Changing this value to False only works for servers and WebViewers on the same network lt param name useservers value FALSE gt E3 WebViewer s configuration to open in Read Only
76. on this tab are described on the next table Available options for Remote Domains tab o Domains in the system Add Remove By using these options users can add or remove Remote Domains in the system To add a Remote Domain on a network click Add and then specify the Name and Domain File fields To remove a Domain select it on the list and then click Remove in the name of the Remote Domain This is a user defined name Domain File Determines the name or network path where the Remote Domain s dom file is located network Domains 118 OPTION DESCRIPTION Backup server When enabled identifies the backup server on the network Domain user Allows recognizing a user with password foreach Remote Domain The available options are Don t specify anonymous and Use the following account By selecting the second option the User and Password fields are enabled Identifies a user Password Allows connecting to a Domain using a password Itis possible that a Remote Domain configuration provides a way to connect to the local Domain itself This is called a Local Alias or a Loopback connection This alias is created according to a regular Remote Domain configuration It is enough that server names main and backup be localhost or the same name as the machine where the Domain is executing so that it works locally In this case for this configuration to work on E3 Studio in the Domain File field inform the
77. or data type The second field is used for negative numerical values The third field is used whenever the numerical value is zero The fourth field is used for text type values Whenever defining more than one field the previous field is considered even if itis empty In the event of an empty field format the formatted value is always an empty text Notice how this differs from the General format which is just an empty format without field separators semicolons To insert characters that is displayed by the format users can place them between quotes or after a backslash Examples valid for all format types Text Input FORMAT FORMATTED OUTPUT Users can also create formats that contain only text which can be combined with the use of different fields as in the next example Format and Formatted Output VALUE Text Text Text Text Also the following characters can be displayed directly without the need of quotation marks or slashes 4 amp simple quote to the left simple quote to the right lt gt NOTE To displaya backslash or double quotation marks in the formatted data use or When the text is between quotation marks the whole text is copied directly so a is displayed simplyas a Screens and Screen Objects 228 Numerical formats accept three basic types of characters to define the number of displayed digits Numerical Formats OPTION DESCRIPTION Inserts the
78. or months for data on the backup table until itis discarded regardless of the time data remains on the main table For example to keep data for 24 months on the main table and six more months on the backup table this option s value must be 30 months This interval must be longer than the one configured in the Discard data older than option of the main table This field is equivalent to the BackupDiscardinterval property and the field to select a time unit for this interval is equivalent to the Database This option is also available by right clicking a Historic objectin Organizer and selecting the Create DB Structure option Historic When clicking Create Table Studio displays the dialog box on the next figure Tables struct o The database table structure was created successfully System message When the Create Table option is used the table specified on this Historic objectis then generated and also a _Fields table This table contains information about each field stored on a Historic object Historic_Fields E go O FieldID O FieldName O FieldQuality O FieldDescription O FieldSource O FieldType O FieldEU O FieldLowEng CO FieldHighEng O FieldDeadBand O FieldDeadBandUnit O FieldMinRecTime O FieldMaxRecTime O FieldSize O FieldVARTYPE O FieldScanTimeMs Fields table The available fields on the _Fields table of a Historic object are described on the next table Fiel
79. perform the following actions e Access Viewer or one of its child objects from a Screen or a Screen control Links or scripts e Viewer s child objects can access other Viewer s children or Viewer itself Links or scripts e Viewer can access its own child objects Links or scripts It is important to notice that a Link to a Viewer must use its real name for example Viewer1 and not simply Application In scripts users can still use Application which is a property of all objects returning a Viewer 6 3 top Object Whenever a Viewer is inserted in a project it then provides a child Frame called _top This object has the same functionality of the Frame s Splitter object To use this resource follow these procedures 1 Click the Viewer object The Viewer then displays a child object called _top Domain Project1 F it Settings ga Objects Library m View i Viewer and Frames i Viewer aj top E Frame 4 Screens fei Reports Resources Pal Server objects Explorer F F _top object 2 To configure the properties of the _top object right click it and select the Properties option 3 This object has the same properties of a Frame s Splitter and such information can be found on chapters Screens and Frames Viewer 198 6 4 Viewer Folder A Viewer F
80. projectl prj lt New File gt A Find Replace Object Counting W Document Scripts h Check Edit links Load All Objects Close All Objects g Save All Objects Inserting a Storage in Domain mode If necessary configure object s properties Some of its properties can be configured using the Properties List without creating scripts for this For more information please check the Scripts Reference Manual 15 1 Configuration Whenever a Storage is created on a Screen a list with record field definitions is then displayed Storage 338 E Storage1 x 4 gt X Fy Name Source Type MinRec MaxRec Scan De Unit E Dzta DemoTag1 Value 0 Double z Oms 110 dbPercent E Field2 Data DemoTag2 Value 0 Double Oms 1 0 dbPercent Field3 Data DemoTag3 Value 0 Double Oms 1 O dbPercent Field4 Data DemoTag4 Value 0 Double Oms 1 0 dbPercent M 4 gt gt Design 4 Scripts Fields configured for Storage To add a field users can drag and drop a Tag or property from Organizer or else define a field and its source manually NOTE Storage licenses are checked only when an application is executed and consider only active fields in that application not the existing amount of fields on the database For further querying on data every search is performed on the Tag path or on the property being stored as defined in the Source field The Name property
81. properties when selected show a El button to the right of the Value field on the Properties List By clicking it AppBrowser is opened and displays only objects that can be used as values for the selected property Properties and methods of these objects are omitted This is the case for example of Formula s DBServer property AppBrowser only shows the existing Database type objects in an application AppBrowser via property E3 Studio 80 Properties that allow using AppBrowser are e Formula s Historic s and Storage s DBServer e Alarm Server s DataSource e Viewer s InitialScreen e FrameSet s SplitLink 2 10 Connect To The Connect To option is used to determine an E3 Studio connection to a server This option allows configuring in which Domain server an E3 Studio must connect and also allows specifying whether an E3 Studio must retrieve a license from the server where the Domain executes or if it must retrieve that license from another server To use this resource click the File Connect to menu to open the dialog box on the next figure Connect to wm Domain Server Connect to local server Connect to a server in the network Studio license Get license from the current Domain server C Use license from the following server Oooo L ox f cu Connect to window Available options for Connect to window OPTION DESCRIPTION Connect to local server Enables a connection to a lo
82. property and source values Rectanglel properties Panel DrawRect E3 Item Position Links Value on Source Value on Property 20000 E 32 78 0 o E 06 0 0 9 Efect3D_X 9 Efect3D_Y i Efect3DColorBase Analog Link The available options for this Link are described on the next table Available options for an Analog Link OPTION DESCRIPTION Value on Source Determines maximum and minimum values reached on source Links 236 OPTION DESCRIPTION Value on Property Determines maximum and minimum values reached on property To use this resource follow these procedures 1 Select the object for the Link 2 Right click this object and select the Properties option 3 Click the Links tab and select the property to perform the Link Studio indicates several types of Links 4 Inthe Source field select the Link and click El to indicate the property to refer or write down an expression in this field 8 5 Table With a Table Link users can establish a set of intervals based on the minimum and maximum source values and for each one of these values a value to be assumed by a property In addition as in a Digital Link users can specify a Blink option and an alternative value To use this resource follow these procedures 1 Open the object s properties window and select the Links tab 2 Select the property to create a Link and click the Table Connection item Rectanglel propert
83. protection password for an application Security 504 1 protection Please type and confirm the studio protection password for this file Password Confirm password Lo c Add protection e The Change password option changes an execution s protection password for a file P Change protection password Please type the previous and new studio protection passwords Previous password New password Confirm password Change password e The Remove protection option removes an execution protection from a file To do so click it type a password and click OK The application then opens a message box thatinforms whether this action was executed successfully When a lib or a prj file is opened in E3 Studio it displays a gray icon za with a lock indicating that this file is protected and its contentis not available To access this file s content right click this project or library and select the Open witha password option After typing a password and the application granting access to its content this icon becomes colorful Mia indicating file accessibility The content of protected lib and prj files is encrypted Whenever a project is protected the DocString and Domain properties are blocked 505 Security Security 506 CHAPTER E3 Viewer and E3 WebViewer E3 Viewer is an E3 s viewing environment With E3 Viewer users can watch the execution of applications created i
84. reading operations are needed in every table to read three events that is three table rows Tags reported by events can also allow configuring a scan time For these Tags however every reading operation can return a series of values or blocks of values Drivers 142 with their own quality and timestamp That is when using Tags reported by events to read those previous tables itis possible to get those three events data from three rows of every table at once on a single reading operation a single scan Reading values returned by Tags reported by events is performed through Tag s OnRead event At every reading operation that return values an application triggers a series of OnRead events For every returned value or event an application fills Tag s properties value timestamp and quality with values from a specific event and then triggers an OnRead event In casea Driver does not have events or values to return that reading operation reported by events unlike common Tags may not return any data nor generate any error as if this operation had never occurred Ascan time of Tags reported by events can be usually configured with a low value because CPU consumption in case there is no value to return is usually irrelevant The TimeStamp property of these Tags usually contains a device provided value NOTE Tags reported by events must be configured with their EnableDeadBand property disabled This avoids that events with v
85. recorded in your file A You can choose between a more detailed documentation induding all code scripting or a simplified version How detailed do you want your file to be Only the script name Ex InicialScreen_ClickQ The whole script Ex Sub InicialScreen_KeyDown KeyCode Shift if KeyCode 27 Then Application Exit End if End sub cea na gt conce_ File formatting For example the following script Sub InitialScreen_KeyDown KeyCode Shift If KeyCode 27 Then Application Exit End Sub If the selected option is Only the script name the following textis stored in this file InitialScreen_KeyDown KeyCode Shift If however the selected option is The whole script then this code is stored with the same user defined format indentation blank lines etc in Scripts editor Regardless of the chosen format an identifier containing an object name is stored before saving this script to avoid conflicts For example the following objects InitialScreen CommandButton1 Screen1 CommandButton1 Both scripts considering the same event Click would be CommandButton1_Click So file recording would be E3 Studio 32 lt InitialScreen CommandButton1 CommandButton1_Click gt Sub CommandButton1_Click End Sub And lt Screen1 CommandButton1 CommandButton1_Click gt Sub CommandButton1_Click End Sub This allows correctly identifying each script Click Next to go to the next window
86. rotation and animation are only effective when working with a metafile converted to a symbol The following file formats are supported Bitmap bmp Graphics Interchange Format gif Joint Photographic Experts Group jpg ICO File Format ico Windows Metafile wmf Enhanced Metafile emf Portable Network Graphics png and Tagged Image File Format tif To use this object follow these procedures 1 Select the Picture 4 on Screen toolbar 2 Click a Screen to create this object s origin vertex and drag the mouse pointer diagonally to its final vertex 3 Studio opens a dialog box to select an image file according to the next figure 18 Select picture a Look in Sample Pictures J gA E Chrysanthemum jpg yy Desert jpg Recent Places Hydrangeas jpg amp Jellyfish jpg Koala jpg op Lighthouse jpg Penguins jpg 4 Tulips jpg File name X Files of type Image files bmp cur emf gif ico jpg png tif wmt v ih Selecting an image file 207 Screens and Screen Objects 4 Selecta file and click Open to insert that picture on this Screen 7 2 11 Text It allows creating a text to be displayed on Screen To use this object follow these procedures 1 Select the Text Aon Screen toolbar 2 Type the desired text and then press ENTER 3 To change or type a text in this object use its Value property 7 2 12 Display It allows creating an object that displays Tag
87. same E3Chart as well as among different E3Charts Right click a Pen or the selected Pens in case of a multiple selection and select the Copy CTRL C option On the destination E3Chart open the Properties window and on Pens tab right click the list of Pens and select the Paste CTRL V option The Cut CTRL X option is also present If the E3Chart 396 destination E3Chart already contains a Pen with the same name of the one currently copied its name is automatically incremented Some Pen properties can be directly configured on the list displayed on Pens tab On Style tab when clicking E the window on the next figure is then displayed Pen Style Ea Background color C white Drawing style lines o Dash style gt Line thickness o minimum Sample ce Pen style The available options on this window are described on the next table Available options for Pen style window ee equivalent to Pen s Color property Background color Defines a background colorused onan Area type Pen This is equivalent to Pen s BkColor property Drawing style Defines Pen s drawing type Lines Points Lines and Points or Area This is equivalent to Pen s PenType property Dash style Defines a line type Solid Dashed Dotted Dash Dot Dash Dot Dot or No Line This is equivalent to Pen s PenStyle property to Pen s Width property A Plea drawn on an E3Chart 397 E3Chart When selecting a
88. select froma series of pre defined resolutions whereas the Advanced option allows users to customize this value Domains 92 Viewer resolution F Configure whether your application will be executed with a different resolution E3 Studio can create new Screens to fit the resolution of the computer where the application will be executed To do so configure the properties from Viewer that define the application s resolution What is the resolution of the computer executing the application Screen resolution PUL Sys Usable area 1024 x 706 Advanced cease Trew ne Viewer Resolution screen Click Next to proceed 3 8 1 4 I O Driver On this screen users can add an I O Driver object to this project If they add it itis possible to configure a dll file used by this Driver in the I O Driver filename option To search for a file click E 93 Domains I O Driver Please select an I O driver for your application if all I O drivers are responsible for data acquisition in the E3 application Do you want to install an I O driver No C Yes I O Driver filename lt Back Next gt Cancel 1 O Driver screen Click Next to proceed 3 8 1 5 Database On this screen users can add a Database object to this project If they add it itis possible to configure an mdb file used by this Database in the Enter the database name MDB option To search for a file click E Domains 94
89. type Tag s full name for example Data DemoTag1 Value Configure the desired date format This can be performed by right clicking an object and setting its properties or else directly typing a format in the OutputFormat property in the Properties List an example of date format is MM dd yyyy hh mm ss l have a Report that displays a Query result with a filter by date When this Report is generated its Query does not return all values configured via script for these variables How can I solve this problem Check in the script that configures or accesses this Report if after configuring these values for Query variables a LoadReport method was not triggered since this method loads a Report with all settings performed in E3 Studio Use only once the LoadReport method ina script loading a Report to a variable using the Set command How can I correctly run a Report that uses the CopyConfig method to copy all configurations of an E3Chart on a Screen to it The CopyConfig method does not copy values of query variables this must be performed using scripts inside a chart Pens configured in an E3Chart on Screen are of type Real How can I create a filter by date on a Report Create a SQL query in a Report filtering by start and final date On a Screen that generates this Report users must run the configured SQL query passing the start and final date values The script of a button on the Screen where this Report is 535 Frequently A
90. using a data type specified in this field which can be Integer Long Single etc Drivers 160 OPTION DESCRIPTION Access type Filters Tags using an access type specified in this field which can be Read and Read and Write Show only items with IDs not found in the Filters Tags so that this application only current project shows items with IDs not found ina project merear a selected objects to add to the current project import To import Tags select a Tag and drag it to an OPC Driver or OPC Group To deactivate OPC Driver communication click Deactivate Communication Some OPC Driver properties can be configured using Properties List without creating scripts for this To configure any property locate it on Properties List and perform the necessary adjustments For more information please check the Scripts Reference Manual 4 3 1 1 Functionality Communication of E3 s OPC client with an OPC server is performed by a separate process This process when OPC Driver is activated in Studio executes on the current user logged in Windows At run time on the other hand this process is executed on SYSTEM account Some OPC servers may be sensitive to the account they are running on and for this reason it may be necessary to reconfigure this process to execute on a specific user To do so follow these procedures 1 Go to Start Control Panel Administrative Tools Component Services menu or type dcomenfg on Windows c
91. value to use as a column s name on CSV file s header This column s initial value is always the name of the property itself For each changed value on this column an entryis generated on the INI file in Columns section Column names are not case sensitive thatis AAA aaa and aAa are the same value If users define the same column s name for more than one property only one of them is properly identified and all columns with the same name point to the same property In this case some values may be overwritten ae ne ts properion wo is Tit amp and changing property s sort order on the x Removes properties from this list a property P Property Indicates the property being imported orl exported list except for ObjectType Alternatively Creates a column s name linked to more than one property Select the properties to group and then click this option Column names are grouped on the same row using the column s name defined forthe property at the top of this list Oo Displays a window with a help text By clicking F a window opens to select properties as shown on the next figure E3 Studio 62 Properties 3 Object classes TOBlock fa MV List all E3 object dasses Properties P AllowRead P AllowWrite EnableDriverEvent 3 Enables OnTagRead Event on Driver Double dick to add or remove a property Properties in bold are already on the list Properties w
92. values at run time To use this object follow these procedures 1 Select the Display Llon Screen toolbar 2 Click the Screen to create the object s origin vertex then drag the mouse diagonally to its final vertex until the object reaches the desired size and position 3 Right click the object to open its Properties window On the Item tab choose the Tag to be linked to the Display s Value property 7 2 13 SetPoint This object works as an edit box in which contents are inserted to be attributed to associated Tags To use this object follow these procedures 1 Select the SetPoint El on Screen toolbar 2 Click the Screen to create the object s origin vertex then drag the mouse diagonally to its final vertex until the object reaches the desired size and position 3 Right click the object to open its Properties window On the Item tab choose the Tag to be linked to the SetPoint s Value property 7 2 14 Scale It allows creating an object that draws rulers and value scales To use this object follow these procedures 1 Select the Scale id on Screen toolbar 2 Click the Screen to create the object s origin vertex then drag the mouse diagonally to its final vertex until the object reaches the desired size and position Screens and Screen Objects 208 7 3 General Configurations The following configurations can be applied to a Screen or to Screen objects 7 3 1 Alignment It allows users to align Screen obj
93. 09 20 14fev 2013 09 40 10 00 10 20 10 40 11 00 11 20 11 40 12 00 12 20 1240 13 00 13 20 13 40 14fev 2013 K 3 4fev 2013 14fev 2013 14fev E Viewer x YTE Date time Tag Path Event a 2013 02 14 13 DadosDestilacao Valv201 Al LO Abertura e 2013 02 14 13 DadosDestilacao Valv501 Al LO Abertura e 2013 02 14 13 DadosDestilacao Valv301 Al LO Abertura e 2013 02 14 13 DadosDestilacao Valv401 Al LO Abertura e 2013 02 14 13 DadosDestilacao LIC201 Al LO Valor yy 2013 02 14 13 DadosDestilacao LICSO1 Al LO Valor yy 2013 02 14 13 DadosDestilacao FIC101 Al LO Valor yy 2013 02 14 13 DadosDestilacao FIC301 Al LO Valor yy 2013 02 14 13 DadosDestilacao FIC201 Al LO Valor yy 2013 02 14 13 DadosDestilacao FIC501 AIl LO Valor yy 2013 02 14 13 DadosDestilacao TIC1O1Al Hk Valor em H Date time Dados Saneamento ETA ani Erro Tag n lt Empty gt Ruim 0 O Dados Saneamento ETA ani Erro Tag n lt Empty gt Ruim 0 Dados Saneamento ETA ani Erro Tag n lt Empty gt Ruim 0 Dados Saneamento ETA ani Erro Tag na lt Empty gt Ruim 0 Dados Saneamento ETA ani Erro Tag nd lt Empty gt Ruim 0 Dados Saneamento ETA ani Erro Tag na lt Empty gt Ruim 0 alt Dados Saneamento ETA ani histSane OK lt Null
94. 1 Green 256 Blue 65536 Consider that Red Green and Blue variables can assume values ranging from 0 zero to 255 For example e Black 0 0 0 O 1 0 256 0 65536 0 White 255 255 255 255 1 255 256 255 65536 16777215 Red 255 0 0 255 1 0 256 0 65536 255 Green 0 255 0 0 1 255 256 0 65536 65280 Blue 0 0 255 0 1 0 256 255 65536 16711680 NOTE Values stored on object properties referring to colors are numerical calculated using the previously described formula The Find and Replace tool uses this stored value on its search process and not the value formatted as RGB as displayed on Properties window 7 5 Value Format Using formatters allows users to change how data is displayed without changing the value behind them A format is a text that can be either edited manually or configured via format dialog box Its usage is similar to the formatters used in spreadsheets following the same basic syntax but with a few extensions The following data types are supported e Number decimal scientific hexadecimal binary or octal outputs e Text e Boolean e Date and Time Gregorian calendar The objects that support formats must change their data type in the Value property according to the intended format type Screens and Screen Objects 226 SSS 8585858585858 8 558585858580 8 55858585858 8 8 8 0 SS Textl properties Panel DrawString
95. 234 56789 dd MMMM yyyy 18 may 1903 0 56789 hh mm ss 000 tt 01 37 45 696 PM 12 345678 hh hmm mss 000 s 296h17m46 667s NOTE Values stored in object properties referring to dates are numerical values calculated using the previous formula The Find and Replace tool uses that stored value on the search process and not the formatted date and time values displayed on Properties window Screens and Screen Objects 230 CHAPTER Links Links are connections performed among properties and objects or among properties Links make easier to create animations and other types of common logic thus minimizing the usage of scripts Users can open the Links tab by right clicking the object and then selecting Properties This tab displays all object properties that can be connected as well as the existing Link types and their sources Rectanglel properties Panel DrawRect E3 Item Position Links Source No connection Simple connection Bi directional connection 3 Digital connection 1 Analog connection Wa Table connection 9 Hfect3D X gt Reverse connection 9 Effect3D_Y E Multiple connection i Effect3DColorBase Links tab The available options on Links tab are described on the next table Available options for Links tab OPTION DESCRIPTION Properties Lists object properties that can be linked 231 Links OPTION DESCRIPTION Determines the Link type of the selected property For commo
96. 28 only this error about the number of columns The Alarm whose columns are incorrect is not imported e Yes All This process of importing Alarms proceeds ignoring all subsequent Alarms with error in the number of columns that may exist in that CSV file e No The process of importing stops but Alarms already imported are preserved To prevent this error this CSV file must be created according to recommendations on chapter Alarms IMPORTANT Although Tag and Alarm files have the same extension csv internally they are different Hence an Alarm file is not suited for Tags and vice versa I created a CSV file manually containing an Alarm configuration How can import it Check Region and Language configurations on Windows Control Panel and if the decimal separator is the same used in this CSV file TIP create an Alarm in E3 and use the export tool using the resulting file as a template for generating new Alarms How can I display an E3TimeStamp field with milliseconds in E3Browser and in E3Alarm Use the Others format and type MM dd yyyy HH mm ss 000 This configuration for an E3Browser is performed on Data Source tab on Format column of each field For an E3Alarm such configuration is performed on Columns tab by clicking Properties on each field The following error message appears Impossible to create alarm signatures on the Alarm Server with filter Error code 0x800706F7 What does that mean The name of t
97. 29 399 9 27 09 2013 09 05 02 220 9 27 09 2013 09 05 02 220 A 27 09 2013 09 05 02 230 FI 27 09 2013 09 05 02 224 P 27 09 2013 09 05 02 227 9 27 09 2013 09 05 02 226 9 27 09 2013 09 05 02 219 A 27 09 2013 09 05 02 223 A 27 09 2013 09 05 02 221 A 27 09 2013 09 05 02 222 A 27 09 2013 09 05 02 228 9 27 09 2013 09 05 02 229 9 27 09 2013 09 05 29 399 FA 27 09 2013 09 05 02 228 9 27 09 2013 09 05 29 399 9 27 09 2013 09 05 29 399 9 27 09 2013 09 05 13 187 9 27 09 2013 09 05 13 186 A 27 09 2013 09 05 13 196 PI 27 09 2013 09 05 13 190 P1 80 9423602086376 0 True False 100 0 DemoTag1 Data Data DemoTag1 NOVO PRJ 10000 1000 27 09 2013 09 05 29 1 80 9423602086376 80 9423602086376 WatchWindow dialog box Options on this dialog box are described on the next table Available options for WatchWindow dialog box OPTION DESCRIPTION Opens a DomainBrowser an AppBrowser containing objects created on a server and selects an object to displayon WatchWindow WatchWindow s objects list E3 Studio 36 OPTION DESCRIPTION Refresh Searches for the whole child tree of currently selected objects on WatchWindow Se UE to reactivate a lost connection with a Domain to enable viewing it Name Displays a Tag or property being viewed Quality Displays the quality of a Tag or property property run time a Ra or not 2 5 Organizer The Organizer allows users to view an application as a whole i
98. 3Alarm This option corresponds to the Add method of the Collection of Connections x Removes the selected Connection This option corresponds to the Remove method of the Collection of Connections NOTE The Connection created automatically with an E3Alarm cannot be removed Connection Name Name of this Connection Press the F2 key to edit this name This option corresponds to Connection s ConnectionName property on the Collection of Connections Friendly name to identify the Domain of the selected Alarm Server This option corresponds to Connection s DomainName property on the Collection of Connections 321 E3Alarm OPTION DESCRIPTION Alarm Server Name of an Alarm Server which can be on a local Domain as well as on a remote Domain This option corresponds to Connection s AlarmServer property on the Collection of Connections Click Elo select an Alarm Server using AppBrowser Connection filter Name ofa Filter that contains settings for alarm filters defined on Filters tab This option corresponds to Connection s FilterConnection property on the Collection of Connections Users can access a remote Alarm Server by simply filling Connection s AlarmServer property of E3Alarm s Collection of Connections with data for remote Domain and Alarm Server in the format DOMAIN SERVER where SERVER is the name of the remote Alarm Server and DOMAIN is the name of a Remote Domain that contains it To configure a Remote Domain pleas
99. 5 Save Al Recent Domains gt Recent Files gt Exit User Login or Logout The Login option opens a dialog box for logging in E3 Studio Users remain logged in until another login or logoutis performed The Logout option executes a log out from E3 Studio In case no user is logged in this option is then disabled 23 4 File Protection Protects a prj or lib file content against unauthorized edition viewing or execution To use this resource follow these procedures 1 Right click the project s or library s name in Explorer and then select the Protection option In Domain mode right click the project s or library s name in the Settings Files item and then select the Protection option 2 The following window is then displayed Security 502 Protect file contents against unauthorized use m Studio Protection Protect the file contents from being ad aaa Change the studio protection password for this file Remove studio protection from this file Execution Protection To protect your file from unauthorized execution a password must be stored in the HARDKEY Protected files run only in password programmed servers Protect file against unauthorized execution Change execution protection password for this file Remove execution protection for this file File protection window This window has two types of protection Studio Protection and Execution Protection Studio Protecti
100. 508 24 1 1 Changes in Viewer Mode For users to have access to E3 with Read Only mode on at least one of these two conditions must be true e The license in use must be of type Viewer Only e Auser logged on with no permission to access a Writing access to the server item It is worth noticing that in case there is no user logged on a Viewer anonymous user access restrictions apply as long as one or more users have this restriction Thus every time a user changes Viewer s access mode can be changed and consequently the IsReadOnly property according to the result of a combination between whatis permitted by the license in use and the permission of the logged in user Changing access mode can also happen in case there is a Viewer reconnection since it can trigger either a license change from Viewer Full to Viewer Only or vice versa or a change in permissions of the logged in user In case there is any user with a blocked writing access to a server when Viewer opens they enter this application automatically with Read Only mode on regardless of the license in use since an anonymous user always assume the maximum configured restriction 24 2 Executing E3 Viewer There are three ways to execute E3 Viewer via local server via intranet server or via Internet server The next topics have more details about each one of them 24 2 1 Via E3 Users can execute E3 Viewer via Default toolbar Default toolbar e Saves
101. Area Filter Use custom filter Filter by type Filter by severity 14 1 3 Columns Tab Name of this Filter This option corresponds to the FilterName property Determines a filter by Alarm Area If users want to use a filter specifyitin this field orleave it blank This option is equivalent to the AreaFilter property If the Filter by Alarm Area is not blank this option is enabled and if selected filtering by Area is based on matching the initial part of a name Otherwise considers the Area s full name This option is equivalent to the alarms This option corresponds to the CustomFilter property Enables the type of filter applied to an alarm Only alarms Only events or Alarms and Events This option is equivalent to Enables ordisables viewing the severity degree High Medium or Low This option is equivalent to the ShowHightPriority High ShowMediumPriority Medium and ShowLowPriorit properties On Columns tab users can select fields to view on an E3Alarm Fields displayed in Available Fields and Selected Fields items are generated by an Alarm Server For more information please check the Alarm Alarm Table Generation of Alarms chapter E3Alarm Fields table on topic Configurations for 324 i x Item Position Connections Filters Columns sorting Colors Font _4 gt Select which fields you want to show on the object by moving them from the list on the left to the list on t
102. By using the CacheSize property users can define the number of records sent to a Databasein a single operation The DBServer property defines a Database Server that is used by a Historic object To use this feature follow these procedures 1 Right click the project s name in Explorer mode and select the Insert Historic option In Domain mode right click the Server objects Databases item select the Insert Historic in item and then the project s name X Domain Project1 Settings gi Objects Library m View Pl Server objects Drivers and OPC jy Data objects ao m J Insert Database in RNE m en itore E project E Insert Storage in Insert Formula in gt DE fF fF lt New File gt Find Replace Object Counting Document Scripts Check SEMB H Edit links Load All Objects Close All Objects Save All Objects Inserting a Historic object in Domain mode 353 Historic 2 When a Historic object is enabled the options on the next figure are displayed Sinisti x 4 P X Fs yf ig oo Name Type Source Size E3TimeStamp O 3 DateTime zd 0 E Field O 1 Integer Data DemoTag1 Value 0 M 4 gt Design A Scripts Historic object options The available options on this view are described on the next table Available options for Historic view OPTION DESCRIPTION x Removes the selected field froma H
103. Defines a column order and identifiers to use All columns of a CSV file must be listed separated by commas Each identifier that is not equal to a property name must be listed in section Columns each one with a variable Mandatory variable for export types Defines identifiers for allowed data types ina CSV file These identifiers must be listed in this variable separated by commas Itis only necessary to define this variable if there is an identifier that is different from an object s class name In this case for each identifier there must also have a variable in section T separator Defines a separator to use for delimiting columns ina CSV file In case this variable is not defined a list separator configured in Windows is used Defines whether a root object is exported or imported along with its child objects In case this variable is not defined a root objectis used Defines whether object Links are exported or imported In case this variable is not defined Links are used Defines whether object collections are exported or imported In case this variable is not defined collections are used 49 E3 Studio SECTION DESCRIPTION objectduplicated bindduplicated collectionduplicated E3 Studio Defines what to do when a pre existing object is imported Possible values for this variable are e 0 askalways Always asks what to do e 1 changealways Always changes all properties of the existing obj
104. Domain can view Alarms from other Remote Domains Yes starting with E3 version 3 1 users can view and acknowledge alarms in Remote Domains by using in E3Alarm s AlarmServer property the syntax REMOTE_DOMAIN ALARM_SERVER where REMOTE_DOMAIN is an alias given toa Remote Domain on Remote Domains tab of Domain configuration and ALARM_SERVER is the name of an Alarm Server For versions earlier than 3 1 users Frequently Asked Questions 538 must duplicate Alarms in a Remote Domain A Client Domain can open Screens from other Remote Domains No it cannot A Client Domain can use users from other Remote Domains No it cannot Is it possible to connect one Domain to several other Domains Yes itis as seen on the next figure Viewer Viewer Viewer Viewer Application Domain Server Client Server 1 Server 2 Server 3 Connecting one Domain to several other Domains 539 Frequently Asked Questions Is it possible to connect one Domain to a Domain in Hot Standby Yes itis Consider the architecture of the next figure Viewer Viewer Viewer Viewer Application Domain Server 3 Server 4 HOT STANDBY Communication Domain Front End Server HOT STANDBY Connecting one Domain to a Domain in Hot Standby By using Remote Domains this architecture is possible There is an I O Domain in Hot Standby communicating with devices This data is read by another Domain also in Hot Standby which would be the server for
105. Drivers per process N can be surpassed in case the total amount of application Drivers exceeds N M 4 1 3 I O Folder I O Folders define groups and subfolders to organize variables Each Folder can be renamed as needed and new Folders can be inserted inside one another To use this resource follow this procedure 1 In Organizer right click a Driver and select the Insert New Folder option 145 Drivers ig Domain Project H E Settings t f Objects Lb Close i if obje Browse DLL 6 Driv Settings i lt i gt Activate Communication aij Data ol Tag countin A Daad O 129 g CA Aa 2 VO Bleck h Bplorer Rename VO Tag fe New Folder Analog Al X Delete lie Ler 5 Dead band Alarm A Find Replace A Digital Alarm Object Counting D Discrete Alarm A Import AB Rate of Change Alarm id Export J Document Scripts M Check Edit links Copy Links Show in Editor ME Show in Explorer T Properties Inserting a new I O Folder 4 1 4 I O Tag I O Tags enable reading or writing a set of values using an I O Driver They are used to define information exchange with acquisition devices which consists in one independent variable An I O Tag can be an analog variable an input an output a counter a digital point etc Several digital points can be grouped in a Tag and accessed by their properties such as data bits I O Tags are configu
106. E3 Studio ICON OPTION DESCRIPTION p Allows filtering the list by the property s name or partial name Users can configure a value to a property by typing it directly in its respective Value column On the right side of a property s name there is an icon that indicates its current status The icon O indicates that property s value is the default that is its value was not modified by the user and the icon indicates that property s value was modified by the user a modified value appears in bold In addition clicking this icon opens a contextual menu with the options described on the next table Available options on property s contextual menu OPTION DESCRIPTION Returns the value of the selected property to its default value if it was modified bythe user Pastes the Clipboard value to the value of the selected property Allows editing the value of the selected property Copy Copies the value of the selected property to the Clipboard NOTE The options on a property s contextual menu may be enabled or disabled depending on property s data type 2 8 Gallery Collection of graphical objects which can be dragged and dropped into application Screens These objects are Metafiles WMF or Windows MetaFile objects E3 Studio 76 a ISA Symbols z 3DAdsorptio 3DAdsorption 5g 3DAgitatedBa 3DAgitator 3DAtmospher 3DAutogenou Gallery 2 9 AppBrowser The AppBrowser is a tool that
107. EAA EA E AE AE E E E A EA E 464 22 1 Q ery Object laoti enioere ieies tes vuccusstvcbse eksos CASOS EEE Eie eE EE E E SEE ETS 465 22 2 Components 22 3 SQUUINGS naaier aaro e S REEN S EEIN R Ee SEO EE SEKE ENVEE 466 22 4 Creating Report in ES asscisciseescsscsessdsseateansansatsascasscosensavetnostoiscsecssonsonscssessetevesstsses 482 PRAET Exam ple ssc E A A E R EE E EA 483 PAE Lo T A 1 A AIE E E E E E 23 1 Users 232 GrOUP S a a aa aE a e Er a aa p i a pio eda E E E E apa idora 23 3 P r MISSIONS isccecccivesncscecousgodsscssconssndesuvsssocescns s osso Tibason Ne aies E EEn SAE STER Ea 23 4 File Pr tectior kesesine ier snene coders cuacceseshsevbscssuestetsaseacesiceseiecbediacesccustsesebactsots 24 E3 Viewer and E3 WebViewer cscscsssscssscsecssscsssssececsecssscscsscscsesecassescsasececsesesseecees 24 1 Viewer Only Read Only Mode 24 2 Executing ES VIE WE ssc cscccecssssecsesscrssascnsensetceasensensensdocenssneseconeescesesstaserscessssesseedensens 24 3 VIE WE LORS foucccsicsicdessncinssecteccedhocsochesseseenconsencensunchecoocencenconesncescestescestestescersevenstatecs 24 4 Executing E3 WebViewer cssssssssssscscssssscsessssesaescessseesesaeseesesaesesacseesesaeaceaescees 25 HOt Stand DY icssisscsssesscacsscsncscscsendseistecadesssccsendoeceseasedeogesuesesdesusscosesonde sosseuucessuussavesanscbscnsees 25 1 Configuring 25 2 Running a Redundant Domain ssscssssssscssssssesssscesessesesaeseesesa
108. EndTime Returns for a single Tag stored values between intervals defined by the StartTime and EndTime variables These variables can also be defined at run time by calling Query s SetVariableValue method SampledData Returns for one or more Tags interpolated estimated values between time points defined by the StartTime and EndTime variables in fixed intervals defined by the Timeinterval variable These variables can also be defined at run time by calling Query s SetVariableValue method CalculatedData Returns for one or more Tags the result of mathematical operations applied to data between time points defined by the StartTime and Storage 346 EndTime variables in fixed intervals defined by the Time nterval variable The types of calculations performed by this function are Total Minimum Maximum Standard Deviation Amplitude Mean and Median These variables can also be defined at run time by calling Query s SetVariableValue method For all these options users can indicate whether data with Bad quality is included in its result or not via the Include BAD quality check box corresponding to the IgnoreQuality property of the Query linked to the Storage object Query Query3 ix Fields Variables Visualize Functions LastValue v LastValue Retums last value stored in database Selected fields to query 3 0 Data a DemoTagl voue DemoTag2 DemoTag3 a a NemoTand m
109. False e The Acknowledge all events in the system option is always available even if there is no visible alarm on this E3Alarm This option is disabled if the AllowAckAll property is set to False Alarm acknowledgment can also be performed by clicking or double clicking an alarm s row To do so specify in column properties E3Alarm properties Columns tab Properties option the way to acknowledge this alarm at run time by clicking or double clicking its column 333 E3Alarm 14 2 3 Column Sort Order On default settings users can sort alarms by clicking E3Alarm s column headers When clicking the desired column s header the associated field is then configured as its primary sort field When clicking it again its primary sort field ascending or descending is then reversed When clicking the desired column s header with the SHIFT key pressed its associated field is then configured as its secondary sort field When clicking it again with the SHIFT key pressed its secondary sort field is then reversed For more information about this behavior please check E3Alarm s PrimarySortAscending PrimarySortField SecondarySortAscending SecondarySortField ThirdSortAscending ThirdSortField FourthSortAscending FourthSortField and BannerMode properties on the Scripts Reference Manual DateTime in Area Message Category Acked 408 01 72013 01 25 22 PM DemoTag4 Area Returns 4 Level No 4 087 0172013 01 25 22 PM DemoTag3 Area Returns 3 L
110. Filter by Alarm Area Simple Area Filter Use custom filter Filter by type Filter by severity 13 4 1 3 Sorting Tab Name of this Filter This option corresponds to the FilterName property Determines a filter by Alarm Area If users want to use a filter specify itin this field orleave it blank This option is equivalent to the AreaFilter property If the Filter by Alarm Area option is not blank this option is enabled and if selected filtering by Area is based only on matching the initial part of a name Otherwise it considers the entire name of an Area This option is equivalent to the SimpleAreaFilter property Allows informing a custom filter for alarms This option corresponds to the CustomFilter property Enables the type of filter applied to an alarm Only alarms Only events or Alarms and events This option is equivalent to Enables or disables viewing severity degrees High Medium or Low This option is equivalent to the ShowHightPriority High ShowMediumPriority Medium e ShowLowPriorit properties The Sorting tab allows configuring the default sort order of alarms When more than one sorting field is used the subsequent fi elds allow sorting among alarms that have the same value s for the previous field s Alarms 316 AlarmFilterl properties Standard AlarmFilter E3 Item Connections Filters Ordering Links Sort alarms Iv By field DateTime in De
111. Folder orca OPC Tag AA Analog Alarm AB Dead band Alarm Ag Digital Alarm D Discrete Alarm AB Rate of Change Alarm X Delete A Find Replace Object Counting WH Import W Export J Document Scripts M Check Edit links Copy Links Show in Editor ME Show in Explorer o gt Properties Inserting an OPC Block 2 Studio then opens up a window asking for a number of Blocks to create in this Group as well as their names This name is auto incremented and if this option remains blank Blocks are created with a default name Drivers 166 3 4 5 6 Some OPC Block properties can be configured using Properties List without creating scripts for this To configure any property locate it on Properties List and perform the necessary adjustments For more information on properties please check the Adding OPC Blocks Studio then shows a window to determine the number of Block Elements in this object In this option users can indicate a mapping for all Elements in this Block or inside a given Elements interval P Configure the new block Block size Element mapping Map all block elements Map a range of elements 0 El Lo cu Configuring the new Block Inform Block size and Element mapping If necessary configure object properties Scripts Reference Manual 167 4 3 6 OPC Block Element
112. IMIT Noumit Low HIGH CONSTANT Non specific This value is good There are no 192 193 194 195 special conditions Local Override Typically indicates that an input was disconnected anda manually entered value has been forced NOTE Servers that do not support Substatus for good quality must return O zero 4 5 2 Limit Field The Limit field is valid regardless of Quality and Substatus fields In some cases such as a failure on a sensor it may provide diagnosis information Limit Field SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION Not Limited This value is free to move up or down Drivers 184 SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION llowlimit This value is limited atsome lower limit limit up or down NOTE Servers that do not support the Limit field must return O zero 185 Drivers CHAPTER Frames A Frame object is used to organize and structure project s interface creating composed views for users inside Viewer s or browser s main window Many times an application requires only a main Screen which is the doorway to an application From then on users can browse other Screens which replace the first one unifying the process view However itis possible to support more than one view in the same document or the same project This is useful when an application uses a Screen that never changes or has little changes such as a menu for example and another part that is a Screen s browsing area To use this resource fo
113. ION O DESCRIPTION stAccess 1 stOracle or 2 stSglServer Database 282 OPTION O DESCRIPTION Sever Semername o O Network Library Network library used by ADO 0 Default 1 Named Pipes 2 Winsock TCP IP 3 SPX IPX 4 Banyan Vines or 5 Multi Protocol RCP Change connection string This check boxallows changing the String to connect to a SQL Server database The following restrictions apply to this option e Performed changes ARE NOT validated by E3 Therefore users are fully responsible for configuring this customized String correctly If this check boxis not selected E3 uses a default format to perform this connection This connection String accepts two macros SERVER which is replaced by server s name configured in the Server field and DB which is replaced by database s name configured in the Database field Database user connected via E3 Depending on the type of object to use in the project they must have different kinds of permissions Password Password of the user performing the logon Test Connection Tests the connection with the Database 3 Inthe Database field select the 2 stSqlServer option 4 If necessary configure the User and Password options according to SQL Server s definitions These items may remain blank and in this case an application assumes E3 s default settings 5 Click OK to finish these settings 12 3 2 Example of SQL Server 2000
114. Log Viewer User s Manual available on Start Programs Elipse Software Elipse Event Log menu Elipse Event Log Viewer can be opened in three different ways e Using Start Programs Elipse Software Elipse Event Log Log Viewer menu e Using E3 Studio s Tools Log Viewer menu e Using E3 Admin s Shortcuts Log Viewer contextual menu on Windows Notification Area 24 4 Executing E3 WebViewer During E3 WebViewer installation e3web asp e3web2 asp docwrite asp docwrite2 asp and e3downloader cab files become available for user 513 E3 Viewer and E3 WebViewer configuration These files are located on the same directory where E3 was installed on Web folder e e3web asp and docwrite asp Responsible for loading and starting E3Downloader ActiveX e e3downloader cab ActiveX that is sent to a client machine to install e3 webvi ewer x86 enu exe e e3web2 asp and docwrite2 asp Responsible for loading and starting WebViewer s ActiveX that shows an application executed on client machine s Internet Explorer docwrite2 asp page is initially configured as if E3 Server and web server are executing on the same computer However users can change this page s source code to meet their needs To do so change the following line on source code var Domain getDomain To var Domain IIS server s external IP In case users want to allow a user to informa valid initial Screen different from the one configured in a Domain change the
115. Low EUHig 2 lOTag Tagl 1000 FALSE TRUE TRUE 0 1000 o 104 3 10Block Block1 1000 TRUE TRUE 4 lO0BlockElement Block1 Elementi FALSE 0 1000 o 10 5 lOBlockElement Block1 Element2 FALSE 0 1000 o 10 6 lOFolder Folder1 7 lOTag Folder1 Tag2 1000 FALSE TRUE TRUE 0 1000 o 104 8 3 10 11 12 13 14 15 v M 4 gt gt Sheet1 Sheet2 Sheet3 I li 4 f gt fi Ready 2 moam 100 g A CSV file viewed in Excel 2 Save the spreadsheet with a csv extension 3 Close the filein Excel 4 Toimport this file in E3 select an ODriver object and import the generated file using the Import option choosing the appropriate template E3 will then create the structure according to the CSV file 2 6 2 Objects Importing and exporting objects in E3 can be performed for any type of object except for projects and libraries An operation starting at a root objectis performed on its properties and child objects To export objects follow these procedures 1 Right click an object and select Export E3 Studio 44 2 On the dialog box select a CSV file and click Save rors Cf cnet Save in J CSV ek Ev Name z Date modified _ 1 csv 2 20 2013 4 35 PM _ 2 csv 2 20 2013 4 35 PM L_ 3 csv 2 20 2013 4 35 PM Desktop _ 4 csv 2 20 2013 4 35 PM _ 5 csv 2 20 2013 4 35 PM 6 csv 2 20 2013 4 35 PM Libraries LI7 csv 2 20 2013 4 35 PM 5 A _ 8 csv 2 20 2013 4 36 PM es Ddcw 2 20 2013 4 36 PM Computer A Networ
116. Multiple Link The available options for this Link are described on the next table Available options for a Multiple Link OPTION DESCRIPTION Inserts a new row on the table Removes the selected row from the table Specifies the minimum value on the source fora table row Specifies the maximum value on the source fora table row Specifies the source to be linked to the property when the value of the main source is between Min and Max limits Keep all active associations Keeps all table Links in Advise active mode This property corresponds to the AdviseAll property 8 8 Link Edition E3 has a tool to edit Links named Edit Links With it users can edit one or more application Links more quickly than using a traditional window To use this tool right click one or more objects and select the Edit links option Links 240 Fit to Splitter Insert gt A Find Replace Object Counting H Import W Export E Document Scripts A Check Edit links Copy Links E Show in Organizer ME Show in Explorer T Properties Edit Links option The dialog box on the next figure is then displayed a ssl Data DemoTag1 Value Edit Links The previous dialog box shows a list of Links Link type properties and user events related to the selected objects and their child objects According to a row type information to display on columns are described on the next table
117. Options option Refresh Shortcuts d Licenses Statistics Monitor Start up Printer About E3 Admin Run Close Stop E3 Server Close E3 Admin E3 Admin 4 On Servers tab add the main and backup servers Configure the Server Name and Network address options as described on topic Domains Domain Configuration Servers For example e Server name Server1 e Network address Computer1 5 On Options tab enable the Hot Standby Enable item In the Main server field select the project s main server and in the Backup server field select the project s backup server E3 searches for a main server in alphabetical order 6 Define the PING addresses to check network integrity option as described on topic PING addresses to check network integrity of topic Domains Domain Hot Standby 520 Configuration Options 7 Enable the Activate backup server on local failure option as described on topic Activate backup server on local failure of topic Domains Domain Configuration Options 8 Click OK to confirm these settings 9 When starting E3 an icon represented by a yellow spinning bar UE is shown on Windows Notification Area of all computers configured in Hot Standby indicating that Domains are being loaded After a few seconds E3 recognizes the main computer and indicates that status on Windows Notification Area with n an icon represented by a green arrow U8 This icon specifies that this computer is curre
118. PTION DESCRIPTION License number Informs the license number protection device an eight digit hexadecimal number with an HL prefix if the device is a hard key ora sixteen digit hexadecimal number with an SL prefix if the device is a soft key If no protection device is detected then this number is filled with zeroes E3Sewer Indicates the type of E3 Server Indicates the number of available and in use E3 Studio licenses i Indicates the number of available and in use E3 Viewer licenses E3 Viewer Only Indicates the number of available and in use E3 Viewer licenses in Read Only mode Remote Domain Server Indicates the number of available and in use Remote Domain Server licenses Remote Domain Client Indicates the number of available and in use Remote Domain Client licenses O points Indicates the number of I O points torage tags Indicates the number of Storage Tags use Drivers use OPC Server licenses execution time for an application For more information about E3 s Demo mode limitations please check topic Limitations of Demonstration Mode NOTE Users logged in and identified as E3DataAccess and E3AccessLayer the Program column on the Logged in users list do not consume Viewer licenses from an E3 Server 3 10 3 Statistics The E3 Admin Communication Statistics window shows real time data about network information traffic This list is automatically updated every second To do so right cli
119. PTION DESCRIPTION save Click Elo browse computer folders Maximum recording time Allows defining a total recording time If it is set to Undefined recording only stops if E3Playback video recording option is clicked The Time s option allows predefining a maximum recording time in seconds in this case recording is automatically stopped at the end of the selected time Frames per second Configures the number of frames captured at every second of this recording process E3Playback 432 OPTION DESCRIPTION Show mouse cursor in recording When this option is enabled the mouse pointer appears in the recorded video Default value for this option is disabled The recorded mouse pointer in this video is the one configured as Windows default Animated mouse pointers are not animated in this video In this case the first frame of this animation is always displayed Compressor Video compressor used on the recording process All compressors installed on the computer are listed if supported by E3Playback Compression quality Configures compression rate which affects the final quality of this video and therefore the size of the resulting file key frame settings of the selected compressor i o about the selected compressor this option is disabled Lists all audio devices installed and enabled on the computer that can be used on audio recording ree information about the audio format currently selected aae O inf
120. Pen and clicking te this Pen s property window is displayed This window contains five tabs General Data Style Connection Type and Statistical Data The General tab presents information that identifies a Pen in an E3Chart 1G General Data Style Connection type Statistical Data Pen name Pent Main color C Black Visible Visible Engineering Unit General tab Each field on General tab has a corresponding property The available options are described on the next table E3Chart 398 Available options for General tab Pen name Indicates Pen s name This field is Pe o oe kasper ol equivalent to Pen s Color property Visible Indicates Pen s visibilitystatus ona chart This field is equivalent to Pen s Visible property Engineering unit Indicates the engineering unit used bya Pen This field is equivalent to Pen s EU property The Data tab contains information depending on Pen s type 399 E3Chart General Data Style Connection type Statistical Data Pen type a Realtime configuration Vertical axis link Data DemoTag1 Value a Horizontal axis link Number of samples kept in 1000 M Use TimeStamp memory Historical data configuration Data tab Each field on Data tab has a corresponding property The available options are described on the next table Available options for Data tab OPTION DESCRIPTION Pen type Determines Pen s type in use
121. Tags e2f and InternalTags_Alarms e2f This second file with the Alarms suffix contains the alarm Configuration of all exported Tags To import these alarms to E3 follow these procedures 1 In Organizer insert a new Alarm Configuration and insert an Area 2 Right click this Area and select the Import option 3 If this import process was successful alarms must appear without any warnings If the corresponding Tags were already imported all references must appear in blue 2 6 5 5 Screens Exporting Elipse SCADA s Screens is partial and only supports a subset of Screen objects To export a Screen follow these procedures 1 In Elipse SCADA s Organizer select the Screens item and click the desired Screen 2 Click Export 69 E3 Studio 3 Tags tagDemo gt tagRAM Screens fee Scien Alarms Recipes E Historic Reports gh Drivers B Drivert Hip RemoteApplications I Databases Bh Watcher SS Steeplechase OPCServers l Server UserList gal Application ees General Style Web Scripts Cross Reference lone Goto Screen Shi Title __ Show Screen Hide Background Export Bitmap Color J Access level 0 Access 0 Free access to all users Close Exporting Screens Select a file s location and name to generate In Organizer insert a new Screen Right click this Screen a
122. Tags to an OPC Driver When this option is selected the following message is displayed ags e Automatic detection of I O block size may be a long task Do you want to enable automatic creation of I O block elements during the import process No coca Message referring to OPC Tag import The available options are the following e Yes When locating OPC Tags E3 automatically tries to detect which Tags are Block Tags and in this case how many Elements they have To do so E3 needs to read each Element s value and depending on the server and on the number of Tags this can be a time consuming task e No E3 does not try to read OPC Tag values when performing this search This operation is quicker but it does not create Block type OPC Tags and their 159 Drivers Elements automatically e Cancel Cancels this import operation The Import OPC Tags window provides all resources displayed on the next figure Import OPC Tags Jr Server search filters Item names Data type Access type CO z Current project ta OPCDriver1 r OPCGroup1 OK Cancel Importing OPC Tags The available options on this window are described on the next table Available options for Import OPC Tags window OPTION DESCRIPTION Filters Tags using the name of these specified items Users can use wild cards such as asterisk or question mark Data type Filters Tags
123. The following properties become available on a Server object e ActiveAlarms 289 Alarms e ActiveHighAlarms e ActiveHighNACKAlarms e ActiveLowAlarms e ActiveLlowNACKAlarms e ActiveMedAlarms e ActiveMedNACKAlarms e ActiveNACKAlarms e Alarm e AlarmVerify e UserFields 13 2 Alarm Server An Alarm Server object centralizes all project s alarms In it users can find the total amount of active alarms in an application acknowledged or not This object is also responsible for reporting alarm events to all connected Viewers as well as sending these events to a database if necessary An application can only have one object of this type and its presence is mandatory to perform an alarm verification To insert an Alarm Server follow this procedure 1 Right click the project s name in Explorer mode and select the Insert Alarm Server option In Domain mode right click the Server objects Alarms item select the Insert Alarm Server in option and then the project s name Alarms 290 E 4 8 Domain Project 1 fE Objects Library H View Bg Server objects H E Drivers and OPC iaa Data objects J Databases ok Tr eroen A Insert Alarm Configuration in gt ai New File gt A Find Replace Object Counting G Document Scripts A Check Edit links Load All Objects Close All Objects g Save All Objects Inserting an Alarm Server in Domain mode 13 2 1 Configurations fo
124. The selected object group or Section is sent to the last position in the layer order Aligns the selected object group or Section The available options are the following Lefts Left alignment Centers Center alignment Rights Right alignment Tops Top alignment Middles Middle alignment Bottoms Alignment at the same height To grid Alignment according to the grid Center in section Center alignment in this Section Specifies the size of the selected object group or Section The available options are the following e Make same width Same width e Make same height Same height e Make same size Same size Reports 468 OPTION DESCRIPTION Horizontal Spacing Specifies the object s horizontal spacingin a Report The available options are the following Make equal Same spacing among all objects Increase Increases object s spacing in one step Decrease Decreases object s spacing in one step Vertical Spacing Specifies object s vertical spacing The available options are the following Make equal Same spacing among all objects Increase Increases object s spacing in one step Decrease Decreases object s spacing in one step When the Format Border option is selected the dialog box on the next figure is shown Object Properties e Border Presets Line Styles Preview None Click on diagram below or use presets to edit borders Text Oo Color Mi Shadow 0K canoe _ Ah
125. Tools menu For this users must have an OCX file that contains this library When inserting an ActiveX object on a Screen an error 80040112 occurred What does it mean POSSIBLE CAUSE This error indicates that the inserted ActiveX object is not licensed on this computer During the instantiation process this control searches Windows Registry for its license key HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT Licenses and in case it does not find it returns this error There are development license keys for ActiveX objects as well as run time license keys SOLUTION To solve this problem users must purchase an Activex license and register it in this computer Frequently Asked Questions 534 have two Libraries in a Domain but cannot use them at the same time When register one the other one stops working How can I solve this problem Probably one of these Libraries was created as a copy of the other one and thus both have the same ID Therefore users must remove one of them from this Domain 27 16 Reports How can add the current date and time on an E3 Report There are at least two alternatives to solve this e Add a Label on Page Header Section and on Page Header Section s OnFormat event type the following script Label1 is Text s name Report Sections PageHeader Controls Label1 _ Caption Now e Create a CurrentTime type Demo Tag On Report s header or footer users must insert a SetPoint object and in the DataField property
126. Usage To illustrate access to SQL Server 2000 users can create a Historic that records data with a scan time of one second To do so follow these procedures 1 Create a Demo Tag This Tag s settings do not need to be changed 2 Double click the Database Server to open SQL Server s setup window These parameters must be changed so that they fit available settings during SQL Server installation 3 Performall configurations needed on this window such as server s name user password and Database 283 Database 4 Once Database setup is finished users must configure a Historic object to access this database To do so users must first create a field in the Historic and then insert the Demo Tag which is used to send different values to a Database Sinisti x d gt ro il Eg ga Name Source E3TimeStamp O 3 DateTime E 0 E Field O 1 Integer Data DemoTag1 Value 0 M 4 gt Design A Scripts Historic object and its settings 5 Open the Historic Properties window by clicking Historic Properties and specify both a Database server and a table name Other settings must remain unchanged This table retrieves data from E3 and also views SQL Server Analyzer s usage which is a client used for queries in SQL Server 6 Once Historic is configured users must create a table structure in the Database Server To do so click Generate structure gf a message confirming the creation of this table st
127. Used to monitor quick variations in a process variable A Rate of Change Alarm Source uses its values specified in variable s units per second Alarms 308 ROCAlarm1 properties DB ROCAlarmSource E3 Item Source User fields Formatting Links Rate of Change MV ROC Change second Message text Severity Need ACK 1 High m Delay ms 0 Return message Rate of Change tab The available options on this tab are described on the next table Available options for Rate of Change tab OPTION DESCRIPTION Roc CCCSC Cdi Enables verifying a Rate of Change alarm Change second Indicates the percentage of the monitored variable that can vary per second This value is calculated based on each variable s reading interval using the formula ROC Current Value Previous Value Current Instant Previous Instant If this rate of change is greater than the specified rate itis considered in an alarm status Message text Allows specifying a text displayed to users when this alarm is in an active condition be High Medium or Low acknowledgment Delay ms Specifies a delay time in milliseconds When this value is equal to 0 zero is applied 309 Alarms OPTION DESCRIPTION Return message Allows specifying a text message displayed to users when this alarm returns to its normal status 13 3 5 Discrete Allows monitoring a variable by specifying multiple sub conditions DiscreteAla
128. Value Sets are the type and amount of products in each juice for example 50g of sugar 15001 of water fruit pulp etc To use this feature follow this procedure 1 Right click the project s name in Explorer and select the Insert Formula option In Domain mode right click the Server objects Databases item select the Insert Formula in item and then the project s name Formulas 450 4p Insert Historic in E Insert Storage in A Find Replace lt New File gt Object Counting J Document Scripts M Check Edit links Load All Objects Close All Objects Save All Objects Inserting a Formula NOTE A Formula object can be configured to work as an Alarm Area 21 1 Settings When creating a Formula a window for configuring a Database and a table to useis displayed Without it it is not possible to create Units and Value Sets Database and table configuration window 451 Formulas The available options are described on the next table Available options for Database Configuration window OPTION DESCRIPTION Database Specifies a Database Server that manages data configured in this Formula fable Cd Specifiles a table s name If there is a need to configure these items later or even reconfigure them select the Configure Database option on Formula s contextual menu Formulas 452 X Delete A Find Replace E Object Counting WH I
129. Viewer server_name screen lt screen_name gt e noping or noping Discards the need to perform a ping command to a server before attempting to connect a direct connection attempt Viewer server_name noping e readonly or readonly Allows users to specify whether Viewer tries to connect in Read Only mode When itis performed Viewer always uses a Viewer Only license E3 Viewer and E3 WebViewer 510 Viewer server_name readonly e cachepath or cachepath Allows users to specify a different directory to save Viewer s cache If itis omitted this value is Windows default temporary directory the TEMP environment variable Viewer server_name cachepath lt directory gt e useservers or useservers This option enables Viewer to try to connect only to servers specified on the command prompt If this option is not present its default behavior Viewer can try to discover alternative servers in case it cannot connect to servers passed as parameters on the command prompt This option works only on a local network therefore it must be informed in casea server that Viewer is trying to access is outside the local network Viewer server_name useservers params Allows users to specify Viewer s initialization parameters This option cannot be specified immediately before a list of servers Values passed on this option can be retrieved via script using Viewer s Params property For more information about this property please
130. When this license exists the E3 Server running as Server starts accepting an unlimited number of external connections from other Domains Likewise in the E3 Server running as a Client an unlimited number of connections is established For more information about limitations of E3 s Demo mode see topic Limitations of Demonstration Mode 3 11 3 Link Syntax With a Remote Domain configuration the Client Domain can access objects from the Server Domain in two different ways Via scripts by using the Application GetObject method or via Links that is any functionality that creates a connection to another object user event expressions ElipseX Object type properties Link sources Alarms or fields in Historic or Storage objects among others Objects accessed this way can be either Viewer or Server objects Access to objects from other Domains is performed via alias Domain Name which must precede each object s complete path separated by a colon That is for Link sources or an Application GetObject method to reference another Domain users must use a DOMAIN PATH syntax where DOMAIN is the alias given to that Remote Domain connection and PATH is the complete path of an object or property from that Domain In case of Links sources may include expressions referring to several objects with possible combinations between local objects and Remote Domains For example Driver1 Tag1 Remote Driver2 Tag1 2 Remote Domain s name may also need b
131. a Data Server and select the Insert Panel Internal Tag option Data Server 270 b library m Counter Tag y Demo Tag Pa cent To D Timer Tag Edit Standard R Analog Alarm X Delete AB Dead band Alarm A Find Replace pete Discrete Al Object Counting od Discrete Alum PEA AB Rate of Change Alarm J Document Scripts Check Edit links Copy Links E Show in Editor Show in Explorer F Properties Inserting an Internal Tag 2 The system opens up a window asking the number of Tags to create in the Server as well as their names This name will be auto incremented if this option remains blank Tags will be created with a default name Adding Internal Tags 271 Data Server Some Internal Tag properties can be configured using the Properties List without creating scripts for this To configure any property just locate it on the Properties List and perform the necessary adjustments 11 5 Timer Tag A Timer Tag is an object used for counting time and scheduling activities It establishes a time schedule with repetitions to execute certain actions To use this object follow these procedures 1 Right click a Data Server and select the Insert Panel Timer Tag option E Settings Objects Library w View af Server objects y Drivers and OPC k Data objects aa J Databas i s ry E3 Close
132. a ia iaraa 17 2 Using Query Filters via Scripts s ssesesosssesesososesesesessseseseseseseoesssesresossnssesesosssesese 17 3 Using Query Recordsets via Scripts 18 E3ZBrOWSET sissiscssessesseiscssnscesicsssesiestscsacsondsnsscssssesesssscesssseccesessestessenuedseSacsssssdesheessnheedsensessnds 18 1 E3Browser s Query Object cscsssssssssssssecsescssessesesarscsscsaesesseseesesacscesesaeacsseseees 18 2 Other Settings neaei ea Eei OES EEE A ES EiS 19 ES Chatrier a r E E TEKEE EEE EE ENR RR S 19 1 Settings 19 2 Usage EXAM ples iiss scacssesavesevesdecessceassoescksescsatsegcesutscastgoaccassaseassueeeioesudsebecensnctee 19 3 Specific Runtime Behavior sessssessesesonseescsososesesesesnsesesesnsnseoesnsessesossessesesesssesese ZO ETA EN TN o PE E E E A E E E E A E 20 1 ES Playback Obje ctun e etena i a a a a aaa 20 2 Adding Playback to E3 Demo 20 3 USEF Interface osii ese rsin a iassa e a TEN iiien 20 4 Playback Dat ab ase iraniar cscs cee sssevs ce c ceznosasanseescsapaecatleveseadeassiees cutestacenchediaeonaceueiee 20 5 Configuring E3 Database Objects sssssscsssssessessssessescssrscesesaesesacscesesatacesessees ZT FOCUS EAEE AEE E E ceceasaceravssensevsusacettectessterachastsetsteceesavstsdettenscndearesescersetbats 21 1 Settings 21 2 Template Sre innen a a a a a a a p Ee A BTT E EEE E A EA E 214 Value Sets ri E R R E E a T R S ese 21 5 Cre atinig a FOr im ular se aA A EE a e a Soa iie aSa 457 PAAA o i I
133. a technology used by E3Browser and E3Chart to retrieve data stored ina Database ADO is also widely used in E3 scripts for all types of operations witha Database It is a set of COM Component Object Model objects created to access DBMS information by using OLE DB Object Linking and Embedding This technology is available when installing OLE DB Provider for Oracle MSDAORA and allows access to Oracle s native interface OCI OClis used by E3 s Database Server to implement Database services used by Historic objects Formulas Alarms and Storage With OCI users have direct access to Oracle functions making this process as optimized as possible It provides a default Database access library and data retrieval functions as a DLLor LIB which can be linked to an application at run time 12 2 4 Accessing Oracle via Database Server E3 s Database Server uses OCI Oracle Call Interface to communicate with an Oracle server thatis it uses Database s native form to improve communication performance with a Database Database 280 A good example on how E3 s Database Server communication with Oracle works is the Historic object First data acquisition is performed by a Historic that with this data immediately sends it as a request to a Database These requests can be for creating a table creating indexes and keys adding data etc E3 s Database Server has a separated process specially designed to receive them Depending on the type of operation
134. able Available options for Historic tab OPTION DESCRIPTION Database Sener Pefines a Database server This field is equivalent to the DbServer property Historic 360 OPTION DESCRIPTION equivalent to the TableName property Interval between records ms Discard data from the main table Discard data older than Perform discard every Move discarded data to the backup table Discard from backup data older than Create Table 361 Determines a time variation in milliseconds thatis how often Historic data is stored ona table This field is equivalent to the ScanTime property Enables ordisables discarding data from the main table Data is considered old according to the Discard data older than option This field is equivalent to the EnableDiscard property Determines a time interval minutes hours days or months during which data is kept on the main table If data is older than the interval on this option it is discarded This field is equivalent to the Discardinterval property and the field to select a time unit for this interval is equivalent to the DiscardTimeUnit property Determines a discard interval minutes hours days or months for old data ona table This field is equivalent to the VerificationUnit property Enables ordisables storing discarded data on the backup table This field is equivalent to the EnableBackupTable property Determines a maximum time interval minutes hours days
135. ablish a limit for this alarm It is equivalent to Pen s LowLimit property it cc nna color when in alarm This field is equivalent to Pen s LimitPenColor property Alarm background color Pen s background color when in alarm This field is equivalent to Pen s LimitPenBkColor property Pen s appearance according to its configured options can be viewed on the following figures 10 55 05 10 55 06 10 55 08 10 55 08 Analog connection mode between points 403 E3Chart 15 19 50 15 19 52 15 19 53 15 19 54 Digital connection mode between points 150 02 25 30 02 25 32 02 25 33 The way a Pen is displayed when considering its scan appears in green and when it is disabled appears in blue and pink The Connection Type tab defines a connection style between historical and real time parts of a Realtime amp Historic Pen E3Chart 404 General Data Style Connection type Statistical Data Connection type between points C Digital Analog Value used for scan ms IV Show bad quality points MaxGap Time Maximum interval to connect historic to fo realtime data s Highlight line when MaxGap Time is being used Color of the line with MaxGap Time m Red Style of the line with MaxGap Time Connection Type tab The available options on this tab are described on the following table 405 E3Chart Available options for Connection Type tab OPTION DESCRIPTION Connection type b
136. ach security item there is a series of permissions that can be configured for each user or group The available options are described on the next table Available options for Screens OPTION DESCRIPTION Open Screen Enables opening Screens 499 Security Available options for Alarms OPTION DESCRIPTION Acknowledge alarm Enables an alarm acknowledgment Available options for Domains aE user groups robles configuring users and user groups Remote access to Domain Enables remote access to a Domain Remote write access to Domain Enables remote writing access toa Domain Available options for Viewers OPTION DESCRIPTION Write access to server Enables writing access to a server Each item on a permissions list can be configured with one of the statuses on the next table Options for a permissions list ICON STATUS DESCRIPTION Allowed solid green circle The selected command on this permissions listis granted to the selected user or group regardless of all groups to which they belong Not allowed solid red circle The selected command on this permissions listis not granted to the selected user or group regardless of all groups to which they belong Security 500 STATUS DESCRIPTION Allowed by this group hollow The selected command on green circle this permissions listis granted to the selected user or group if itis granted on groups to which the selected user or group belongs Not allowed
137. ack Next gt Cancel Initial screen of the Application Wizard 3 8 1 1 Application Type On this screen users can select between creating a Standard application an E3 object library or a Blank application A Standard application is the one whose project contains at least one Viewer one Screen and one Data Server also with an option to insert an I O Driver a Database an Alarm Server and an Alarm Configuration all these via Wizard An E3 Object Library is a file used to keep several components which can be used in applications 89 Domains A Blank application is a project created with no objects On Application name item specify a name for the prj or lib file being created according to what was selected in the previous option The location to save this application is specified on the Save the application in folder item If necessary click Browse pplication Wizard mx Application Type F Choose the application type you want to create E Select the application type E Standard application g C E3 Object Library O C Blank application Application name Project1 Save the application in folder C Example Browse lt Back Next gt Cancel Application Type screen If this folder does not exist users are warned and they should decide whether they want to create it or not Domains 90 Invalid folder X m Folder C Project2 does not exist Do you want to create
138. ack speed Current Date and Time Displays current playback clock s date and time and allows selecting a new date Show or hide Timeline Shows or hides E3Playback s Timeline window E3Playback 430 COMMAND ACTION Show or hide Tag List Show or hide Event List Start or stop video recording Capture E3Playback screen Shows or hides E3Playback s Tag window Shows or hides E3Playback s Event window Allows generating a video in AVI format capturing the entire playback area during a certain period of time or until users stop recording Allows capturing playback Screen area Captured Screens can be saved to a BMP file or copied to the Clipboard When selecting the Video Recording tool H the window on the next figure is then displayed 431 E3Playback Save video as C Users vm_screenshot_win7 Documents Playback00 1 avi ae Maximum recording time Video compression Undefined Compressor C Time s 60 Microsoft Video 1 v Compression quality Frames per second js R 70 Show mouse cursor in recording Frame interval for each keyframe 200 Configure About Audio compression Record audio Format Device PCM Microfone Dispositivo de High 22 050 kHz 8 Bit Mono J Show summary when finish recording Cancel Recording options window The available options are described on the following table Available options for Recording options window O
139. addition to this Zoom menu users can also change the zoom level via keyboard 215 Screens and Screen Objects or mouse by using the following combinations CTRL PLUS SIGN Zoom in CTRL MINUS SIGN Zoom out CTRL ASTERISK or CTRL ZERO 0 Return to default zoom 100 CTRL Mouse wheel up Zoom in CTRL Mouse wheel down Zoom out NOTE When using CTRL Mouse wheel up or down options zoom focus is always relative to the mouse pointer s position 7 3 9 Layers E3 offers a Screen architecture with up to 32 layers for inserting graphical objects Each object can belong to one or more layers and the active Screen both in configuration E3 Studio and at run time E3 Viewer may have none one several or all active layers This allows the creation of applications with several forms of monitoring such as for example viewing a process only with the electrical system only with the hydraulic system or both Users can also control the appearance of layers depending on a certain zoom level The layer configuration is performed by clicking Layers The available options are Available options for Layer configuration OPTION DESCRIPTION Enables viewing the layer configured in the Screen s Layer property Shows all layers available in the project No layeris shown Edit Layers With this option users can configure individual layers This option opens a dialog box for configuring the layer When the Edit
140. ain and finally the greater than gt character Values var1 and var2 are the variables the Stored Procedure is waiting for for example start and end date If the Stored Procedure is not waiting for any variable create the SQL command without variables To execute this Query use the Execute method NOTE E3 Query s CursorLocation property must be configured as 1 clClient 27 19 Remote Domains How does Remote Domain licensing works The E3 Server running the Client Domain as well as the one running the Server Domain must have a specific license for Remote Domains When this license exists the E3 Server running as Server Domain starts accepting an unlimited number of external connections from other Domains Likewise in case of a Client E3 Server it is possible to establish an unlimited number of connections For more information about limitations of E3 s Demo mode please check the topic Limitations of Demonstration Mode When communication between a Client and a Server Domain drops what happens When an error situation happens all Links from the client application referring the Domain are disconnected Displays for example show an I O error message according to Viewer settings as well as all Application GetObject methods referring the Remote Domain fail that is cause script errors When the problem is solved Links should reconnect automatically However Application GetObject methods must be executed again A Client
141. ak ina paragraph orina table row or else ensure that a page break is notinserted between two paragraphs such as between a title and the next paragraph 7 8 a E PageFooter Page Break 22 3 6 11 Frame A Frame objectis composed by rows and columns where texts or charts are inserted Report Frames are used to organize and display information Users can also use frames to create page layouts or to create animated text charts or tables as in an HTML page Reports 480 Frame After inserted on a Report this object is named as Frame 22 3 6 12 E3Chart An E3Chart object is an ActiveX component used to show a chart displaying Tags varying in real time and also to show historical data stored on a Database a r a 100 50 0 B fal 50 100 02 47 00 02 47 15 02 47 30 02 47 45 fal a a E3Chart NOTE An E3chart cannot be added to a Report s Detail Section There are some functional differences between an E3Chart in an application and on a Report In an application an E3Chart is capable of displaying charts with either real time historical or mixed data On a Report on the other hand an E3Chart is not capable of using real time or mixed data only historical data Notice that no Report object can be externally accessed that is when users create a Report via application itis not possible to access its properties nor its object properties via application scripts To do so changes in these objects including 481 Reports
142. al value is 100 setting limits to 20 and 30 will allow values in the range 80 to 130 Diff limit Operator can type the original value minus and Ex If the original value is 100 setting limits to 10 and 50 will allow values in the range 90 to 150 Editing restrictions Restrictions allow users to enable or disable value changes at run time or to define limits for these changes The available options on this window are described on the next table Available options for Restriction Configuration window OPTION DESCRIPTION Unrestricted Limit Users can change any value in this Template It is represented on Template s view bythe letter U Restricted Limit Users cannot change Template s value It is represented on Template s view by the letter R Absolute Limit Fixed values are defined as limits corresponding to Template s minimum and maximum values It is represented on Template s view by the letter A and minimum and maximum values 455 Formulas OPTION DESCRIPTION Percent Limit A percentage value above or below a predefined value For example by placing these limits between 20 and 30 fora value of 100 the allowed values vary between 80 and 130 It is represented on Template s view by the letter P and the values configured in that Fixed values above or belowa predefined value For example by placing these limits between 10 and 50 fora value of 50 the allowed values vary between 40 and 100 It is r
143. al value of the variable eels declaration and documentation text NOTE Notice that Data Objects XObjects can be declared as Types Graphical object edition can be performed in the same way when editing a Screen with the same graphical features and options Users can insert XControls on any Screen or even within another XControl by right clicking the destination Screen or XControl and then selecting the Insert option as shown on the next figure From an XControl in development inside the library itis possible to insert another XControl in it by right clicking the destination XControl and then selecting the Insert option Libraries 252 Fit to Splitter libra gt XControll GA Find Replace s MSForms gt XControl2 Object Counting Panel gt XControl3 W Import x Standard gt XControl4 id Export E3Alarm J Document Scripts 5 GJ E3Browser Check Lex E3Chart Edit links GE E3Playback Copy Links S RMChartX WE Show in Organizer WE Show in Explorer AT Properties Inserting an XControl on a Screen From this moment on the XControl has a name within the Screen and is understood as a copy of the original definition Thus users must define if required the values or Links this specific copy has in the context itis used If this object s size is altered on the Library s Design view and registered again itis necessary to go to Screen s Original Size contextual menu for th
144. ally to an object by right clicking an object and selecting the a Object Counting item 27 E3 Studio Object Counting E3DEMO C Program Files Eli X 21 2 gz Find p Class Counting DB 1 a O Database 1 E Panel 158 Circle 4 Mies Counter Tag 1 V Demo Tag 1 cL Frame 1 EF Frame Splitter 4 Group 10 Intemal Tag 13 4 Picture 18 C Rectangle 101 Total 159 Domain s Object Counting window The available options on this window are described on the next table Available options on Domain s Object Counting window SE ere organized by module D ce organized alphabetically Refreshes the object counting NOTE This refresh process is not automatic except when a removed object is the base object of the counting context or when a Domain is closed Count ElipseX s instance Includes in the counting children internal children of XControl or XObject instances Allows filtering this list by object s name or partial name E3 Studio 28 2 4 4 Scripts Documentation Scripts Documentation tool helps users to organize and document application s scripts Users can access this tool in two different ways e By clicking Lil on Default toolbar With this option all Domain scripts are stored ina file e By right clicking project s or object s name and selecting the Document scripts option With this option only this object and its child object scripts are stored ina file Thi
145. ameters via their respective properties which are low and high data limits in engineering units Some of this object properties can be configured directly on Properties List without creating scripts for this More information on this object s properties functionality can be found on Scripts Reference Manual in their respective chapter 4 1 5 I O Block 1 O Blocks are used to define information exchange with an acquisition device which consist of one or more variables as long as they are consecutive in an addressing inside an external device Depending on the communication method used users can save timein communication thus obtaining a larger number of updates at the same time interval when compared to an I O Tag I O Blocks are configured using a series of B parameters from B1 to B4 which vary according to an I O Driver used along with the Size property which defines the number of Elements or indexes availableina Block To use this resource follow these procedures 1 Right click a Driver and select the Insert I O Block option Drivers 148 j Ki gt Activate Communication H Data Tag countin 9 Datat Tag g A Aam Puo soc Th Explorer VOTag I New Folder Edit gi AA Analog Alarm Delet Ca sa AX Dead band Alarm Find Replace Ag Digital Alarm Object Counting Discrete Alarm H Import AB Rate of Change Alarm td Export J Document Scripts i Che
146. an be situations when one single field cannot act as a primary key because it has repeated values In addition a table can only have one primary key be it simple or compound That is users cannot define two or more table fields so that each one is a separate primary key However this is not the case of a compound primary field where two or more fields are combined to form a unique primary key When selecting fields for a Primary Key consider the following details e Neither duplicated nor null values are allowed e Incase there is no unique identifier for a specific table users can select a field that generates sequentially numbered records Users can configure a primary key in two different ways by checking on Historic object window which table field is the preferred primary key and then enabling it by clicking F or by clicking P which opens a configuration window according to the next figure 7 Edit Index e ee Index Definition Index name E3lndex m Select the fields used in this index Field Name Order Tye Doe Ascending 7 3 fdDateTime 0 Ascending 1 fdinteger Change field order Move Down Cancel Editing a Primary Key index On this window select a field as the primary key The available options on this Historic 356 window are described on the next table Available options for Edit Index window OPTION DESCRIPTION Index name Specifies a name for this primary key The
147. arator root true link true collection true 51 E3 Studio objectduplicated askalways binddupplicated askalways collectionduplicated askalways itemduplicated askalways Types Tag I0Tag Block IOBlock Element IOBlockElement Columns N1 B1 N1 B1 N2 B2 N2 B2 N3 B3 N3 B3 N4 B4 N4 B4 Filter exclude I0Folder Elipse Software provides some templates for importing or exporting different object types These templates can also be used as a basis to create others Templates are on folder Templates of E3 s installation path NOTE On the import process columns to use are read directly from a CSV file On this particular case there is no need for a header variable on a template However if any column is named using an identifier this one must be defined on Columns section or this column is ignored 2 6 4 Template Settings The Template Settings is a tool that helps users to create an INI file to be used when importing or exporting E3 objects To access it click Import Export and once this option s window is opened click Advanced If users already loaded a template values of initial options on these tabs reflect that configuration The available tabs are described next e Settings On this tab users can configure valid options for the import process as well as for the export process E3 Studio 52 Settings import Fiters Identifiers Properties p Columns separator Use list separator configured in Win
148. arm filter defined on Filters tab This option corresponds to the FilterConnection property of a Connection object on the Collection of Connections 13 4 1 2 Filters Tab The Filters tab allows managing filters from an Alarm Filter AlarmFilterl properties Standard AlarmFilter E3 Item Connections Filters Ordering Links Filters ConnectionFilter ee eee e Filters tab The available options on this tab are described on the next table Available options on Filters tab OPTION DESCRIPTION Filters Alarms 314 OPTION DESCRIPTION selected Filter described next Adds a new Filter to the Collection of Filters This option corresponds to the Add method of the Collection of Filters Remove Removes the selected Filter This option corresponds to the Remove method of the Collection of Filters NOTE The Filter created automatically with an object cannot be removed When clicking Configure the window on the next figure is opened to configure the selected Filter Filter properties General Name ConnectionFilter Filter by Alarm Area cL empty to disable IV Use custom filter fp empty to disable Filter by type only alarms X Filter by severity M High V Medium MV Low Properties of the selected Filter The available options on this window are described on the next table 315 Alarms Available options on the properties window of a Filter OPTION DESCRIPTION
149. armeAnalogico Dados TagDemo1 Nivel 4 m b E3Alarm To use this object follow this procedure 1 Right click a Screen or the working area and select the Insert E3Alarm option or click E3Alarm on Objects toolbar 319 E3Alarm Fit to Splitter library A Find Replace E i MSForms gt Object Counting eee Panel mport ai Standard gt G Document Scripts V Check GJ E3Browser b E3Chart Edit links E E3Playback Copy Links RMChartX Show in Organizer RE Show in Explorer T Properties Inserting an E3Alarm on a Screen Some of this object s properties can be configured via Properties List without creating scripts for this To configure any property just locate it on the Properties Listand perform the necessary adjustments 14 1 Settings To configure an E3Alarm right click this object and select the Properties option 14 1 1 Connections Tab The Connections tab allows configuring one or more connections to local or remote Alarm Servers E3Alarm 320 E3Alarm1 properties E3Alarm E3 Item Position Connections Filters Columns Sorting Colors Font 4 gt x AlarmConnection Remote RemoteServer Display_all z AlarmConnection2 Local AlarmServer 1 Display _all Connections tab The available options on this tab are described on the next table Available options on Connections tab OPTION DESCRIPTION Adds a new Connection to an E
150. at this field stores the correct date and time To create a table in a Historic object users must create its fields previously by clicking Add field To remove unwanted fields click Remove fields The confirmation message of the next figure then appears Historic settings X Are you sure you want to remove field Field This operation will erase all data from this field in table No Message to confirm field removal from a table The Name field defines table s field name the Type field defines table s field type and the field s source is defined by the Source field Users can also define whether this field is the table s primary key or not 16 1 1 Primary Key A Primary Key is either a field or a set of fields identifying each record of a tablein a unique way As ina table s main index itis used to link data among tables Primary keys can be client codes registration numbers etc After defining a field as a table s primary key the Database itself ensures that no duplicated data is inserted ina primary key field For example if users try to place an order with the same number of a pre existing order that record is not created and an error message is then displayed There are two types of primary keys Simple or Compound A Simple primary key is a field identifying each record of a table in a unique way A Compound primary key can be formed by a combination of two or more fields ina 355 Historic table There c
151. ation on Queries please check the Queries chapter Removes the selected Query 413 E3Chart 19 1 6 Font Tab On Font tab users can configure E3Chart s header and row fonts Item Position General Axis Pens Legend Queries Font Links Properties Font Size Arial 8 25 7 TitleFont Effects l Bold M Underline Italic I Strikeout Sample Text Font tab The available options are relative to font type size and effects 19 2 Usage Examples The next topics show some examples on how to use an E3Chart 19 2 1 Enabling and Disabling Pens The following example shows how to enable or disable Pen s data connection on an E3Chart To do so follow these procedures 1 Create an E3Chart ona Screen 2 Goto E3Chart s properties and select Pens tab Create a new Real Time Pen and then link it to a Demo Tag on E3Chart s vertical Axis 3 Create two Command Buttons on this Screen On the first one write Disable Pen in its Caption property E3Chart 414 4 Open this Button s properties and select Scripts tab On Command Button s Click event write the following script Sub CommandButton1_Click Set Pen1 Screen Item E3Chart1 Pens Item Pen1 Pen1 Disconnect End Sub 5 On the second Command Button write Enable Pen in its Caption property 6 Open this Button s properties and select Scripts tab On Command Button s Click event write the following script Sub CommandBut
152. ator user V User cannot change their password V Password expires after fo days V Password must have at least fo characters V Password must have letters and numbers 7 Password musthave atleast 0 numbers 7 Password musthave atleast 0 letters V Password must have uppercase and lowercase letters J This account is disabled I This account is blocked User must change their password in the next login V Password checking is not case sensitive not recommended a ee Adding users to an application The available options for this window are described on the next table 491 Security Available options for Add user window OPTION DESCRIPTION Specifies user s name Windows Authentication This option allows adding an existing user of a Windows network domain This username must be formatted as DOMAIN USER When selecting this option all other options on this window are disabled except This is an administrator user and This account is disabled E3 Authentication This option creates a userin the current E3 Domain Password Specifies user s password Retype password Confirms again the previously typed password Full name Specifies user s full name This is an administrator user Enables this useras an administrator User cannot change their password Users cannot change their passwords because onlyan administrator can perform this task Password expires after days Establishes a pas
153. ayback 20 5 1 Storage The only recommendation for a Storage is that the Source column must not contain expressions because they cannot be used on playback E3 already creates automatically on Storage tables the necessary indexes to optimize E3Playback queries 20 5 2 Alarms To perform an alarm playback follow these procedures 1 Enable or configure alarm recording on disk 2 Select the following fields for recording mandatory e EventTime plus EventTimeMS or EventTimeDbl e FullAlarmSourceName e ConditionActive 445 E3Playback Acked AckRequired 3 Itis also recommended to select the following fields for recording InTime plus InTimeMS or InTimeDbl OutTime plus OutTimeMS or OutTimeDbl AckTime plus AckTimeMS or AckTimeDbl e Area ActorID Enabled EventCategory e EventType e Message e Severity e Source SubConditionName CurrentValue Record fi Drag to the rightmost list the fields you want to record Selecting fields E3 automatically creates on alarm tables the necessary indexes to optimize playback queries E3 Playback 446 20 5 3 Historics The Historic s file format is not appropriate for playback because normally many duplicated data is stored Playback queries have an extra work to eliminate duplicated data from each Tag and find out only value changing events which may demand long sequential queries on a Historic table It is recommended to use a Storage whenever
154. ble structure was created successfully Alarm Server message The structure of an alarmtableis similar to a Historic object composed by a definitions table a main table and a backup table optional Alarms 298 Alarms _Fields Ed m O FieldDeadBand O FieldDeadBandUnit O FieldDescription O FieldEU O FieldHighEng O FieldID O FieldLowEng O FieldMaxRecTime O FieldMinRecTime O FieldName O FieldQuality O fieldScanTimeMs O FieldSize O FieldSource O fieldType O FieldVARTYPE Fields table Fields generated on this table are explained on Table Settings topic of Historic chapter By using Alarm Server s configuration window users can specify a Database Server used to store alarms A Database Server DBServer object is an E3 module that must be inserted in an application 299 Alarms 13 2 2 User Fields Settings The User fields tab allows adding arbitrary values to alarm events AlarmServerl properties DB AlarmServer E3 Item Configuration User fields Links User fields allow adding arbitrary values to alarm events Define here user field properties 0 Sting UserField2 0 String UserField3 0 String UserField4 0 String User fields tab The available options on this tab are described on the next table Available options on User fields tab Name Spedfies this Field s name Specifies this Field s type 0 String 1 Integer 2 Double or 3 DateTime Sre oo o s
155. bra versions El Shows Tag and property values in E3 Studio at run time Domain s Object Counting Available options for Shadow toolbar ICON COMMAND ACTION Object Shadow Applies a shadow to an object Move Shadow Up Haa object s shadow Move Shadow Down Moves object s shadow down Move Shadow Lefi Moves object s shadow to the left Moves object s shadow to Shadow Color Selects object s shadow color E3 Studio 20 Available options for Objects toolbar ICON COMMAND ACTION Inserts an E3Alarm type object Inserts an E3Browser type object E3Chart Inse rts an E3Chart type object CheckBox Inse rts a CheckBox type object OptionButton Inserts an OptionButton type object object CommandButton Inserts a CommancButton type object Ce ae object ScrollBar Inse rts a ScrollBar type object object object object Available options for Screen toolbar ICON COMMAND ACTION Enables a selection mode Enables a rotation mode Shows an identification fora browsing order among objects E3Browser Allows editing connection points among Edit Connection Points objects This button is only enabled in XControl objects O a o a cu Inserts a Connector type object 21 E3 Studio ponte a Rou 3 type object pe Eee object a E S A object ee object object type object pan ae object object 5 Inserts a Display type object Groups an object selection Ungroup
156. brary ElipseX 3 Specify the name of the library and click Next 4 Set the specifications referring to the Domain 5 Click Finish Within an ElipsexX library two types of objects can be inserted Graphical XControl objects and XObject data objects The following items can be inserted in XControls Drawing Primitives Straight lines Rectangles Circles etc Vector Graphical Objects including objects from the symbol library WMF EMF etc Non Vector Graphical Objects BMP JPEG GIF etc E3 s ActiveX Controls E3Chart E3Browser E3Alarm ActiveX Controls from third parties and other XControls On the other hand XObjects can contain any type of non graphical objects that are executed in an E3 Server such as I O Drivers Data Servers Databases Formulas Alarm Configurations Alarm Servers and COM Objects among others Within the same lib file there may be any number of ElipseX components either XControls or XObjects Users can also have several different libraries within the same Domain Notice that for each XObject or XControl created in a library two interfaces are 249 Libraries internally created one to declare the object s properties and another one to declare object s events These interfaces have their names generated automatically adding a D prefix to that name the event interface adds the Events suffix to this automatic name If for example an object s name is XObject1 its property s interfac
157. brary settings Refresh iii an library so that updates become available A o indicated location 39 E3 Studio OPTION DESCRIPTION Defragment Defragments files lib or prj that is removes unnecessary spaces by excluding items importing files including resources etc After defragmentation a window is displayed with the following information file s original size file s defragmented size and compression s percentage Protection Protects the content of a prj or lib file against unauthorized edition viewing or execution For further information on this option please check the Security chapter New Folder Creates a new Folderin an application Insert Inserts objects available in E3 into a project or library For further information on this option please check each object s pective chapter Enable Disable project Enables or disables the selected project To disable it select its name and select Disable project Notice that project s icon changes to eA indicating thatitis disabled To enable it select its name and then the Enable project option Add Remove from Domain Adds or removes a project or library from a Domain To remove it selectits name and select Remove from Domain To add it select its name and then the Add to the Domain option Find Replace Searches for parts of a textin a project and replace them with others if necessary For further information on this option please check top
158. by menus None E3 standard option Unfold Slide Fade and Default Windows standard option Shaded menus Defines whethera menu displays a shaded effect e Appearance tab Changes the appearance of windows and toolbars in E3 Studio 13 E3 Studio Customize x Commands Toolbars Menus Appearance Options Styles C Office XP C Windows XP C Office 2000 C Office 2003 VS Net 2005 Appearance tab The available options on this tab are described on the next table Available options for Appearance tab OPTION DESCRIPTION Office XP Configures E3 Studio s appearance as in Office XP Configures E3 Studio s appearance as in Windows XP not available in Windows Classic style Office 2000 Configures E3 Studio s appearance as in Office 2000 Office 2003 2 Visual Studio NET 2005 e Options tab Configures project s general specifications Enables or disables toolbar options E3 Studio 14 Customize x Commands Toolbars Menus Appearance Options Toolbars MV Show descriptions I Include shortcut keys Large icons Options tab The available options on this tab are described on the next table Available options for Options tab OPTION DESCRIPTION Show descriptions Enables E3 to show a brief description on toolbar and menu options whenever mouse pointeris overan item Include shortcut keys Shows or hides shortcut keys on button s description Large icons Enables large
159. by defining identifiers which are keywords used ina CSV file and linked to properties or object classes in an INI file In E3 these templates for this import and export tool are defined with the following sections and variables Sections defined for Templates SECTION DESCRIPTION Header Defines the identifiers allowed for column names and data types This section must define the header and types variables Mandatory section for export Configuration Defines additional configurations for this import or export tool This section must define the separator root link collection objectduplicated and bindduplicated variables Creates a relationship between data type identifiers and real object classes Each identifier listed on the types variable that is not equal to an object s class name must be documented in this section and a variable must be created for each identifier E3 Studio 48 SECTION DESCRIPTION Columns Creates a relationship between column name identifiers and property names Each identifier listed on the header variable that is not equal to a property name must be documented in this section and a variable must be created for each identifier Defines which object classes must be imported or exported This section must define one of these two variables include or exclude If both are defined only include is considered Variables defined for Templates SECTION DESCRIPTION header
160. by this group The selected command on hollow red circle this permissions listis not granted to the selected user or group if itis not granted to at least one of all groups to which the selected user or group belongs Not informed hollow square The selected user or group uses all configurations from all groups to which they belong and there is nothing informed on those groups Therefore the selected command is granted For Screens this configuration of permissions can be performed by Screen specifically For Alarms this configuration can be performed by Area As for anonymous user permissions users must notice the following situations e If there are no users at all a permission check is not enabled or there is no user with restrictions for a certain operation then a user identification is not required users can log in as anonymous e If there are users in an application a permission check is enabled and at least one user cannot execute a certain operation then this operation requires a user identification users cannot log in as anonymous 501 Security In case there is any restriction to run stop edit a Domain or to configure users or groups users must be logged in E3 To do so use the Login or Logout options available on the File menu File L New Project Ctrl4 n EF Open Project Ctrl 0 New Domain Open Domain Close Domain Users Logout Connect to Save Ctrl
161. cal server Connect to a server in the network Enables a connection to a network server To do so selectit on the combo box Domain the one running the current Domain 81 E3 Studio If a connection to either server Domain or license is down E3 Studio is then disconnected from the other server Its last configuration is stored on Windows Registry and the next time E3 Studio opens it connects to both Domain and license servers used for the last time If a license server is not available or there are no licenses left then E3 Studio works in Demo mode An E3 Studio without a license Demo mode can only connect to an E3 Server also running in Demo mode If a license server is other than a Domain server the name of this license server is displayed in the title of E3 Studio s window License on local server or License on lt Server_Name gt If a license server is specified E3 Server s license window on Domain server identifies the name of a server borrowing a license for E3 Studio SERVER1 License borrowed from SERVER2 In this case a license listed on the Domain server is not part of the total amount of E3 Studio licenses in use on that server If a Domain server does not have a license and an E3 Studio connects to this server by using another server license then this Domain server temporarily switches from Demo to Studio mode switching back to Demo mode as soon as E3 Studio session closes E3 Studio 82 CHAPTER R Do
162. ccurs either on E3 Studio or on Viewer or whenever a program is closed without a logout In this case this logout is automatic where e USER contains the user s login name e SESSION contains Viewer or Studio e MACHINE contains the name of the computer where this user was logged in 111 Domains 3 9 4 3 Password Change Password of user USER has changed Generated whenever a user s password changes by using Viewer s ChangePassword method where e USER contains the user s login name that had their password changed 3 9 4 4 Login Fail User login USER in SESSION in MACHINE failed CAUSE Generated whenever a user login fails either on Viewer or on E3 Studio where e USER contains the user s login name e SESSION contains Viewer or Studio e MACHINE contains the name of the computer where this user tried to log in e CAUSE might be an incorrect login or password a disabled account a blocked account an expired password or a Oxnnnnnnn error 3 9 4 5 User Database Change User USER has changed user database Generated whenever a user database changes usually via E3 Studio s File Users menu where e USER contains the user s login name who edited user s database or Anonymous if there were no users logged in 3 9 4 6 Blocked Account User account USER has been blocked Generated whenever a user s account is blocked due to an excessive number of wrong logins where e USER
163. check chapter Viewer on Scripts Reference Manual Viewer params lt Name1 gt lt Value1 gt lt Name2 gt lt Value2 gt e help Displays a dialog box with usage examples of Viewer s command prompt options as in the next figure 511 E3 Viewer and E3 WebViewer m Viewer lt server 1 gt lt server 2 gt SCREEN lt Initial Screen gt NOPING READONLY i CACHEPATH lt path gt USESERVERS PARAMS lt Namel gt lt Valuel gt lt Name2 gt lt Value2 gt Options lt server 1 gt lt server2 gt Connects to the specified address es and does not show inital Viewer window Using connects to the local server SCREEN lt Initial screen gt When starting opens the screen specified by lt initial screen gt instead of the screen specified on the domain NOPING Does not use PING when connecting to server READONLY Opens the Viewer forcing to use Viewer Only license CACHEPATH lt path gt Uses the specified folder in lt path gt to store Viewer s cache USESERVERS Only connects to the specified command line address es PARAMS lt Namel gt lt Valuel gt lt Name2 gt lt Value2 gt Specifies user parameters for Viewer This option cannot be in front of server s list HELP Shows this message Samples Viewer Viewer serverl SCREEN Screens Screen 1 Viewer NOPING serverl Viewer CACHEPATH d e3 cachel server Viewer USESERVERS serverA serve
164. ck Edit links Copy Links S Show in Editor ME Show in Explorer F Properties Inserting an I O Block 2 Studio then opens up a window asking for a number of Blocks to create in this Driver as well as their names This name is auto incremented and if this option remains blank Blocks are created with a default name 149 Drivers Adding 1 O Blocks 3 Studio then shows a window to determine the number of Block Elements in this object In this option users can indicate a mapping for all Elements in a Block or ina given Element s interval Configure the new block n Block size J Element mapping Map all block elements Map a range of elements 0 fa isa L ox cu Configuring a new I O Block 4 Informa Block size and its mapping options 5 Click OK 6 If necessary configure object s properties Some properties in I O Blocks can be configured using Properties List and there is no need to create scripts for this To configure any property locate it on Properties List and perform the necessary adjustments For more information on properties please check the Scripts Reference Manual Drivers 150 4 1 6 Block Element Block Elements represent links for every position in a Block to use as if they were I O Tags Block Elements can freely point to each index inside a Block There can be two Block Elements pointing to the same index in a Block and also to more less or the same nu
165. ck of the last six hours of data relative to the current server time with an unlimited number of Tags and all playback resources enabled e Does not allow using E3 Studio s Import and Export tool Introduction 6 CHAPTER E3 Studio E3 Studio is E3 s development environment With it users can create and maintain Domains projects and libraries Default Programs aw Desktop Gadget Gallery 2 Internet Explorer E Paint NET Windows DVD Maker Admin k Windows Fax and Scan Windows Media Center Windows Media Player g Windows Update A XPS Viewer Accessories Elipse SCADA Elipse Software d Elipse O o Ji Elipse E3 Control Panel ff E3 Admin x E3 Tweak Devices and Printers I Studio mg Viewer Default Programs Documentation Hardkey Help and Support Back Documents Pictures Music Computer Search programs and files Path indicated by the system when E3 is installed To start an application in E3 Studio follow these procedures 1 During installation a program group is created on Windows Start menu To 7 E3 Studio start E3 Studio select the corresponding icon on this menu as shown on the previous figure or click the icon created on Windows Desktop area according to the next figure E3 Studio icon 2 Aprotection device must be connected to the correct I O port for a local edition or this machine must be on the same local network that another one with an E3 Server already installed and wit
166. ck the E3 Admin icon on Windows Notification Area and then select the Statistics option 123 Domains AI E3 Admin Communication Statistics ol e E3 Server connections Program Computer Data sent Sending Packets _ Data received Receiving Packets r Connected since E3 Admin WIN4S84K8 100 01KB 0 0 80 2 46 KB 0 0 81 4 11 38 PM 10 21 2013 E Studio WIN 1S84K8 10 26KB 0 0 156 9 18 KB 0 0 293 4 12 55 PM 10 21 2013 E3 Admin Communication Statistics window The available options on this window are described on the next table Available options for E3 Admin Communication Statistics window connected to the E3 Server connected to the E3 Server Sending compression Shows the percentage of compression on sending Shows the amount of Shows the amount of packages sent sent IDatareceived Shows the amount of data received the amount of data received Receiving compression Shows the percentage of compression on receiving Shows the amount of packages received program started the connection 3 10 4 Monitor The E3 Admin Monitor window shows real time information about the status of Domain servers To do so right click the E3 Admin icon on Windows Notification Area and then select the Monitor option Domains 124 I E3 Admin Monitor o eae Current domain C Example Project1 dom Running Ping addresses Connected
167. ck the View Screens item select the Insert Screen in option and then the project s name Organizer x Domain Project1 fai Res ga Find Replace lt New File gt ay Pa Object Counting LJ Document Scripts A Check Edit links Load All Objects Close All Objects Save All Objects Inserting a Screen in Domain mode Whenever a new Screen is created or when the Fit to Splitter option is selected on an existing Screen the following window is displayed to configure the object s size Screens and Screen Objects 200 Configuring Screen size xa Choose the Splitter where the Screen must be opened Viewer _top v Set as initial Splitter s Screen Screen Name Screen1 Width pixels 1024 Height pixels 706 Himetric size 27093 33 x 18679 58 o cae Configuring the Screen size Available options for Configuring Screen size window OPTION DESCRIPTION Choose the Splitter where the Screen must be Allows choosing the Splitter where the Screen will be opened The only Splitters listed here are the ones which Screens linked to the SplitLink property will be visible at run time Name SS C Deetermines the Screen s name Width Determines the Screen s width in pixels Height Determines the Screen s height in pixels The Width and Height options are initially filled in wit
168. cks if the Server keeps the connection alive waiting for periodic heartbeat messages to be sent even if there is no other communication to perform If double the time of the configured heartbeat is exceeded with the Client not receiving any message from the Server then the Server is considered on failure or offline forcing an immediate disconnection Heartbeat interval ms Value in milliseconds of the heartbeat interval Default value for this option is 2000 ms Domains 130 OPTION DESCRIPTION Use asynchronous link creation If this option is selected Links are created in parallel among several Domains and the result of that operation is sent asynchronously as each Server replies The advantage of this option is that it does not lock E3 Server s general Link handling Only operations of that same Domain can be locked if the Link creation lasts too long which can happen on slow networks NOTE This option is not available for versions prior to 3 2 and applications developed in previous versions fail with an error code 8004F 108 incompatible REC version Default value for this option is not selected which corresponds to the behavior of versions prior to 3 2 NOTE Deselecting the PING check and Use connection heartbeat options simultaneously makes detecting connection failures extremely slow in case the Server fails It is recommended that these two options always remain selected In E3 Studio the full sharing
169. condition s name HI HIHI LO LOLO etc and alarm s description If this alarm is or was acknowledged displays an ACK text at the beginning with the operator s name inside parentheses If itis a Bookmark this field displays its associated comment Event List toolbar contains the operations listed on the next table Options for Event List toolbar ICON COMMAND ACTION Previous Event Places playback clock at an event previous to the selected one on this list skipping events with a time stamp equal to the current time stamp Next Event Places playback clock at the next event with time stamp greater than the current time stamp Y Filter Events Turns an event filter on or off When turning a filter on only events from the current selected Tag or alarm source are displayed on the event list Bookmarks are always displayed even if a filter is on Y Filter bookmarks Displays only bookmarks that were created When right clicking an event a contextual menu is displayed with the options described on the next table E3Playback 440 Options for event s contextual menu OPTION DESCRIPTION Show or Remove chart on Timeline Adds or removes a visual representation of this Tag on the Timeline window Show only events from this tag or Show all Filters events displayed on the Event list events to display only the selected Tag Selecting this option again displays all events 20 3 6 Tag List A Tag List
170. cripts and internal settings of Screen objects 2 6 1 CSV File A CSV Comma Separated Values file is a text file based on comma separated columns or on any other previously defined separator In E3 these files have information about objects that were exported and are used in the import process to create these objects properly in E3 Studio Each column in a CSV file stands for one or more properties of an E3 object and each row stands for an object Link or collection item To ensure that these files are used correctly users must pay attention to some details e The first rowin a CSV file must contain a header identifying all columns correctly e This header must necessarily contain a column identifying the type of object being imported or exported This column s name is ObjectType Its value is the name of an object s class XObject1 DrawRect InternalTag AgSimple etc except for collections which display pre defined keywords ITableBindRow IAxis etc e The header for the next columns must be the name of the property itself e Columns can be placed in any order in a file there can be more or less columns without interfering in the import or export process The only mandatory column is ObjectType because without this column it is impossible to identify the type of object to create 2 6 1 1 Generating a CSV File Manually Users can generate a CSV file using Notepad Excel or any other Windows application The generated fil
171. crosoft OLE DB Provider for SQL Server SQL State 42000 NativeError 1750 POSSIBLE CAUSE There is already an object table key index etc on this Database with the same name SOLUTION Change this object s name 27 5 Oracle Databases This is a list of all possible errors that may occur when testing a connection to this Database 525 Frequently Asked Questions Error ORA 01017 invalid username password logon denied POSSIBLE CAUSE Message generated on application log when password or user name is wrong SOLUTION Check if this user exists and if password is correct Error ORA 12154 TNS could not resolve the connect identifier specified POSSIBLE CAUSE This client connection was not found SOLUTION Check if this connection exists on the computer and if itis working using one of the network utilities provided by Oracle Error ORA 02264 name already used by an existing constraint POSSIBLE CAUSE There is already a Database object with this name SOLUTION To prevent this error create and configure different index or primary key names in E3 Error ORA 01403 no data found POSSIBLE CAUSE This message is generated when an internal E3 Query searches for Database objects and does not find them for example a Historic table does not exist thus it must be created SOLUTION This is considered an error only if it persists on application logs Error ORA 00001 unique constraint SYSTEM E3INDEX
172. csesacseescsacacsacsees 25 3 Stopping a Redundant Domain ssssssscssssssessrssssessesesaesessesaesesacsessesaeacescseees 25 4 Stopping One of the Domain Servers scsssssssssssssessesessesceseseesssacscesesseacescssees 521 25 5 Switch Time Between Servers scscscsssccssscscsssecsceesesssscsssececsesssssscsceesececsesesscecees 522 25 6 Viewer Reconnection 25 7 Using Databases with Hot Standby sscsssssssssssssssssesessesessessesesaeseesesaeaceaescees 522 26 Advanced Settings iaaea aaaeeeaa ee ean eea cosuasensonessvascentsncveceaceockcoeseveese 523 27 Frequently Asked Questions e ssssssesesssesesesesessesossessesesosssescsceoseseesessssosoessssesesosssesese 524 274 Tab Ordet E a a a a a 524 27 2 Overlaying Animations in Objects ssssesesssssesesessssesoesssscsenosseescsesosesescsesnseseseese 524 273 Scere Objects onnie R RAN ie 524 27 4 SQL Server Databases s ssssssesssssssssssosssssessssosssossossessssossosesesosseesessssoossssssssesssss 525 27 5 Oracle Databases sisiaesiscisscssiteassudonsergscdoiesteicacsssteboiosdasescsesstecidsoeet Seasiabecdssaedestedeaaascis 525 27 6 Data Servet ceccsccsssssscsscescesccsccsccsscsscseceeseecsecsacsceseessescsscssceseeseesccsccnsencseeseeeaesaes 27 7 I O Drivers 27 8 Alar S e a a aeeie ae eda EEEa E EEE aE ea a e 27 9 ES ALAM IN aA E EE EENE 27 10 ES BOWSER iissccsccscsccsscsscssecssssesssssacessedenssadsessedseasessesssescsscece
173. ct are left blank E3 uses an Drivers 172 anonymous connection with a server Otherwise E3 sends these property values to a server which must support that type of authentication on the selected endpoint In this object itis also possible to configure several timeouts for an OPC UA connection These timeout limits the TimeoutCall TimeoutConnection and TimeoutSession properties are always in milliseconds and they must be set according to communication performance which may be limited by a server by a network by machines running a client and a server and even by operations performed on a client These settings must be performed on a case by case basis and these property values are only suggested In E3 Studio communication with a Driver can be activated by selecting the Activate Communication option on object s contextual menu Activation is performed automatically by Query objects when selecting servers Tags or when performing a visualization of query results the Visualize tab Notice that to edit Driver properties it may be necessary to deactivate communication If communication is active in E3 Studio then itis possible to open a window with information about the selected server by selecting the Server information option on object s contextual menu In case a connection is not established for any reason this window displays question marks instead of server information 4 4 2 Query Object To configure a Query object to re
174. ct the Maintenance mode option of that server 521 Hot Standby 25 5 Switch Time Between Servers The default time interval for a standby server to take over when the active server fails is 15 seconds However itis possible to configure this time via the Time to activate backup server item as seen on topic Domain Options chapter Domains This time interval allows the previous server to finish the application in case of a network only failure This configured time directly affects the ping timeout among servers If itis too low switches every 1 second ping timeout in 160 ms there may be some spontaneous server switches caused by minor network failures 25 6 Viewer Reconnection When there is a server switch the Viewers start the reconnection process by trying to connect to the backup and to the active server alternately Users have the option to wait for the end of the reconnection process to the current Viewer cancel the reconnection and then close the Viewer or open a new Viewer session with the new server 25 7 Using Databases with Hot Standby Users can have two servers running separately in the same application One of them remains active while the other one remains in Standby mode waiting for a possible failure Hot Standby ensures application continuity but when using a database users must also ensure continuous access to that database There are two ways to solve this problem In the first one both applicatio
175. cting bookmark s date and time including milliseconds These fields are already filled in with the selected date and time on time line Name Allows selecting bookmark s name Comments Allows informing an additional comment for this bookmark When creating a bookmark it is displayed on Timeline as in the next figure and also on Event List E3Playback 436 Bookmark Bookmark2 03 30 04 00 04 30 05 00 05 30 06 00 06 30 07 00 07 30 08 00 08 30 09 00 26 Feb 2013 26 Feb 2013 26 Feb 2013 26 Feb 2013 26 Feb 2013 26 Feb 2013 Timeline with bookmarks 20 3 4 Screen Area This is the area where application Screens are displayed The Screen initially displayed is the one configured in E3Playback s InitialScreen property If this property is left blank then Viewer s initial Screen is used E Viewer x x TATT Screen Area A Screen Area works as a Viewer inside E3Playback Screens are always opened in Fit zoom Itis possible to freely browse application Screens There are some restrictions and comments regarding Screen behavior inside E3Playback e Screens work as if they were inside a Read Only Viewer that is itis not allowed to send commands and values to an E3 Server This guarantees that operations performed on E3Playback do not interfere with an application in real time e Itis not allowed to access server objects using the Application Get Object 437 E3 Playback method If this method is calle
176. cutes the previously loaded Domain The configured Domain When starting up automatically executes a_user configured Domain No Domain Does not start any Domain 3 10 6 Printer This option displays a list of printers found either locally or remotely and allows users to select one of them to use by an E3 Server To do so right click the E3 Admin icon on Windows Notification Area and select the Printer option The window on the next table is then shown Domains 126 E3 Admin Printer x Choose the printer to be used by E3 Server rey Microsoft XPS Document Writer Default Configure Browse E3 Admin Printer window The available options on this window are described on the next table Available options for E3 Admin Printer window OPTION DESCRIPTION Printer name Lists the names of available printers default one selected printer Pee selecting another network printer and establishing a connection 3 10 7 About E3 Admin This option shows the current version of E3 Admin 3 10 8 Start or Stop E3 Server This option starts or stops the E3 Server When the Stop E3 Server option is selected users are asked to confirm this operation If confirmed the Domain is stopped and closed and all existing E3 Studios and Viewers are disconnected if there are any Users are notified that this turns remote E3 Studios and Hot Standby unavailable When an E3 Server is stopped it can be restarted via
177. d or the Domain file is not found probably because an invalid Domain path name was informed e The Domain name was not informed e This message appears when the viewer or start options are used without the Domain name For more information check the chapter Domains How two or more users can work at the same time on the same Domain Creating a Domain via network several users can open it on different computers and work on it at the same time The changes made by one users are visible to the other ones as soon as they open the specific changed object or as soon as they update the changed project or Library What is the effect of clicking Update on the project menu All project objects are updated For example if several users are working at the same time on the Domain changes saved by one user are visible to the other ones as soon as they open the specific changed object or when they update the changed project or Library 537 Frequently Asked Questions 27 18 Stored Procedure How do I run a Stored Procedure in E3 The easiest way is by creating a Query in E3 with the command to execute the Stored Procedure and passing if necessary values to it The command that must be configured on this Query is the following Exec StoredProcedureName lt vari gt lt var2 gt Where the syntax of variables must be the lt less than character the percent character the name of the variable the percent character ag
178. d ina script it fails by aborting this script e Due to several access limitations to a server script errors occurred inside E3Playback do not generate an error message and scripts are silently aborted e E3Playback emulates a real Viewer To do so a new copy of a Viewer object and its Tags are created for use with E3Playback If any specific Viewer behavior must be enabled or disabled inside E3Playback users can test Viewer s IsPlaybackMode property e There is a complete isolation among Screens running inside an E3Playback and what is outside e E3Playback handles new Frames created by an application as new tabs on top of Screen Area Tab s title is the name of the Frame or Screen that was opened E viewer C main x v Frames opened on E3Playback tabs e All Links referring to server objects are captured by an E3Playback and start receiving historical data according to the current playback clock This includes not only Links created on displayed Screens but also on Links available on Viewer Tags e Links created among Viewer objects for example a Display showing a Demo Tag value internal to the Viewer work normally without any playback interference e E3Chart only works inside an E3Playback if it is configured with historical Pens Real time Pens are disabled inside E3Playback they do not receive any data e E3Alarm displays an alarm summary according to what is stored on E3 Playback 438 database s alar
179. d object Always create a new object r Duplicated link import Ask me what to do in each case Always overwrite existing link Always ignore duplicated link Duplicated collections import Ask me what to do in each case Always overwrite existing collection Always ignore duplicated collection Duplicated collection items import Ask me what to do in each case Always overwrite existing item Always ignore duplicated item Always create new item cot i Import tab The available options on this tab are described on the next table 55 E3 Studio Available options for Import tab OPTION DESCRIPTION Duplicated object import Specifies how E3 must handle the occurrence of duplicated objects during the import process The available options are Ask me what to do in each case Always overwrite existing object Always ignore duplicated object or Always create a new object Duplicated link import Specifies how E3 must handle the occurrence of duplicated Links during the import process The available options are Ask me what to do in each case Always overwrite existing Link or Always ignore duplicated Link Duplicated collections import Specifies how E3 must handle the occurrence of duplicated collections during the import process The available options are Ask me what to do in each case Always overwrite existing collection or Always ignore duplicated collection D
180. d then selecting the Insert E3Browser option E3Browser 378 Fit to Splitter lib b A Find Replace ye x Object Counting hi z ane H i rt saat Standard gt i ort h e E BAlarm J Document Scripts gt E B Check Lex E3Chart Edit links E E3Playback Copy Links S RMChartX Show in Organizer Show in Explorer oF Properties Inserting an E3Browser on a Screen 2 An E3Browser uses a Query object to help users in the process of defining queries on an application Database For more information please check the corresponding chapter 3 If needed configure E3Browser properties Some of the properties of this object can be configured using the Properties List without creating scripts for this To configure any property locate it on the Properties List and perform the necessary adjustments Other information about this object s functionality can be found on the Scripts Reference Manual in its corresponding chapter 18 1 E3Browser s Query Object A Query is an E3 object that helps users in the process of defining queries on an application Database Every time an E3Browser retrieves data from a Database it is necessary to send a command to know which data is needed for that object Therefore every time an E3 application needs to store or retrieve data froma Database these commands are sent in SQL Structured Query Language format 379 E3Browser H E Settings 4 7 Objects Library lll View
181. d to be updated more quickly and a larger cycle time for variables whose updating priorities are low Itis important to notice however that communication performance depends on a lot of factors among which are device type communication interface type in use baud rate error rate etc Whenever E3 sends a request to set values to one or more variables this request has a higher execution priority relative to a Tag scan In case of an lOServer failure E3 automatically restarts this module to get back to work On the other hand an OServer stops working in case there is no E3 Runtime Main or Standby to receive its data When using the ShareServer property users can share the same OServer among several I O Drivers The first Driver executing is responsible for starting communication procedures such as opening a serial port or initializing a communication interface The next shared I O Drivers then use the same OServer opened by the first one which allows sharing communication interfaces used by a Driver This may be an advantage because many communication devices such as modems serial ports and other interfaces allow just one connection preventing simultaneous usage by more than one Driver When sharing Drivers users can reuse the same connection for more than one object Users should notice that settings for shared Drivers must be the same for a proper working of Driver sharing When a Domain is executing users have access
182. default port used by E3 is 6515 but this behavior can be changed according to topic Running E3 Viewer Via Start Menu Windows XP SP3 1 Go to the Start Control Panel menu Frequently Asked Questions 532 un BP WwW N Click Security Center Click Windows Firewall Select the Exceptions tab and click Add Port Type a name and a port number to unblock Leave the Protocol option selected as TCP Click OK to save these changes Windows Vista SP2 1 2 3 4 Go to the Start Control Panel menu Click Windows Firewall Select the Exceptions tab and click Add Port Type a name and a port number to unblock Leave the Protocol option selected as TCP Click OK to save these changes Windows 7 SP1 Windows 8 Windows 8 1 and Windows 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 Go to the Start Control Panel menu Click Windows Firewall Click Advanced Settings Right click the Outbound Rules item and select the New Rule option On Rule Type window select the Port item and click Next On Protocol and Ports window select the TCP option and on Specific remote ports item type the number of a port to unblock and click Next On Action window select the Allow the connection item and click Next On Profile window leave the Domain Private and Public options selected and click Next On Name window type a name and a description optional for this port and click Finish to save these changes and close this window I cannot ope
183. destedensessosenaedenvacsessbesstscsess 3 1 E3 Server JZ ES RUM ss cusscscccenceccescccceseossosesstascassasesceaseasesssesessontsocestenteseesecsosebsvossseseseessecsssesecdbecteeevencoaces 3 4 lOServer 3 5 E3 Studio 3 6 E3 Viewer eTo h eTo aTa h AE EE A T E E O E E E ET 86 3 8 Creating a DOMAIN i sesicecdicssieaccelecsdelavcustontseleededestecsecscsbecensvosvessesbecbucostoscessoubensd seassesvages 87 3 9 Configuration koneina a dob a a i i iie 97 3 10 Other Options for Windows Notification Area e sssessesesosseesesososesesesesesesesesse 121 3 11 Remote Domains 3 12 Generating Logs in E3 DI ATLA A AE AEA EE E E EI E BVO DEVE saccssasccesseendescescssstbonscsccsdecnseasscunseucosesaeesonwsetasssiovshoaesseuctesooesscods siseusshassussesoste 4 2 OPC SOLVER sccscsecsshicssatsccsctendscdsedscevecssossusteeshcseueaseos ses venscovchouscenssavenstaseesteseasensenedeseesens 4 3 OPC Driver 4 4 OPC UA Driver A CUA AIRY ise PASE AAA ATENEA T EE SEEE EAT ASEE AA By FAM scsssccscescascccsusteceunsessesssivesescsecsvessansessebeessedsedsencdessdsscucosasuedecdsndecssnsecdsesedesesesseosensvesessess G VIC WER A E A E A E O A 6 1 Configuration occsiciceccecccsckcenscceesavessus sates vuccusstvchsesstecduatuccnsecsesdeestetesesevesausveuesdeotsueeves 6 2 Variables in Viewer 6 3 top ODO Ctra nie e eps R E EERE 6 4 Viewer F ldet secsicacsscesaccsasscscsaiscedcossvasseoiascoscs sod tespectasssccsoasteasaacedtscuodbeasacscssestectoiusses 7 Screen
184. dialog box on the next figure is displayed E3Alarm 332 Alarm and Event Acknowledgment Sa Acknowledge only the selected events Acknowledge all events of the current filter Acknowledge all events in the system C ce Alarm acknowledgment options The available options on this dialog box are displayed on the next table Available options for Alarm and Event Acknowledgment dialog box OPTION DESCRIPTION Acknowledge only the selected events Only selected alarms are acknowledged Acknowledge all events of the current filter All visible alarms on this E3Alarm are acknowledged Acknowledge all events in the system All alarms in a Domain are acknowledged e The Acknowledge only selected events option is only available if there are alarms selected on this E3Alarm Users can acknowledge this alarm in this case a new record is inserted on the Database indicating this acknowledgment and the corresponding row on this E3Alarm indicates that it was acknowledged This option is disabled if the AllowAckSelected property is set to False e The Acknowledge all events of the current filter option is only available if there are visible alarms on this E3Alarm Users can select this option without clicking any alarm To do so click any area on this E3Alarm and the Acknowledgment window is then displayed When clicking it the acknowledgment dialog box appears This option is disabled if the AllowAckCurrentFilter property is set to
185. displays Tags currently in use for playback Tags x Tag Path Table Status Value a au Dados Saneamento ETA histSanea OK lt Null gt ul Dados Saneamento ETA histSanea OK lt Null gt aut Dados Saneamento ETA histSanea OK lt Null gt Dados Saneamento ETA Error Tag n lt Empty gt Jt Dados Saneamento ETA histSanea OK lt Null gt Ut Dados Saneamento ETA histSanea OK lt Null gt ul Dados Saneamento ETA histSanea OK lt Null gt Dados Saneamento ETAt Error Tag n lt Empty gt 4 mW p Tag List Columns on this window are described on the next table Columns on Tag List COLUMN DESCRIPTION Displays Tag s path that contains Tag data the database Displays Tag s value on the current playback date and time Displays Tag s current time stamp If this Tag supports interpolation only for analog points stored on a Storage then the time stamp is equal to the current playback time If not the time stamp is from the last event with a time stamp less or equal to the current playback time 441 E3 Playback COLUMN DESCRIPTION Quality Displays Tag s quality OPC standard on the current playback time When quality is equal to 192 displays onlya Good text Previous Event Displays the time stamp of the previous event of this Tag on the database If this Tag does not support interpolation the previous eventis always equal to Tag s current time stamp If
186. dows Other tti I Import Export root object M Import Export links I Import Export collections m Save template I Save changes from this template in an INI file Settings tab The available options on this tab are described on the next table Available options for Settings tab OPTION DESCRIPTION Columns separator The available options are Use list separator configured in Windows selects the character configured on Windows as the list separator to use as CSV file s column separator and Use another character as separator let users select another character as the column separator Other settings Defines whatis imported or exported objects Links or collections The available options are Import Export root object Import Export Links or Import Export collections Save template When the Save changes from this template in an INI file option is selected it defines an INI file where changes to this template are saved and this file can then be used again When this option is not selected changes made to this template are temporarily saved to a file on Windows temporary folder This file is used to perform an import or export process right after configuration and itis removed later e Import On this tab users can configure import only options E3 Studio 54 m Duplicated object import Ask me what to do in each case Always overwrite existing object Always ignore duplicate
187. ds from each table as well as the contents of its corresponding _Fields table to determine a table type An E3Playback recognizes three types of E3Playback 442 tables Storage This table must have E3TimeStamp FieldID Quality and FieldValue fields Alarms This table must have EventTime or EventTimeDbl ConditionActive Acked AckRequired and FullAlarmSourceName fields e Historic This table must have E3TimeStamp field and must not be recognized as a Storage or Alarms table 4 Ifthis table is a Storage type the Fields table is scanned to determine which Tags are stored on it A Tag path is determined by table s FieldName field The field that provides time stamp data is always E3TimeStamp Each Storage can have up to three data tables one for each data type e Strings Table name is lt Table gt _String e Bit Digital Table name is lt Table gt _Bit e Double Analog Table name is lt Table gt 5 Ifthis tableis a Historic type the Fields table is scanned to determine which Tags are stored on it A Tag path on this caseis determined by table s FieldSource field The field that provides times tamp data is always E3TimeStamp 6 If this table is an Alarm type the Fields table is scanned to determine user s alarm field names if they exist The field that provides time stamp data is EventTime optionally combined with EventTimeMSsS field if it exists or EventTimeDbIl field this last one has priority because it represe
188. ds of Historic s _Fields table FIELD DESCRIPTION FieldDeadBand Dead band Historic 362 FIELD DESCRIPTION FieldDeadBandUnit Unit used bya dead band in absolute values orin percentage Field s description Engineering unit T ag s highest value ieldDescription Index of a field stored on a Historic object iledLowEng Tag s lowest value FieldMaxRecTime After this time expires data must be stored automaticall FieldMinRecTime Minimum value fora time variation to store data ieldName FieldQuality Field s quality type Available options are 0 No quality 1 Method previous to 1 21 version where 0 Uncertain quality and 1 or 2 Tag s real qualit Link used by this field to retrieve its values ieldType Field s type The Link Historic to existing table 27 option links a Historic to an existing table ona Database When this option is enabled Studio opens a dialog box to specify which tables are linked to the current Historic object according to the next figure 363 Historic Selecting a table to link to a Historic After selecting a table and clicking OK Studio displays the message on the next figure Are you sure you want to unlink this Historic to its database table user Historic You will lose all your field settings a System message By clicking Cancel fields configured on this table keep their current configuration However by clicking OK all fields indexes and primary
189. e corresponding to the active E3 log session For more information about this application please check Elipse Event Log User s Manual available via Start Programs Elipse Software Elipse Event Log menu If there is a Domain already executing locally the E3 Viewer item on this menu opens a Viewer to the local Domain Otherwise or if the SHIFT key is pressed opens 121 Domains Viewer s initial screen where users can select the server and other options as described on topic E3 Viewer and E3 WebViewer Running E3 Viewer Via Start Menu 3 10 2 Licenses Users can view the available licenses via E3 Admin To do so right click E3 Admin s icon on Windows Notification Area and then select the Licenses option The window on the next figure is then shown E3 version 4 5 Build 208 License number HL2F2E327A E3 Server for E3 Studio E3 Studio 1 license s 1 in use 0 available E3 Viewer unlimited licenses 0 in use E3 Viewer Only unlimited licenses 0 in use Remote Domain Server unlimited licenses 0 in use Remote Domain Client unlimited licenses 0 in use I O points unlimited licenses 0 in use Storage tags unlimited licenses Drivers unlimited licenses 0 in use OPC Server unlimited licenses 0 in use I ZE3 Studio WIN4S84K8 E3 Admin Licenses window The available options on this window are described on the next table Domains 122 Available options for E3 Admin Licenses window O
190. e Sets This view s toolbar has the following options Add F to create a new Value Set Remove to delete the selected Value Set and Rename to rename the selected Value Set 21 5 Creating a Formula Instructions This exercise creates a Formula object to store Value Sets to produce a certain part This part has three measurement units External Diameter Internal Diameter and Height This Formula stores values for two different engines which produce these 457 Formulas parts 21 5 1 Procedures 1 Insert a Formula object in the application 2 Configure a Database and a table Use an existing Database on this project and name this table as Production Database Configuration Database DB1 p Table Production L o cu Configuring a Database and a table 3 Create three Templates in this Formula e External Diameter With an absolute value restriction between 50 and 80 e Internal Diameter With a difference value restriction of 10 and 10 e Height With a restricted limit Formulai x 4 gt X Name Type Restrictions Height 1 Integer R intemal Diameter 1 Integer D1010 E Exttemal Diameter 1 Integer A50 80 M 4 gt Templates 4 Units 4 Values 4 Scripts Templates 4 Thenext step defines Units relative to this Formula Before creating these Units however users must create Tags for this Formula To do so insert a Folder named Formula in a Da
191. e check topic Remote Domain on the chapter about Domains 14 1 2 Filters Tab The Filters tab allows managing E3Alarm filters E3Alarm1 properties E3Alarm E3 Item Position Connections Filters Columns Sorting Colors Font _4 gt Filters Display _all v Configure Add Filters tab E3Alarm 322 The available options on this tab are described on the next table Available options on Filters tab OPTION DESCRIPTION i sh box with all currently available Filters ate the configuration window for the selected Filter described next Adds a new Filter to the Collection of Filters This option corresponds to the Add method of the Collection of Filters Remove Removes the selected Filter This option corresponds to the Remove method of the Collection of Filters NOTE The Filter created automatically with an E3Alarm cannot be removed When clicking Configure the window on the next figure is opened to configure the selected Filter Filter properties General Name Display _all Filter by Alarm Area empty to disable Iv Use custom filter empty to disable Filter by type Alarms and events v Filter by severity V High V Medium MV Low Properties of the selected Filter The available options on this window are described on the next table 323 E3Alarm Available options on the properties window of a Filter OPTION DESCRIPTION Filter by Alarm Area Simple
192. e instant for this search in Float format Returns a single row query with E3TimeStamp Quality and FieldValue fields Usage example DECLARE MyDate FLOAT SET MyDate dbo E3GETFLOATVALUE 10 10 2005 12 00 00 EXECUTE E3Archive STO22 MyDate Data DemoTagi 2 15 2 4 3 E3Archivelnterpolate Returns points immediately before and after an instant according to the ArchivedValue function but only for the Interpolate sub type Formal description is 349 Storage E3ArchiveInterpolate strTableName VARCHAR 1 dData float strFieldName VARCHAR 1 strFilter VARCHAR 5 type int bQuality int Where e dData Time instant for this search in Float format This query returns two rows with E3TimeStamp and FieldValue fields Usage example DECLARE MyDate FLOAT SET MyDate dbo E3GETFLOATVALUE 10 10 2005 12 00 00 EXECUTE E3ArchiveInterpolate STO22 MyDate Data DemoTagi 2 0 15 2 4 4 ESNCompData Equivalent to the CompressedDataNValues function Formal description is E3NCompData strTableName VARCHAR 1 dData float strFieldName VARCHAR 1 iNValues int strFilter VARCHAR 5 strOrder VARCHAR 1 type anit bQuality int Where e iNValues Amount of values needed e strOrder Sorts this query by a field other than TimeStamp This function returns the number of rows requested if found with the E3TimeStamp Quality and FieldValue fields Usage
193. e is called DXObject1 and its event s interface is called DXObject1Events Any attempt to use these names in other classes in the same library generates an error code 8002802D which corresponds to Name already exists in the library 9 2 1 XControls An XControl defines a graphical interface to the user which can be composed of any E3 object and its purpose is to be easily multiplied by the project Users can create an XControl right clicking the LIB file created in the Domain then selecting the Insert XControl option Vi xcontroli x 1b M 4 gt gt I Design 4 Properties A Scripts Design tab of an XControl Libraries 250 i xcontroli x d gt X Name Type 3 A Initial value Help text ee GS Veit la A Empty gt F Property2 Variant wa E Empty A Property3 Variant a A Empty M 4 gt I Design A Properties 4 Scripts Properties tab of an XControl When inserting an XControl this object view is opened composed by three tabs Besides the Scripts tab which is common to all objects there is the Design tab which is equivalent to a Screen where graphical objects previously described can be inserted and the Properties tab where variables can be inserted which are XControl properties These properties are exported by the object and can be linked to a Tag or to another property when the objectis used in the application The variables to be exported can be inserted by press
194. e last SetPoint inserted on this Screen This command loads a Value Set specified in this SetPoint to Engine1 Unit When running this method then searches for a Value Set on disk If found this method loads it according to restriction patterns defined in a Formula s Template Fields with open restrictions may have their values changed by users If users do not want to be warned about changing values in loaded fields they must use the silent mode f Value Override Template Internal Diameter Unit Engine 1 Value set Modeli Allowed range Original value Minimum 75 H Maximum 95 New value 85 A change in a value However there is an alternative Viewer s LoadFormulaValuesQuiet method Choose the Silent mode on this Screen by using a Check Box 1 Create a Check Box on this Screen 2 Placea Label on it with Silent as its caption 3 Return to the OK button script and change it to the following code Sub CommandButton2_Click If Screen Item CheckBoxi Value True Then Application LoadFormulaValuesQuiet_ Formulai Enginei Model1 Application LoadFormulaValuesQuiet_ Formulai Enginei Model2 Application LoadFormulaValuesQuiet_ Formulai Engine1 Model3 Application LoadFormulaValuesQuiet_ Formulai Engine1 Model4 Else Application LoadFormulaValues_ Formulai Engine1 Modeli Application LoadFormulaValues_ Formulai Engine1 Model2 Formulas 462 Applicat
195. e other options 8 6 Reverse With a Reverse Link every time a property s value is modified this value is copied to the source thus working inversely to a Simple Link To use this resource follow these procedures 1 Open the object s properties window and select the Links tab 2 Select the property to create a Link and click the Reverse Connection item Links 238 Source Data DemoTag1 Value 9 Efect3D_X 9 Efect3D_Y i Efect3DColorBase Reverse Link 8 7 Multiple In a Multiple Link each Link row allows retrieving its value from a different source The active source is selected according to the Link s main source value Each row has an interval the Min and Max properties and the source for that interval the Source property which is a normal link To use this resource follow these procedures 1 Open the object s properties window and select the Links tab 2 Select the property to create a Link and click the Multiple Connection item 3 Define the Link s main source on the Source column 239 Links Rectanglel properties Panel DrawRect E3 Item Position Links Properties Link Source 9 E Data DemoTag1 Value E BackgroundColor aP BackgroundStyle in Max Source BorderColor 50 Data DemoTag1 Value aP BorderStyle 100 Data IntemalTag1 Value 9 BorderWidth 9 Count 9 Efect3D_X V Keep all active associations 9 Effect3D_Y Effect3DColorBase
196. e uses the separator configured in Windows based on the user configuration not the system configuration The first row in the file must contain a header with column names Each column must be a property or an identifier defined in the template as seen next Objects must be placed on rows and property values on the corresponding columns Not all object properties should be listed on the header nor should all columns be 43 E3 Studio necessarily linked to properties of a given object Itis also important that the CSV file have a column for the Name property Without it itis not possible to determine where exactly the object must be generated Names display the object s correct hierarchy and names with special characters must be surrounded by brackets Next there is an example of a CSV file which can be manually created in Excel 1 Open Excel and set the header with the following fields one for each column according to the following figure x HI gt Bookl Microsoft Excel X Home Insert Page Layout Formulas Data Review View Team a 2 o P X ay y Calibri 9 General A a Insert x ay Fw R BZU AK hy 3 Delete E A Paste a Styles ER Sort amp Find amp GF zas oo 328 Format 27 Filter Select Clipboard Font z Alignment Py Number z Cells Editing Al M fe ObjectType u B c D E F G H ales KE lObjectType Name Scan EnableScar AllowRead AllowWrite DeviceLow DeviceHigh EU EU
197. e violates both horizontal and diagonal bands or if there has been a quality change that is this device has been turned on or off BackSlope A violates BackSlope B violates BoxCar C will be stored Value BoxCar Last value stored Time Example of a BoxCar BackSlope algorithm This verification however only occurs for analog fields For digital and text fields it is only necessary a simple change in value or in quality such as a loss of communication to store them 15 2 2 Internal Query Tools A Query tool provides an easy way to perform queries in Storage data When users start configuring a Query in an application that has a Storage this object is added to the list of available Databases for queries This is because 345 Storage Storage acts as a new data provider making it easy for users to search for data on temporal tables However users can also perform queries directly on the original Database according to table formats previously mentioned The disadvantage of this procedure is that this query process is more complex Therefore once a Storage is selected as a data provider for a Query its configuration interface presents several differences as seen on the next figure The first oneis that instead of displaying all tables there is a tree with all stored variables Another difference is that users can select from seven different functions for data consolidation LastValue Returns the last stored
198. eX s hidden properties are not copied Properties Opens an object s Properties List window When this option is selected on a menu the first tab to be opened is object s settings tab For further information on this option please check each object s espective chapter r Load All Objects Loads all objects from the selected group Close All Objects Closes all objects from the selected group Save All Objects Saves all objects from the selected group Domain omeen a a new lib file and adds itto a Domain Register loaded libraries Registers all libraries Open All Files Traverses all prj and lib files ina Domain If a closed file is found itis then opened Ifa file is protected by an edition password this password is then asked E3 Studio tries to use the same password for all protected files If this password fails for any of these files itis then asked Close All Files Closes all prj and lib files in a Domain If any file has unsaved changes E3 Studio then displays a message asking users whether they want to save them Edit Domain activation order Allows changing the activation order of Server objects in a Domain please check the next figure 41 E3 Studio Domain Activation Order oo Move objects up and down in tree in order to change activation order Objects on top will be activated ealier when Domain runs Domain s Activation Order 2 6 Import and Export The import tool in E3 reads informati
199. ecifies Axis value format which can be either automatic or customizable This field is equivalent to Axis Format property For more information about formats please check topic Value Format Click Apply to view changes applied to this window and click OK to save them 19 1 3 Pens Tab The Pen Collection object represents a set of Pens on an E3Chart Each Pen is configured to display real time or historical data froma Query On Pens tab users can add and remove Pens from the Pen Collection as well as configure their main properties individually or through Pen s multiple selection 395 E3Chart E3Chartl properties E3Chart E Item Position General Axis Pens Legend Queries Font Links x ae Vertical Axis Link Horizontal Axis Link Data DemoTag1 Value HOA Pens tab The available options are described on the next table Available options for Pens tab DESCRIPTION Adds a Pen Displays a menu to select the type of Pen to create Realtime Historic or Realtime amp Historic Removes the selected Pens Opens the selected Pen s property window this operation is only allowed if only one Pen is selected Moves the selected Pen one position up this operation is only allowed if only one Pen is selected Moves the selected Pen one position down this operation is only allowed if only one Pen is selected The list of E3Chart Pens allows copying and pasting Pens on the
200. ecify a Data Server where events are stored If Data Server s name is informed incorrectly all events are stored on E3 Server s event queue in memory until a valid Data Server be indicated Domains 108 OPTION OE DESCRIPTION Table name Indicates a table where events are stored This table is created automatically by E3Run with the following fields E3TimeStamp Date Time The E3TimeStamp field is configured by E3Run and contains the date and time when E3Run sent that event to the Database EventTime Date Time The EventTime field contains the date and time this event happened current server s Hot or Standby date and time when this event was created or else the dtTimeStamp parameter specified by the Application TrackEvent method EventMessage String event message maximum of 200 characters EventComment String comment about this event maximum of 200 characters Check below the events to be logged Lists all available events in an application for storage If E3Run must choose among several Data Servers usually the first one to be activated during Domain execution is the chosen one If during Domain execution users disable the project containing the Data Server used to store events E3Run automatically picks up another Data Server available in the application and uses this one until the previous Data Server be re activated This implies in the possibility of some events being stored in one Data Server w
201. ect e 2 ignorealways Always ignores the object being imported e 3 createalways Always creates a new object auto incrementing its name In case this variable is not defined the askalways value is then applied This option is not used in the exp Defines what to do when a pre existing Link is imported Possible values for this variable are e 0 askalways Always asks what to do e 1 changealways Always replaces the existing Link bya new one e 2 ignorealways Always ignores the Link being imported In case this variable is not defined the askalways value is then applied This option is not used in the export process nor does it have the createalways value If used itis always changed to askalways Defines what to do when a pre existing collection is being imported Possible values for this variable are e 0 askalways Always asks what to do e 1 changealways Always replaces the existing collection bya new one e 2 ignorealways Always ignores the collection being imported In case this variable is not defined the askalways value is then applied This option is not used in the export process nor does it have the createalways value If used itis always changed to askalways 50 SECTION DESCRIPTION itemduplicated Defines what to do when a pre existing collection item is being imported Possible values for this variable are e 0 askalways Always asks what to do e 1 changealways Always changes all pro
202. ects Save All Objects Inserting a Report 2 If needed configure this object s properties Reports 464 22 1 Query Object This object allows specifying database information to view on it After creating a Report ina project it then creates a Query object For more information about this object please check the Query chapter 22 2 Components A Report contains several Sections Each Report Section contains a group of controls that are processed and printed at the same time as a single unit Report Header Page Header Group Header Detail Group Footer Page Footer Report Footer Report Sections A Report defines Section types which are explained on the next topics 22 2 1 Header A Report may have a Report Header section that is printed at Report s beginning It is generally used to print report titles sum tables charts and any other information required to appear only once at Report s beginning NOTE A Report Header can extend for multiple pages To do so insert a Page Break object in its content 465 Reports 22 2 2 Footer A Report Footer Section prints at Report s end It is used to print a report sum grand totals or any other information that needs to be printed only once at Report s end 22 2 3 Page Header A Page Header Section prints only once at the top of each Report s page It is the first Section printed on a page except when this page contains a Report Header Section It is used
203. ects relative to a Screen or to other objects The available options are described on the next table Alignment options for Screen objects OPTION DESCRIPTION g Align Left Aligns two or more objects to one another having the left coordinate of the last selected objectasa reference Align Right Aligns two or more objects to one another having the right coordinate of the last selected objectas a reference Align Top Aligns two or more objects to one another having the top coordinate of the last selected objectasa reference Align Bottom Aligns two or more objects to one another having the bottom coordinate of the last selected objectas a reference Align Horizontal Center Aligns two or more objects horizontally to one another having the last selected objectas a reference Align Vertical Center Aligns two or more objects vertically to one another having the last selected object as a reference Applies the width of the last selected object to the other selected objects Same Height Applies the height of the last selected object to the other selected objects 209 Screens and Screen Objects DESCRIPTION Applies the size of the last selected object to the other selected objects Centers the object on the Screen according to its horizontal coordinates Centers the object on the Screen according to its vertical coordinates Applies the same horizontal distance among three or more objects Applies the sa
204. ed B in Maintenance mode or disabled To open this item right click the E3 Admin icon on Windows Notification Area select Domain Options and then the Servers tab The window on the next figure is then displayed E3 Admin Domain Configuration Ea Options Security Viewer groups Events recording Projects Servers Remote Domains Properties mame Severom H Main Backup a Network address packup Examples PCNAME Note Do not use IP address PCNAME Root folder for Domain files Leave it blank use DOM file s folder Use the following local folder ooo __ Remove Maintenance mode disabled Servers tab The available options on this tab are described on the next table Domains 116 Available options for Servers tab OPTION DESCRIPTION Name List with all servers available Add and Remove By using this option users can add or remove servers To add a network server click Add and specify the Server Name and Network Address fields To add a local server specify the Use the following local folder option To remove a project select it and click Remove Server name Determines the server s name This is a user defined name Network address Inform this server s name on the network This must be a machine s name with or without double backslashes at the beginning for example server or server Root folder for Domain files Indicates a folder where Domain files prj lib etc
205. ed to have only folders on a file without children This file may have rows such as these ones ObjectType Name IOFolder Folder1 Blank rows rows where no valid identifier is found blank columns and columns with invalid property names are ignored without generating an error 2 6 3 Templates Templates are INI files used to configure both import and export tools They inform for example which type of separator is used in a CSV file whether object Links should be exported etc INI files have the following format e Rows starting with a semicolon are comments and are not considered when interpreting a file 47 E3 Studio e This file is organized in sections and each section contains one or more variables Sections are identified by names inside brackets Variables are all words before an equal sign Asection cannot contain two variables with the same name Blank rows areignored An example of an INI file is displayed next 3 First section SECTION1 Var1 Var2 1 3 Second section SECTION2 Var1 TRUE Var3 FALSE This format is a text that can be easily altered by users and they can generate a new template by using a regular text editor The same template can be used both for importing and exporting objects E3 templates allow users to redefine values for columns ina CSV file as well as for object types In addition they also allow users to group more than one property in the same column This is all performed
206. eded NOTE Driver objects I O Driver I O Folder I O Tag I O Block I O Block Element OPC Driver OPC Tag Group OPC Folder OPC Tag OPC Block and OPC Block Element can be configured to work as Alarm Areas 4 1 I O Driver An I O Driver is an E3 module that communicates with a certain device by using dll files These Drivers are developed either by Elipse Software or by third parties using a DDK Driver Development Kit supplied by Elipse Software using the C C programming language Each Driver implements a different family of devices or protocols according to the type of device or communication protocol New Drivers are constantly developed by Elipse Software To insert an I O Driver in a project right click project s name in Explorer and select the Insert I O Driver in option In Domain mode right click the Server objects Drivers and OPC item select the Insert I O Driver in option and then a project s name Drivers 136 UJ Data Insert OPC Client Driver in gt A Aam jaa Insert OPC UA Driverin gt _ lt New File 4 Find Replace Object Counting i Document Scripts a Check Edit links Load All Objects Close All Objects g Save All Objects a Inserting an I O Driver in Domain mode 4 1 1 Configuration To determine an I O Driver to use click the DriverLocation property or right click a Driver and select the Browse DLL option A dialog box for selecting a dll
207. efined settings in pixels Monitor resolution in dots per inch DPI Allows users to choose from the current computer s resolution ora user defined resolution in dots perinch DPI Viewer 196 6 1 3 Communication Errors On Viewer users can view Tag communication errors when they are linked to Displays or Setpoints This is possible by configuring information on the Communication errors tab available in Viewer Properties Viewer properties Panel Viewer E3 Item E3 Viewer Settings Communication errors Links You can view tag comunication errors when they are linked to displays or setpoints V View communication errors Text 2 Font color E Yellow M Background color ij Red X Communication errors tab The available options for this tab are Available options for Communication errors tab communication errors Setpoint in case of a bad value quality Eont color Contains the color for the text Background color Color for the Setpoint It is equivalent to change the Setpoint s ForegroundColor property but this change is not performed effectively The Setpoint s property value is not changed 6 2 Variables in Viewer In a Viewer object users can create Links to objects from Screens as well as use them via scripts Users can also insert Counter Demo Internal and Timer Tags in 197 Viewer Viewer in addition to Viewer Folders and Queries By using the AppBrowser users can
208. efreshTime property 19 1 2 Axis Tab The Axis Collection object represents a set of Axes on an E3Chart Axes are scales outlining an E3Chart grid On Axis tab users can add and remove Axes from its Axis Collection as well as configure their properties individually E3Chart 390 Item Position General Axis Pens Legend Queries Font Links Axes HorizontalAxis ka Axis tab Whenever users create an E3Chart two main Axes are automatically created Horizontal Axis and Vertical Axis These are default Axes and they cannot be removed When clicking Add a new Axis is created on a chart and a setup window is opened to configure this Axis properties This window contains two tabs General and Scale and it can also be opened by clicking Configure The General tab contains information that identifies this Axis in an application 391 E3Chart Pees at the bottom Do not mirror E Bleck Display text in axis color E siver Tick spacing 0 second s MV Automatic Number of subticks no subticks v General tab Each field on the General tab has an equivalent property or method The available options are described on the next table Available options for General tab OPTION DESCRIPTION Determines Axis name This field is equivalent to Axis Name property E3Chart 392 OPTION DESCRIPTION Determines Axis position on a chart To the left or To
209. elong Click Add to add that group which then appears on the list Belongs to To remove a group select it from the list Belongs to and then click Remove 23 2 Groups The Groups tab allows configuring information about groups Each group defines a certain number of features which are shared by all its members A group can also belong to other groups It is not allowed however belonging to a group that already belongs to it that is creating a circular reference To use this feature click the File Users menu and then select the Groups tab Security 494 5 User Permissions x Permissions Users Groups Group Edt Remove Groups Please choose what groups this group belongs to Available groups Belong to Groups tab The available options are described on the next table Available options for Groups tab Name Indicates the currentgroup New Creates a newgroup O Edit Edits properties of the selected group Remove Removes the selected group Available groups Shows all available groups in an application Belongs to Shows all groups to which the selected group belongs 495 Security OPTION DESCRIPTION Adds groups from the list Available groups to the list Belongs to Remove Removes groups from the list Belongs to When clicking New or Edit the dialog box on the next figure is then displayed Add group x Group Group name Security policy for this user group V Us
210. em on Start screen on Windows 8 and Windows 8 1 On Windows 10 right click the Start menu and select the Control Panel item 2 Click Add or remove programs on Windows Server 2003 SP2 and Windows XP SP3 or click Programs and Features on Windows Vista SP2 Windows 7 SP1 Windows 8 Windows 8 1 and Windows 10 3 Click Add or remove Windows component on Windows Server 2003 SP2 and Windows XP SP3 or click Turn Windows features on or off on Windows Vista SP2 Windows 7 SP1 Windows 8 Windows 8 1 and Windows 10 515 E3 Viewer and E3 WebViewer Turn Windows features on or off To turn a feature on select its check box To turn a feature off clear its check box A filled box means that only part of the feature is turned on M Games Indexing Service _ Internet Explorer 9 db Internet Information Services d FTP Server db Web Management Tools a World Wide Web Services d Internet Information Services Hostable Web Core J Media Features Microsoft NET Framework 3 5 1 db Microsoft Message Queue MSMQ Server I Print and Document Services a Internet Information Services 4 On Windows Server 2003 SP2 and Windows XP SP3 select the Internet Information Services item on the list and click Next 5 On Windows Vista SP2 Windows 7 SP1 Windows 8 Windows 8 1 and Windows 10 locate the Internet Information Services item on the
211. emoTag2 Data DemoTag3 Search is displayed in TagXValue and TagYValue fields E3Chart NOTE For more information on XTagValue and YTagValue columns please check topic Legend Tab 19 3 4 Interval Search Option When this mode is on two cursors are displayed to define statistical calculation interval Cursor values are displayed on BeginX BeginY EndX and EndY columns To change a cursor position left click it and then drag it to the desired position 0 04 14 40 04 14 50 04 15 00 04 15 10 04 15 20 Y tag name Data DemoTagl Data DemoTag2 Data DemoTag3 Interval search 19 3 5 Legend Status Column The Legend Status column displays the current status of every Pen The content of that messageis formed by an error information if available and information about the current status of a Pen such as the number of points The next two tables show all possible error and information messages for Realtime and Historic Pens If a Pen is both Realtime and Historic then the final message is a combination of Realtime and Historical parts In case there are error messages the column s rowis displayed in red while that error persists Status messages for the real time part Error Real time data disconnected There is no connection from Pen s real YLink Tag Name XLink Tag Name time part Check Tag names in Pen s YLink and XLink properties E3Chart 420 Info Real time n pts Dis
212. enerated x om Available macros for the current event Macros always have the format MACRO The following macros can be used e Inserts a percent sign in the message USER Inserts the name of the user generating this event or Anonymous Domains 110 if there is no user logged in e MACHINE Inserts the name of the machine where this event was generated e SESSION Inserts the name of the program where the user was logged in Viewer Studio or E3 Server e CAUSE Additional information about this event For example if a Login Failure event message is changed to SUSER user login has failed at computer MACHINE using a SESSION CAUSE If the Admin user mistype the password while logging to Viewer which is running on the machine CLIENTO04 the following event is then generated Admin user login has failed at computer CLIENT 4 using a Viewer login or password incorrect Default system events are explained on the next sections 3 9 4 1 User Login User USER has logged in SESSION in machine MACHINE Generated whenever a successful user login occurs either on E3 Studio or on Viewer where e USER contais the user s login name SESSION contains Viewer or Studio e MACHINE contains the name of the computer where this user is logged in 3 9 4 2 User Logout User USER has finished their session of SESSION in machine MACHINE Generated whenever a user logout o
213. epresented on Template s view by the letter D and the values configured in that field 21 3 Units The second tab on Formula s view is called Units Units define Tags linked to Formula Templates It is possible to create several Units that is several Tag groups that can receive Formula values Formulai x d4 p Name Uniti Unit2 J F Template2 Template3 M 4 gt gt Templates Units 4 Values 4 Scripts Units tab The available options are displayed on the next table Available options for Units tab OPTION DESCRIPTION Name SSSSSS i pees Template s name lunit specifies a Tag to link to this Unit This view s toolbar has the following options Add F to create a new Unit Remove X to delete the selected Unit and Rename to rename the selected Unit For each new Unit a new name is required Formulas 456 Add Unit x New name Adding a Unit 21 4 Value Sets The third tab on Formula s view is called Values Value Sets are values transferred to Tags thatis to Units Formulai x 4 gt Name Valuel Value2 Template E Template2 Template3 M 4 gt gt Templates A Units Values 4 Scripts Values tab The available options are described on the next table Available options for Values tab OPTION DESCRIPTION Name Deetermines Template s name value i aststi SSS Determines field values for Valu
214. er and Frames 6 0 Screens B E InitialScreen H 4 E3Browser1 id 1 Query in an E3Browser object A Query presents a friendly interface allowing users to build queries in a graphical form and an immediate display of the generated SQL code The Query tab shows all available fields in a Query Such fields can be accessed by clicking Configure which opens a Query settings wizard E3Browser 380 Item Position Query style Options Color Font Links Record fields Fields Format Width Color Background oE 90 60 0 0 0255 255 1 Field1_Quality 90 20 0 0 o 255 255 25 V Field2 90 20 0 0 o 255 255 25 H Field2_Quality 90 20 0 0 0 255 255 258 Field3 90 20 0 0 o 255 255 25 H Field3_Quality 90 20 0 0 o 255 255 25 H Field4 90 0 00 o 255 255 25 V Field4_Quality 90 0 00 o 255 255 25 Query tab For more information on Queries please check the Query chapter 18 2 Other Settings All available settings in an E3Browser are described on the next topics 18 2 1 Style Tab By using the Style tab users can define the appearance of cell divisions grid and dimensions of rows and columns 381 E3Browser E3Browserl properties E3Browser 3 Item Position Query Style Options Color Font Links Grid style m pm a OE EOE cm g Rows and column sizing Header height 20 Row height 20 First column width
215. er cannot change their password V Password expires after jo V Password musthave atleast 0 V Password must have letters and numbers V Password must have at least fo V Password must have at least fo V Password must have uppercase and lowercase letters V Password checking is not case sensitive not recommended Lo caret Add group window The available options are described on the next table Available options for Add Group window Groupname Establishes a group s name User cannot change its password Users cannot change their passwords onlyan administrator can perform this task Password expires after days Establishes a password s expiring date Password must have at least characters Establishes a minimum number of characters for this password Security 496 OPTION DESCRIPTION have letters and numbers numbers for this password for this password Password must have uppercase and Establishes that this password must lowercase letters have uppercase and lowercase letters Password checking is not case sensitive Enables a password validation regardless of letters being uppercase or lowercase This option is not recommended When clicking Remove an application shows a dialog box asking to confirm whether users really want to remove that group Groups can also belong to other groups and they can share the same configurations To do so the list Available groups displays all group
216. er groups Add Remove Adds or removes Viewer groups group s names Domains 104 OPTION DESCRIPTION Specifies which IPs belong to a group and thus share the same connection limits When a Viewer tries to connect to an E3 Server its IP address is compared to existent groups After a group to which it belongs is determined a license restriction configured to that group is applied to this Viewer Adds edits or removes IP numbers When a group is created it has no specified IP except for the first group which is always and cannot be created bya user In case users try to save these settings and a group has an empty IP list the application then displays a warning message Incase a itis useless Allow Viewer Full connections When selected it allows Viewer Full type connections for this group Limit simultaneous license use When selected it limits using simultaneous Viewer Full type licenses down to a certain number If previous option is selected but this one is not selected using simultaneous licenses is unlimited Allow Viewer Only connections When selected it allows Viewer Only type connections forthis group Limit simultaneous license use When selected it limits using simultaneous Viewer Only type licenses down to a certain number If previous option is selected but this one is not selected using simultaneous licenses is unlimited Users must notice that these group limits are applied afte
217. er on a Legend This field is equivalent to Legend s ShowHeader property Display text in pen s color Determines if Legend s text coloris the same as Pen s color This field is equivalent to Legend s EnableTextColor property Fields on the Available columns list are described on the next table Available options for column identification 1 This value can be used directly on Legend s InsertColumn Col parameter Item and RemoveColumn methods OPTION VALUE NAME DESCRIPTION AverageY AverageY Shows Pen s average value in this interval E initial position BeginY 17 YBegin Shows an interpolated point where initial cursor meets a Pen DiffX Shows the difference between initial and final cursors DiffY DiffY Shows the difference between initial and final interpolated points on the Y Axis Shows cursor s final position EndY YEnd Shows the interpolated point where final cursor meets a Pen E3Chart 410 C omon vau name _ DESCRIPTION _ MaximumY MaxY Shows Pen s this interval MinimumY 11 MinY Shows Pen s this interval Pencolor 6 Coor Shows Pen s color Description T the textin Pen s DocString Pen name 0 name Shows Pen s name status Pen description ep o engineering unit associated to an X Axis COPARE o on X Axis E ee associated to a Pen Y tag name TagY Shows Tag s name Axis C on Y Axis S A associated to a Pen When clicking Properties a dialog box is
218. ere this text is double click the results list on the selected row The following table contains all main search options as well as limitations for main data types E3 Studio 26 Main search options DATA TYPE EXAMPLE NOTES Date Time 02 10 2010 Finds in Date Time type 00 00 10 properties If onlya date is specified finds all occurrences of that date regardless of time If onlya time is specified finds all occurrences of that time regardless of date Milliseconds are ignored during this search Integer 0 Finds in all number 100 properties Searching for 10 finds 10 and 10 0 but does not find 10 1 or 100 Floating Point 10 0 Finds in all Floating Point 40 5 type number properties Searching for 10 1 does not find 10 integer Windows regional settings are considered to validate a decimal symbol of a number Color Finds only in Color type properties Users must use commas to separate values which must comply with the RGB system Boolean True Considers Windows False language to process this search as a search for Boolean values Test Finds entire or partial Tag Strings according to search type entire word or not Any data type can be found on String type properties 2 4 3 Domain s Object Counting Domain s Object Counting tool allows viewing the amount of existing objects in a Domain separated by classes sorted alphabetically or grouped by modules This counting can also be performed contextu
219. ery close values to be discarded by an application 4 1 2 2 1 Recording Events to a Historic The most common usage for Tags reported by events is to store returned events to a Historic object To do so follow these steps 1 Create a Historic object with its scan time disabled its ScanTime property set to zero and no dead band its DeadBand property set to zero 2 Link TimeStamp properties and values of a Tag to this Historic Other properties can be linked too in case itis important to store them 3 Use Historic s WriteRecord method on Tag s OnRead event This procedure ensures that every received value reported by event is stored sequentially on a linked Historic 4 1 2 3 Pool of IOServer Processes In applications with hundreds of Drivers all resources needed to run OServer processes for each Driver may consume operating system s capacity In these cases it may be necessary to enable a Pool of lOServer Processes on Properties tab of a Domain configuration When this Pool is enabled each OServer process can execute more than one Driver then saving operating system s resources and thus allowing an application to run thousands of Drivers 143 Drivers Only Drivers supporting the creation of new dynamic instances Drivers compiled with IOKit version 2 0 6 or later can be used in this Pool If a Driver without support is added to this Pool it is not executed it fails For these cases configure lODriver s DisablelOSe
220. es a column blinking effect Format for Severity field High Severity e High o Low Severity de tow Format for Active Condition Need Ack Acknowledged and Enabled Fields DATA FORMAT FORMATTED OUTPUT OK Not OK False OK Not OK false PARA INO fue res E3Alarm 326 To remove any unwanted field select it and click Remove 14 1 4 Sorting Tab On Sorting tab users can configure default alarm s sort order When using more than one sort field subsequent fields allow a sort order among alarms whose value is the same for the previous field s E3Alarm1 properties E3Alarm E3 Item Position Connections Filters Columns Sorting Colors Font _4 gt Sort alarms V By field DateTime in v Descending Then by Descending E Descending E Descending Sorting Tab Each field on the Sorting tab has a corresponding property The available properties are described on the next table Available options for Sorting tab OPTION DESCRIPTION By field Sorts alarms according to a specified field This field is equivalent to the PrimarySortField property Then by Sorts alarms starting atthe item specified in the By field option The next item is then sorted as specified in the Then by fields These fields are equivalent to the SecondarySortField ThirdSortField and FourthSortField properties respectively 327 E3Alarm OPTION DESCRIPTION Ascending Sorts alarm f
221. ese values can Formulas 460 be loaded and users can select any option To do so create the following script in this button Sub CommandButton1_Click Application LoadFormulaDlg _ Formulai Machine1 Machine2 _ Model1 Model2 Model3 Model4 End Sub Where Formula1 is Formula s name and LoadFormulaDlg is a Viewer method When running this method the following dialog box is displayed Load Values x Silent mode operator cannot override values Set of values Unit to be loaded to be loaded with values destination Modelt Model2 Engine2 Model3 i Model4 LoadFormulaDlg method s dialog box 10 On the window to the right there are two Units created in this Formula as well as Value Sets The Silent Mode option prevents users from overriding values saved on disk which are loaded to Tags 11 Using this button users can check the application working with Formulas and Tags receiving values from disk This is one method for loading values froma Formula but there are also methods in which users do not need to select values or Units in a dialog box 12 Create a SetPoint on this Screen and a button with OK as its caption Along with this SetPoint place a Label with Model as its caption Then create this script Sub CommandButton2_Click Application LoadFormulaValues_ Formulai Engine1 Model1 Screen Item Text16 Value 461 Formulas End Sub Where Text16 is the name of th
222. ess from a list of pre defined widths ranging from 0 to 2 5 millimeters Fill Style Allows choosing the fill style displayed by the Screen or Screen object that is the type of combination between foreground and background colors When selecting this option the window displayed on the next figure is then opened 221 Screens and Screen Objects Fill my Fil E E EE O stem EM a ae ECET pee MEE Opaque Transparent Lok Canc Aer Fill effects The available options for this window are Available options for Fill window OPTION O DESCRIPTION ae all possible fill styles available for the selected object Foreground color Shows the previously selected foreground color It also allows selecting a new color same action as clicking g Background color Shows the previously selected background color Italso allows selecting a new color A same action as clicking ad Shows how the chosen effect will be applied to the object s background and foreground colors Screens and Screen Objects 222 OPTION DESCRIPTION Opaque or Transparent When selecting the Transparent option the gradient styles with hatching effects will not display the object s background color onlyits foreground color thus creating a transparent effect in the object By selecting the Opaque option this effect does not happen NOTE The Transparent option is disabled for Screens
223. etween points Value used for scan ms Show bad quality points Maximum interval to connect historic to real time data s Highlight line when MaxGapTime is being used Color of the line with MaxGapTime Style of the line with MaxGapTime The Statistical Data tab enables statistical E3Chart Defines the way points between historical and real time parts are connected This field is equivalent to Pen s DigitalData property Available options are Digital where drawing is always based on horizontal and vertical straight lines only and Analog where drawing tries to bind each chart point into a straight line Defines the expected reading time of a real time Pen s Tag If this value is equal to 0 zero E3Chart draws only points actually received from a source Tag For values different from 0 zero E3Chart can create virtual points while not receiving a value from a source and the scan time is exceeded This field is equivalent to Pen s ScanValue property Defines whether bad quality points are displayed This field is equivalent to Pen s ShowBadPoints property Specifies a limit time to consider fora visual connection between historical and real time parts of a Realtime amp Historic Pen This field is equivalent to Pen s MaxGapTime property Highlights a connection line between historical and real time parts This field is equivalent to Pen s HighlightMaxGapTime property Specifies a color fora connection line
224. evel No 4 08 01 2013 01 25 22 PM DemoTag2 Area Returns 2 Level No 408 01 2013 01 25 22 PM DemoTagl Area Returns 1 Level No Sorting example On the previous figure alarms are first sorted by DateTime in in descending order and then by Area also in descending order 14 2 4 Status of Connections Starting on version 4 7 E3Alarm allows viewing the status of connections configured on Connections tab To enable the status bar configure E3Alarm s ShowConnectionStatusBar property on Properties List The next figure displays the status bar enabled E3Alarm 334 Ac Source Domain Severi Source name Source name full Active Conditio o Local Low AnalogAlarm Data DemoTag1 Yes AANo REMOTE Low AnalogAlarm Data DemoTagl Yes 4 mW b AlarmConnection3 Connected E3Alarm s status bar for connections The following E3Alarm properties can be configured to control the behavior of this status bar e ShowConnectionStatusBar Displays or hides the status bar e ConnectionStatusBarColor Specifies a background color for the status bar e PictureConnected Path to an image file with an icon representing a successful connection Default for E3Alarm is displaying the icon e PictureNotConnected Path to an image file with an icon representing a failed connection Default for E3Alarm is displaying the icon PictureUnknown Path to an image file with an icon representing an unknown connection Default for E3Alar
225. even indefinitely To use this resource follow this procedure 1 267 Right click a Data Server and select the Insert Panel Counter Tag option Data Server H A Settings Standard A Analog Alarm AB Dead band Alarm Ag Digital Alarm A Discrete Alarm AR Rate of Change Alarm gt a Data Folder v Demo Tag amp Internal Tag Timer Tag a Objects Library G View E a Server objects lj Drivers and OPC E i Data objects i A Aare T Ea Rename Edit X Delete A Find Replace Object Counting WH Import W Export E Document Scripts M Check Edit links Copy Links Show in Editor E Show in Explorer oP Properties Inserting a Counter Tag 2 The system opens up a window asking the number of Tags to create in the Server as well as their names This name will be auto incremented if this option remains blank Tags will be created with a default name Adding Counter Tags Data Server 268 Some Counter Tag properties can be configured using the Properties List without creating scripts for this To configure any property just locate it on the Properties List and perform the necessary adjustments 11 3 Demo Tag A Demo Tag is an object that generates values according to a wave shape and it is used to simulate values It allows generating defined waves or random values To use this resource follow these procedures 1 Right cl
226. ewer s InitialScreen selecting one of its options itis possible to configure how Viewer will be initialized This field is equivalent to the Viewer s InitialScreen property and itis represented by the specifications after the character For example if the zoom on initial Screen is 100 then the InitialScreen property displays InitialScreen 100 where InitialScreen is the Screen s name and 10 is its zoom percentage Enable scrollbar in Initial Screen Enables a scroll baron the initial Screen Show Zoom menu when right clicking Enables the display of the Zoom menu when right clicking the Screen at run time This field is equivalent to the Viewer s EnableZoomMenu property Keep Screens loaded on memory Enables Viewer to keep the loaded Screens in memory This field is equivalent to the Viewer s CacheEnable Check for inactivity after minutes wait fora mouse or keyboard event for the inactivity period This field is equivalent to the Viewer s Enablelnactivity property Number of retries when entering user name Establishes the number of times the login and password dialog box will be displayed in addition to the first time This field is equivalent to the Viewer s LoginRetries property 193 Viewer 6 1 2 Settings Using the Settings tab users can configure Viewer s window title and resolution Item 3 Viewer Settings Communication errors Links Viewer s window Start maximized Start minimized
227. example DECLARE MyDate FLOAT SET MyDate dbo E3GETFLOATVALUE 10 10 2005 12 00 00 EXECUTE E3NCompData STO22 MyDate Data Demomag1li 20 AE 2r Storage 350 15 2 4 5 E3CompData Equivalent to the CompressedDataStartEndTime function Formal description is E3CompData strTableName VARCHAR 1 dStartData float dEndData float strFieldName VARCHAR 1 strFilter VARCHAR 5 strOrder VARCHAR 1 type Int bQuality int Where e dStartData Start date in Float format e dEndData Final date in Float format e strOrder Sorts this query by a field other than TimeStamp This function returns the number of rows found within this interval with the E3TimeStamp Quality and FieldValue fields Usage example DECLARE MyStartDate FLOAT DECLARE MyEndDate FLOAT SET MyStartDate dbo E3GETFLOATVALUE 10 10 2005 12 00 00 SET MyEndDate dbo E3GETFLOATVALUE 10 10 2006 12 00 00 EXECUTE E3CompData STO22 MyStartDate MyEndDate Data DemoTag1 2 15 2 4 6 E3SampledData Equivalent to the SampledData function Formal description is E3SampledData strTableName VARCHAR 1 iModMin inte dStartDate float dEndDate float strFields VARCHAR 1000 strWhere VARCHAR 4000 type ints bQuality int Where e iModMin Interval in seconds to interpolate each value within this interval e dStartData Start date in Float format 351 Storage e dEndData End date
228. exes on relevant columns is the best way to improve table performance The maximum amount of indexes per table and the index s largest size is defined by the Database Server s storage device Users can create indexes on multiple columns A multi column index can be considered an ordered array with values created by concatenating values from indexed columns Indexes can be configured by clicking which opens a configuration window according to the next figure 357 Historic 5 Index Editor m Define the indexes for this historic table Existing indexes Add E3lndex E3TimeStamp ASC Field ASC Edit Remove Ul OK Cancel Index Editor window The available options on this window are described on the next table Available options for Index Editor window OPTION DESCRIPTION Name Displays the name of an existing index Displays the field to which this index is linked on a table Add SSS dOpers a dialog box to add a new index Opens a dialog box to edit the selected index Remove Removes the selected index When clicking Add the dialog box on the next figure is then opened Historic 358 Add Index tS Index Definition Index name The index fields contain unique data Select the fields used in this index Field Name Order Type _ C E3TimeStamp 0 Ascending 3 fdDate Time O Field 0 Ascending 1 fdinteger Change field order Cance
229. fter inserted on a Report this object is named as Shape 22 3 6 4 Ellipse An Ellipse object allows users to draw circles and ellipses by using all of its width or height and by defining the center of a circle in the center of a rectangle N ae 477 Reports After inserted on a Report this object is named as Shape 22 3 6 5 Picture A Picture object allows users to display images stored in files whether these files are external files or application s resource files Picture After inserted on a Report this object is named as Image 22 3 6 6 Text A Text object enables creating a text When defining its area on a Report users can type the desired text directly which also accepts multiple lines Labell 5 7 a a a 5 a Label After inserted on a Report this object is named as Label 22 3 6 7 SetPoint A SetPoint object is used to insert data froma Databaseina Report This data is indicated using the DataField property Field1 5 ji fal ial a a a SetPoint After inserted on a Report this object is named as Field Reports 478 22 3 6 7 1 Usage Example The following example shows the daily average of a query field in the Report For that follow these procedures 1 Insert a new GroupHeader Footer in the report 2 Configure the GroupHeader s DataField property to Day E3TimeStamp This specifies that the average calculation will be performed in a daily basis 3 Insert a SetPoint in the Grou
230. g servers In addition paths are always hierarchical and only slash mark and period reference types are supported the lt browse name gt type is not supported 4 5 Quality Quality fields represent quality status of an item s value They are formed by a 16 bit word and the first eight bits are defined by three bit fields Quality Substatus and Limit The other eight bits of a higher order are available for each manufacturer s usage If these bits are used default quality bits are still used to indicate which deductions could be made on returned data So it is client s responsibility to interpret specific information field on quality to ensure that a server providing this information uses the same rules as a client Available options on Quality field QUALITY QUALITY FIELD DESCRIPTION This value cannot be used Bad for the reasons indicated in the Substatus field Drivers 178 QUALITY QUALITY FIELD DESCRIPTION 64 127 This value s qualityis Uncertain uncertain forthe reasons indicated in the Substatus field 128 191 Reserved Not used by the OPC standard 192 255 Good CSC C C Cd Vaalue s quality is good A server that does not support information on quality always returns 192 Good It is also acceptable that a server simply returns O or 192 Bad or Good and always returns O zero for Substatus and Limit 4 5 1 Substatus Field This field s layout depends on Quality field Substatus for
231. g1 Value Data DemoTag1 Value Editing properties of the selected Link To edit user event properties it is necessary to select a row containing the event and on Connection column click the Edit option IV Show links properties window OnEvent WhileEvent OnValueChangeEvent Edit Editing user event properties When clicking the Edit option the dialog box on the next figure is displayed thus allowing to edit the selected user event 243 Links Edit events Event x Property or expression Screen 1 Rectangle 1 Angle is Event Triggering C Whenever the property expression is true E 1000 Whenever the property expression changes its value Treat disconnection as value change o ce Edit events window The available options on this window are described on the next table Available options for Edit Events window OPTION DESCRIPTION event Ee E ei whether this is an etOnEvent or an etWhileEvent type Repeat event Indicates the cycle for event repetition in milliseconds thatis its periodicity while an expression generating it remains true Repeat every ms Value fora repetition interval in milliseconds Whenever the property expression changes Indicates that this eventis an its value etOnValueChangeEvent type that is this event occurs whenever the expression that generates it changes its value Treat disconnection as value change If there is a disc
232. ge only real time data and queries to the database using a TCP IP message system with high performance 5 Introduction when compared to Terminal Services depending on the application This is possible because while E3 Viewer receives and sends only real time values and data a Terminal Services client sends keyboard and mouse messages and receives images generating a higher information traffic A Viewer connected to an isolated Domain can get information residing only on the active server according to user access permissions 1 5 Limitations of Demonstration Mode Without a license E3 can be executed in Demonstration or Demo mode which is useful for software evaluation In this case the following limitations apply e Allows saving projects with up to 20 I O Tags e Does not allow working with servers in Hot Standby mode e Does not allow working with Remote Domains e Only allows communicating with one Level O zero I O Driver without Tag limitations Drivers with level greater than O zero are not allowed e Does not allow access to Domain configurations the E3 Admin s Domain Options contextual menu on Windows Notification Area e Only the first image of each category in the Symbols Gallery is available e Only allows opening one Viewer or WebViewer e The maximum execution time of a Domain is two hours e Only allows recording up to 20 I O Tags on a Storage object e Allows access as an OPC Server e Allows executing a playba
233. gt 2013 02 1 Ruim 0 2013 02 14 13 25 47 ul Dados Saneamento ETA ani histSane OK lt Null gt 2013 02 1 Ruim 0 2013 02 14 13 25 47 histSane OK lt Null gt 2013 02 1 Ruim 0 2013 02 14 13 25 47 gt alt Dados Saneamento ETA ani Playback screen in Online mode 20 3 User Interface E3Playback s user interface is divided into six parts Toolbar Timeline Bookmarks e Screen Area Event List Tag List 20 3 1 Toolbar Playback toolbar gathers all main commands to operate an E3Playback 4 b m lt lt lt o gt o gt 1x loal 8 a Playback toolbar 429 E3Playback This toolbar contains the options described on the next table Available options for Playback Toolbar ICON COMMAND ACTION Play backward Starts playing data at the current playback time moving the clock back according to the Starts playing data at the current playback time moving the clock forward according to the current playback peed Interrupts playback data Tags and alarms are removed from Screens and no new queryis performed on its database Slows down playback speed in half Minimum value is 1 1024x that is moves forward approximately one millisecond of data at every second 40 gt Normal Speed Sets playback speed to its normal value 1x e gt Doubles playback speed Maximum value is 1024x thatis at every second playback clock moves forward 1024 seconds approximately 17 playb
234. h licenses from the previous device and then performs the following adjustments e If new licenses are exactly the same in terms of limitations to the previous device they are applied immediately e If new licenses are less limited than the ones in the previous device they are also applied immediately e f new licenses are more limited than the ones in the previous device E3 83 Domains Server waits for one minute so that the previous device be reconnected By the end of this period of time if these licenses remain restrictive the server is then restarted and the new licenses are applied NOTE For more information about licensing on E3 please contact Elipse Software s sales department 3 2 E3Run E3Run is the process responsible for executing server objects Tags Alarms Databases Historic objects etc thatis all objects except Screens and Viewer E3Run execution is represented by an icon on Windows Notification Area described on the next table Available options for icons on Windows Notification Area rr is loaded and running C a aca not running Yellow straight line spinning Displayed when a Domain is starting or stopping This situation occurs in cases when a Domain takes too long to start as a standby indication Yellow bars Displayed when a Domain is in standby mode E3Run always runs as a Service be it registered as a service or with the regserver parameter This process uses the REC pr
235. h a protection device 2 1 Starting a Project When E3 Studio starts it opens a dialog box with some options for a project according to the next figure E3 Studio Start E3 Studio A Y C Start E3 Studio EEE m Create a new Domain P Open an existing Domain Cancel Start E3 Studio window The available options on this dialog box are described on the next table Available options for Start E3 Studio window OPTION DESCRIPTION Start E3 Studio No Domain is opened ee ci ie ane new Domain Open an existing Domain When clicking Other Files users can locate a Domain on a specific folder or select it on the list of the last edited applications 2 2 Working Area E3 Studio comes with a series of configured menus and toolbars which are shown when executing it for the first time When using a more modern graphical interface similar to programs such as Microsoft Office users can modify these menus and toolbars When there is no open application a screen displays less enabled options on menu bar and on toolbar but its layout remains the same The next figure shows E3 Studio s appearance after creating a new project 9 E3 Studio e E3 Studio scrBiodiesel File Visualize Objects Arrange Tools Window Help Dae ied ib A Ga ie ace Rae oa hlC24 1 00934 2 L tp 3 D a 5 Ie Sl ght Pare vet 1 x Domain Demo a E Settings rE Objects Library B m View i Viewer and Frames 5
236. h the necessary Screen size to be displayed in the chosen Splitter with no need for scroll bars If any of these values is negative this would mean that the Splitter is not visible atrun time according to the Viewer s configuration and the size of other Splitters E3 Studio has an editor for the objects that can be inserted on a Screen The following objects are available Line Rectangle Round Rectangle Ellipse Arc Freehand Polygon Curved Polygon Figure Text Display SetPoint Scale and MSForms MSForms will be discussed in the next chapter ActiveX All other objects are presented in this chapter 201 Screens and Screen Objects e e Objects furange Too Window Heb l LOB AA sae Mia 2 eS Oke FO ENE EEE DIC E4IN MTESA z 2A BLU els cal iit al BD cile Dahi MONETA S E i Settings Objects Liray B View S W Viewerand Frames Screens InitialScreen aP FilSyie O 11 bkBackg Foregr O 00 0 E P Grade O O leftToRight gt Se ea Retums sets the screen background Se ea M4 For Help press F1 SS 13547 291 w 0 0 EE 14737 9948 Screen Users can configure Screen properties to determine size color and other behavior and appearance aspects in addition to many types of events This object s standard measurement and coordinate system use HIMETRIC units given as 1 100 mm and notin pixels All Screen propertie
237. he angle 4 Theinitial style of the objectis a pie To change it to an arc or cord go to the ArcStyle property on Properties List 7 2 7 Freehand It allows freehand drawings To use this object follow these procedures 1 Select the Freehand on Screen toolbar 2 Click the Screen to establish the object s initial vertex and then drag the mouse in any direction as many times as necessary to complete the drawing 7 2 8 Polygon It allows drawing straight sized polygons To use this object follow these procedures 1 Select the Polygon on Screen toolbar 2 Click the Screen to establish the object s initial vertex and then drag the mouse in any direction as many times as necessary to complete the drawing 3 If users want to change the drawing direction just click it To finish the drawing just double click it 7 2 9 Curved Polygon It allows drawing curved sized polygons To use this object follow these procedures Screens and Screen Objects 206 1 Select the Curved Polygon on Screen toolbar 2 Click the Screen to establish the object s initial vertex and then drag the mouse in any direction as many times as necessary to complete the drawing 3 If users want to change the drawing direction just click it To finish the drawing just double click it 7 2 10 Picture This object allows displaying pictures stored in files which may or may not belong to an application A Picture can be freely resized but
238. he right Fey d d gt Remove Properties vr Columns tab The Available Fields list displays all Alarm Source fields By clicking Add users can add each field individually to this E3Alarm By clicking Properties users can configure properties of this alarm field Width pixels _ Format T Rename to Acked Allow acknowledgement never default This column never blinks ox oe Column properties The available options on this window are described on the next table 325 E3Alarm Available options for Column Properties window width of E3Alarm s columns is 80 pixels Specifies a format used by this E3Alarm s column E3 s default format is used here please check topic Value Format except for Severity Active Condition Need Ack Acknowledged and Enabled fields whose format examples can be seen on the next tables ename to Renames this column s title Allow acknowledgement Configures alarm acknowledgment when users click a configured column s row The available options are e Never This alarm is not acknowledged default On click This alarm is acknowledged when users click a configured column s row On double click This alarm is acknowledged when users double click a configured column s row NOTE If this alarm can be acknowledged ltr mouse pointer then changes to Jat run time whenever itis overan unacknowledged alarm row This column never blinks Enables ordisabl
239. hereas other events being stored in another Data Server when there is more than one Data Server ina project that is why it is recommended that a specific Data Server be indicated when there is more than one Data Server in a project When an event is selected on the list and the F2 key is then pressed a dialog box for editing that event is opened The window on the next figure is then displayed 109 Domains User uli has logged in Viewer in machine WIN LS84KBFLRAG Click in button to add one of the following macros in your message AUSER login that generated the event MACHINE computer where the event was generated SESSION program name where the user was logged in i e Viewer CAUSE reason why the event was generated Event editor Deselect the Use default message option to change event s message Click Eho inserta macro inside the current message Only macros allowed for that event are displayed I Use default message Message User USER has logged in SESSION in machine MACHINE Lesl HUSER Sample HSESSION MACHINE User julio has logged in Viewer in machine WIN LS84K8FLRAG Click in button to add one of the following macros in your message AUSER login that generated the event MACHINE computer where the event was generated SESSION program name where the user was logged in i e Viewer CAUSE reason why the event was g
240. his value has stopped doing so The returned value must be considered as old Notice that this differs from a Bad value with Substatus 5 last known value That status is associated specifically with a detectable communicati on error on a 070 retrieved value This erroris associated with a failure of some external source that would insert something into this value within an acceptable period of time Notice that this value s age can be determined 72 79 LIMIT Noumit Low HIGH CONSTANT 182 SUBSTATUS DESCRIPTION PMT Noumit Low HIGH CONSTANT Sensor Not Either this Accurate value has been stuck at one of sensor s limits in which case the Limit field should be set to 1or 2 or this sensoris otherwise known to be out of calibration via some internal diagnosis in which case the Limit field must be Engineering The returned Units value is Exceeded outside the limits defined for this parameter Notice thatin this case the Limits field indicates which limit has been exceeded but does not necessarily imply that this value cannot move outside the 983 00 0 0 Driers SUBSTATUS DESCRIPTION LIMIT Noumit Low HIGH CONSTANT This value is derived from multiple sources and there is a smaller number of good E a NOTE Servers that do not support Substatus must return 0 zero Substatus for GOOD Quality SUBSTATUS DESCRIPTION L
241. his Alarm Server is not specified in the E3Alarm or itis not correct For an E3Alarm to capture and display active Alarms users must configure the name of an Alarm Server to access To do so change the value of Alarm Server column of the desired Connection on Connections tab of E3Alarm s properties window or use the Properties List and select the AlarmServer property How can I delete Tags linked to Alarms and Areas on an Alarm Configuration object e To delete a Tag linked to an Alarm Select this Tag with the mouse and press the DELETE key To delete an Alarm Select this Alarm with the mouse and press the DELETE key To delete an Area Select this Area and press the DELETE key 529 Frequently Asked Questions How to display High Medium and Low messages in an Alarm s Severity field instead of values 0 1 and 2 in a SQL query The SQL syntax for every database supported by E3 is the following e Access SELECT InTime OutTime Message FormattedValue IIF Severity 0 High IIF Severity 1 Medium Low AS Severity FROM Alarms e SQL Server SELECT InTime OutTime Message FormattedValue Severity CASE Severity WHEN THEN High WHEN 1 THEN Medium WHEN 2 THEN Low END FROM Alarms e Oracle SELECT InTime OutTime Message FormattedValue DECODE Severity High 1 Medium 2 Low Severity FROM Alarms 27 9 E3Alarm Alarms do not display in an E3Alarm Why is t
242. his happening POSSIBLE CAUSES To check an E3Alarm configuration verify if the server name is correctly configured Another possibility is the existence of more than one Alarm Server in a Domain which can cause trouble Another error situation would be a filter configured for a non existent Alarm Area SOLUTION Make sure that there is only one Alarm Server in this Domain and that all Alarms are correctly configured Also check if this configured Area exists How can I create a filter for two or more Areas in an E3Alarm First group these Areas into a main Area Then use names with the same characters at the beginning Example ALM1MEC ALM1ELE ALM2 MEC ALM2ELE etc How do acknowledge Alarms with a double click Enable the Acknowledge Alarm option located in the properties of the desired column in an E3Alarm on Columns tab Frequently Asked Questions 530 27 10 E3Browser How to limit the number of records to display on an E3Browser This item can be configured in E3Browser s Query Enable the check box Return a maximum of records specifying the maximum number of records to return Another option is to optimize this Query by using filters to narrow the period of time the number of columns or records involved etc For this please check the chapter Query 27 11 E3Chart Is it possible not plotting a Tag value when its quality is bad in a historical E3Chart Yes By using scripts itis possible to configure an
243. hod allows that new query parameters are really used as a new query is executed by respecting these new values 17 3 Using Query Recordsets via Scripts Another interesting usage of Queries is to work with Recordsets After executing a Query itis possible to capture the corresponding Recordset and then work with records row by row run new queries etc In the following command line RS IniScreen E3Browser1 Query1 GetADORecordset The RS variable assumes all features of a Recordset The advantage of using this feature is that if database properties change it is not necessary to adjust every script that uses this database 377 Query CHAPTER E3Browser An E3Browser is an ActiveX control used for viewing data stored on a Database Users can configure queries using several data type filters and assign colors for each column among other settings This object is used to view historical data alarms or any existing table on a Database E3TimeSta Quality FieldValue 192 0 E 41330 5309 0 0 41330 5309 192 0 5333 41330 5309 192 1 23661861 41330 5309 192 258561733 41330 5309 192 4 35561889 41330 5309 192 5 30842632 413305309 192 723828384 41330 5309 192 8 18596416 41330 5309 192 933717242 DO a oad of 18971 E3Browser To use this feature follow these procedures 1 Insertan E3Browser in the project by right clicking the working area an
244. hows menu and toolbar options available in E3 Studio menu or toolbar option e Toolbars tab By using this tab users can configure edit or create new toolbars 11 E3 Studio Customize xe Commands Toolbars Menus Appearance Options er Toolbars Alignment lt K K K K K K Toolbars tab The available options on this tab are described on the next table Available options for Toolbars tab Rese o fesores a toolbar New o reaesanewtoolbar Rename Changes toolbar s name Used only for toolbars created by clicking New Delete Removes the selected toolbar Show legends Shows captions on the options of the selected toolbar e Menus tab Configures E3 menus E3 Studio 12 Customize Sa Commands Toolbars Menus Appearance Options Main menu Show menus for Predefined menu Application s predefined menu tt is displayed when there is no open document Menu Animation None V Shadded menus Menus tab The available options on this tab are described on the next table Available options for Menus tab OPTION DESCRIPTION Show menus for Displays application s pre defined menu This option has no effect and itis kept in E3 for compatibility reasons Resets the menu defined in the previous option This option has no effect and it is keptin E3 for compatibility reasons Menu Animation Selects the type of animation used
245. ht Aligns text to the right 2 4 1 Check Domain Checks for errors in the whole Domain such as objects with the same name illegal Links etc In case any error is found E3 Studio opens the following dialog box with all errors found in a Domain Problem 1 of 2 E3 Vieweri Error Duplicated viewer Details Active Domain has already a Viewer object in project C Example project1 prj Itis allowed only one Viewer object per Domain You must remove one of Viewer objects xs Next Error check in a project Until this error is solved this dialog box remains on screen and it is not possible to execute Viewer After solving this problem E3 Studio shows a message box indicating that there are no errors in this Domain and Viewer execution is then allowed E3 Studio 24 0 No errors found in the Domain Message of item Check Domain The Check Domain option can be accessed in the following ways e By using the B icon available on Default toolbar Checks for errors in the whole Domain e By using the Tools Check Domain menu Same as the previous item e By right clicking a project item and selecting Check or Check project Checks for errors only in the selected object and its child objects 2 4 2 Find and Replace The Find tool searches for instances of a given textin a Domain fully or partially By the end of this search users are presented to a list of results indicating the object where th
246. ic Find and Replace in this chapter Object Counting Displays the amount of existing objects in a Domain or in the selected object This option is not available for Settings Server objects Files and Remote Domains items Import Export Helps users to import and export objects Links and collections For further information on this option please check topic Import Export in this chapter Document Scripts Helps users with application s scripts documentation For further information on this option please check topic Scripts Documentation in this chapter Checks for errors in an application For further information on this option please check topic Check Domain in this chapter E3 Studio 40 OPTION DESCRIPTION Edit Links Changes one or more Links user events and Link type properties in an application quicker than using the Properties List window For further information on this option please check the Links chapter Copy Paste Links Copies or pastes Links from one object to another The second option is only displayed if what was copied to the Clipboard is a Link If the selected property already has a Link itis then displayed a message asking whether this Link should be overwritten If Links copied to the Clipboard are pasted into an object that does not have one of these properties they are listed in a message box informing this problem The existing properties have their Links created correctly Links from Elips
247. ich can be used in project files 3 8 Creating a Domain There are two ways to create a Domain in E3 e Via File New Domain menu To do so itis necessary that at least one project or library is opened When users select this option E3 then opens a dialog box to choose the new Domain s path and name 87 Domains Save in J Example me e A pe Name saa Date modified Type P r Projectl dom 2 20 2013 5 27PM DOMFile Desktop a i 1 P ie m r Flom fowdm O Saveastype E3 Doman Fie aom Canca Creating a new Domain Next users must decide whether they want to include open projects or libraries into this new Domain Do you want to add the open projects to the new Domain ve Confirming project or library insertion into a new Domain e Via E3 Application Wizard which allows creating a new Domain with a project prj or library lib file as seen in the next section 3 8 1 Application Wizard The E3 Application Wizard is a tool to create a new Domain with a project or a library This option can be opened using the following ways Domains 88 e By clicking New Llon Default toolbar e By selecting the File New Project menu Once the Wizard starts its initial screen is then opened To proceed click Next Welcome to the E3 Application Wizard This Wizard will help you create a new E3 application To proceed dick Next z B
248. ick a Data Server and select the Insert Panel Demo Tag option E I Domain Project1 E Settings 2 34 Objects Library View l y Server objects ly Drivers and OPC c i Data objects ae fj Databas i A rms Insert gt l fi ra gt S ry Alarm b E E Explorer R Panel 4 mo Counter Tag Close ca Standard gt a Data Folder A Analog Alarm RA DemoTag X Delete AB Dead band Alarm Internal Tag i k Digital Alarm Timer Tag A Find Replace 2 A Discrete Alarm Object Counting AB Rate of Change Alarm H Import W Export W Document Scripts Check e Edit links Copy Links E Show in Editor E Show in Explorer oS Properties Inserting a Demo Tag 2 The system opens up a window asking the number of Tags to create in the Server as well as their names This name will be auto incremented if this option remains blank Tags will be created with a default name 269 Data Server f Adding DemoTag Quantity Adding Demo Tags Some Demo Tag properties can be configured using the Properties List without creating scripts for this To configure any property just locate it on the Properties List and perform the necessary adjustments 11 4 Internal Tag An Internal Tag is a general purpose object used to store values of any type including numbers texts and even other objects To use this object follow these procedures 1 Right click
249. ics 19 3 1 Mouse Pointer Options When clicking a chart s legend users can resize its columns To do so select a column and drag it 19 3 2 Contextual Menu Options When right clicking an E3Chart a contextual menu is then displayed Zoom box Drag Move horizontally vV Search Interval Search Zoom out Zoom in Fit All Fit vertically Fit horizontally Fit pen gt E3Chart s contextual menu options at run time The available options are described on the next table E3Chart 418 Available options for E3Chart s contextual menu at run time OPTION DESCRIPTION Sets mouse in Zoom mode by selected area This option is available in XY numerical scale and fixed scale charts Sets mouse in Drag mode Move horizontall Sets mouse in Horizontal Drag mode only Sets mouse in Value Search mode in Pen s data nterval Search Enables Interval Search mode Decreases zoom for the whole Axis Increases zoom for the whole Axis Fits the selected Pen on both Axes Fit vertically Fits the selected Pen on vertical Axis onl Fit horizontally Fits the selected Pen on horizontal Axis only Fits the selected Pen orall existing Pens 19 3 3 Search Option This option allows searching Pen s point values These values are displayed ona legend using XTagValue and YTagValue columns 419 100 50 E ee ie oe a ee 04 14 00 04 14 10 04 14 20 04 14 30 04 14 40 Y tag name Data DemoTagl1 Data D
250. idirectional properties e AnalogBind Analog Links e AnimationBind Digital Links e TableBind Table Links Link properties or fields are imported or exported in the same way as object properties each one with a column ina CSV file All Links have the Source and Property properties in addition to these ones the properties for each Link are e AgSimple Reverse Bidirectional e AnalogBind SrcHiValue SrcLoValue DstHiValue DstLoValue e AnimationBind BlinkOn BlinkOff OnValue OffValue BlinkOnValue BlinkOffValue Table rows are created according to a user defined index If this index is nota number an error message is then displayed invalid name If this index does not exist for example there are only two rows ina table and users want to insert a row numbered as five the remaining rows are created with default values All Links are imported or exported regardless of user selected properties If a Link to a given property already exists users are prompted about what to do Otherwise they are created 71 E3 Studio Import EE There is already a link with Value property in the following object Driver 1 Taq1 Do you want to ignore this link or overwrite existing link Apply to all links Ignore Overwrite Cancel Importing a pre existing Link In an object s name users must inform its complete path in the format Object Links Name For example Links indicates it is a Link Value is the proper
251. ields in ascending order These fields are equivalent to the PrimarySortAscending SecondarySortAscending ThirdSortAscending and FourthSortAscending properties set to Descending Sorts alarm fields in descending order These fields are equivalent to the PrimarySortAscending SecondarySortAscending ThirdSortAscending and FourthSortAscending properties set to False respectively 14 1 5 Colors Tab On Colors tab users can define colors for acknowledging alarms on this object Users can configure colors for each alarm type or by severity Item Position Connections Filters Columns Sorting Colors Font gt Configure alarm colors Active Alarm Acked Alarm Not Acked Alarm Active Event Colors tab E3Alarm 328 Click El to select a color for the selected alarm type The window on the next table is then displayed f Dasan Colors x warani CES Text color Hl Red v Don t blink C Blink background and text Blink text only Lx cot Selected alarm colors The available options on this window are described on the next table Available options on Colors window OPTION DESCRIPTION Background color Specifies this alarm s background color Text color Specifies this alarm s text color ee ae e sl cia blink Blink background and text When selected text and background colors alternate Blink text only When selected text color alternates between selected text and backgrou
252. ies Panel DrawRect E Item Position Links Properties Link Source A 9 w Data DemoTag1 Value E i BackgroundColor aP BackgroundStyle BorderColor aP BorderStyle 9 BorderWidth 9 Count A DocString aP Hfect3D 9 Effect3D_X 9 Effect3D_Y i Effect3DColorBas Table Link The available options for this Link are described on the next table 237 Links Available options for a Table Link OPTION DESCRIPTION inserts a new row on the table ieee the selected row from the table in cc the minimum value on the source fora table row the maximum value on the source fora table row Value Specifies the value on the property to be assumed when the source is inside the interval specified on the table row Determines that when the source is inside the interval for this table row the property then alternates periodically between the values specified by the Value and Value lt Blink Enabled gt fields Value lt Blink Enabled gt Specifies the alternative value of the property to be assumed when the source is inside the interval specified on table row that is when the Blink field is enabled To use this resource follow these procedures 1 On the Links tab select the property and link it to the Table Connection option 2 Create the rows on the table and configure the Min Max and Value fields 3 To alternate periodically between values enable the Blink field and then configure th
253. iewer Application object The fourth item is the Server It lists all server objects belonging to an application If this item is the current context it contains an Application indication The fifth item is called Tasks This is where the most common tasks to execute via scripts appear There are two Load report which AppBrowser s result is an expression to load a Report and Open screen whose result is an expression to open the selected Screen equivalent to the Open Screen Pick Finally the sixth item shows all VBScript functions available for scripts ding to the selected object the center panel shows its properties and methods 2 9 2 Acess via Link To access AppBrowser from a Link open the Properties Window select the Links tab the desired property and then click El on the right AppBrowser is then opened and objects are displayed according to the next figure 79 E3 Studio A The Caption property defines the Screen title to be displayed on the Viewer s title bar How do you evaluate information on this topic C C C Unsatisfactory Satisfactory Good sa Excellent Comments optional up to 150 characters AppBrowser via Links In this case only object properties are displayed on window s center panel Their methods are not displayed because they are not allowed in Links 2 9 3 Acess via Property Some properties allow using AppBrowser to help properly fill in the expected value These
254. ilable options are described on the next table Available options for Page Setup OPTION DESCRIPTION Top Margin pecifies page s top margin pecifies page s bottom margin S S i Gutter Specifies page margin Reports 472 OPTION DESCRIPTION Mirror Margins Enables ordisables page s mirror margin The Printer Settings option sets up specifications referring to Report s printing Report Settings l PaperSize Default Printer Preview Width 4 Height Orientation Printer Default cw Portrait Landscape Collate Printer Default z Duplex Printer Default x PaperBin Default Printer gt Cancel Report s Printer Settings The available options are described on the next table Available options for Printer Settings OPTION DESCRIPTION aper Size Specifies paper size Orientation Specifies paper orientation in a printer Printer Default Settings according to a default printer Portrait Vertical page layout or Landscape Horizontal page layout Sorts the printing process Duplicates the printing process Specifies settings and type of paper for the printing process The Grid Settings option specifies settings referring to Report s grids 473 Reports E Show Grid 7 Align Controls to Grid Grid columns 4 a Grid rows 4 a Ruler Units Inches Centimeters Report s Grid Settings The available option
255. in older versions of E3 and then open these files in new versions because there is no guarantee that file settings are not lost during this procedure 2 4 Toolbars E3 s Toolbar changes whether there is an open application or not Toolbar buttons allow users to perform certain tasks quickly without using menus This way users can create Screen Objects or open the Organizer simply by clicking a toolbar button The next table shows all available options for E3 Studio s several toolbars Available options for Default toolbar a T ee D e ee Removes selected information and transfers Copies selected information and transfers Shows or hides the Organizer Y Gallery Shows or hides the Shows an objecti in the Show in Editor object s view if itis selected in the Organizer Shows an objectin the Show in Organizer Organizer if itis selected in the object s view Organizer 19 E3 Studio ICON COMMAND ACTION Saves all projects and Saves and Runs the Domain libraries runs a Domain and then opens Viewer Runs or stops the current Domain m o RunorStopE3 Viewer Runs or stops E3 Viewer v Checks if a Domain found ina Domain ina Domain Searches forall Find and Replace occurrences of a given text in the whole Domain Displays a window with the amount of objects available ina Domain separated byclasses sorted alphabetically or grouped by modules documentation for scripts Shows project and li
256. in these operating systems Its graphical user interface can also run on Internet or intranet via Internet Explorer 1 Introduction Basic software functions are divided into independent modules which can process specific activities Information traffic management among all modules is coordinated by a main module E3 Admin using a technology based on distributed objects allowing components to run either on the same machine or on other computers Briefly E3 consists of a kernel responsible for binding and coordinating the work of several other modules which are also information servers From this point on the graphical user interfaces are generated which are available via either local or Internet clients E3 has four main programs described on the next topics 1 1 1 E3 Server This is the Application Server where main processes run including real time communication with control equipments The server is also responsible for sending data and Screens to clients connected anywhere on the network intranet and Internet The server can run many projects at the same time and exchange data with other E3 Servers to accomplish a fail over standby or to distribute processing loads among the machines 1 1 2 E3 Studio Unique configuration tool acting as a universal development platform with a modern and friendly environment including a full graphical and script VBScript editor This allows a project to be edited by many users at the
257. index fields contain unique data Ensures that values specified for this Primary Key index are unique This option is always selected for Primary Keys and it cannot be changed Field name _ Showsfield s name Order CS OWS the selected field s sort order Type Shows table s field type Change field order Changes field s sort order on this table by moving it up or down on this list By clicking OK users confirm the specified field as a primary key To cancel that configuration click Cancel Users can also assign an index to a table 16 1 2 Indexes An Index is a field or sets of fields previously sorted by a Database to improve the performance of queries that use this index They are used to quickly find records with a specific value on a column Without an index a Database must start on the first record and then read the full table until relevant records are found The larger the table the higher the cost of this operation If this table has an index for those columns a Database can quickly get a position to search for in a data file without scanning all records For example if a table has 1 000 records this is at least 100 times faster than reading all records sequentially Notice that if there is a need to access almost all 1 000 records itis faster to access them sequentially avoiding disk access The available types for indexes are Primary Unique and Index All column types on a table can be indexed Using ind
258. indow The available options on this window are described on the next table Available options for Properties window Oooo PTION CESCRIPTION selected filter starting at the root object object type in the previous option List all E3 object classes If selected the object s combo box shows all existing classes in E3 regardless of a filter or root object Properties Displays properties of the selected object Properties displayed in bold on this list were already added to the list that defines columns on the CSV file By double clicking a property users either add it or remove it from the list depending on whether it was on the list or not If a property was grouped with others a double click only removes this property from the group keeping the other properties correctly grouped 63 E3 Studio TextFont type properties contain internal properties that configure certain font features such as type and size They are exported with the main property s name according to the object followed by the name of the internal property separated by a period as in TextFont Bold for example In the template settings internal properties are displayed separately so that users can select them one by one Properties E3 Object dasses DrawString v fa V List all E3 object dasses Properties A Peale TextFont Size P TextFont Bold P TextFont ttalic P TextFont Underline 7 Double dick to add or remove a pro
259. ing a virtual floating keyboard in applications developed with E3 This control can be activated on Viewer by using Viewer s E3 Viewer tab ewer properties Panel Viewer E3 Item E3 Viewer Settings Communication errors Links Tite E3 Viewer Application Initial Screen or Frame InitialScreen E Zoom v V Enable scrollbar in Initial Screen V Show Zoom menu when right clicking V Keep Screens loaded on memory Inactivity time minutes 5 Number of retries for user password confirmation 2 KeyPad Show when a SetPoint gets focus Hide when pressing ENTER Hide when pressing ESC Viewer s E3 Viewer tab The available options on this tab are described on the next table Available options for Elipse KeyPad on E3 Viewer tab OPTION DESCRIPTION Show when a SetPoint gets focus This options always shows Elipse KeyPad when a SetPoint object receives focus ActiveX 264 Hide when pressing ENTER Enables hiding Elipse KeyPad when pressing the ENTER key This option is equivalent to control s AutoHideOnEnter property Enables hiding Elipse KeyPad when pressing the ESC key This option is equivalent to control s AutoHideOnEsc property Hide when pressing ESC In scripts KeyPad can be opened when using Application s GetKeyPad method For more information on the functionality of this object s properties please check the Scripts Reference Manual 265 ActiveX CHAPTER Data Server Data Se
260. ing the INSERT key in the keyboard or by clicking P and can be excluded by pressing the DELETE key or by clicking The available options of this item are described on the next table Available options for Properties tab OPTION DESCRIPTION Name o Specifies the XControl s variable name 251 Libraries OPTION DESCRIPTION Type Determines the data type supported by the variable Notice that other data objects XObjects may be declared as Types This way users can create a data object that has another data object as a property Data objects may work as a struct oras a class in this case as in the C C language When specifying an object type for example DemoTag OTag XObject etc this property has the following behavior e If the ElipseX is inactive This property works as a String which specifies the path of the object instance of the configured type If the ElipseX is active On writing this property works the same wayas the previous case However on reading this property returns the specified object in case it exists If the path does not point to an existing object at the time this perty returns Nothing Enables or disables the visibility of the variable outside the library that is determines whether the variable is public Lins whether the variable is saved in the project or not mente ot Regarding Kae retentive or not Regarding XControls properties cannot be retentive Value Specifies the initi
261. io indicates several types of Links 4 Inthe Source field select the Link and click El to indicate the property to refer or write down an expression in this field 8 2 Bi directional A Bi directional Link is similar to a Simple Link However if there is a variation in this property its value is copied to the source thus generating a bi directional Link 233 Links Source Data DemoTag1 Value 9 Efect3D_X 9 Efect3D_Y i Efect3DColorBase Bi directional Link To use this resource follow these procedures 1 2 3 Select the object for the Link Right click this object and select the Properties option Click the Links tab and select the property to perform the Link Studio indicates several types of Links In the Source field select the Link and click El to indicate the property to refer or write down an expression in this field 8 3 Digital With a Digital Link users can establish that if a variable or expression in the Source field represents a digital value Boolean its True or False status is mapped to certain values on the destination including the Blink option alternating values Links 234 Rectanglel properties Panel DrawRect 53 Item Position Links Blink To value ME 255 0 0 a iv Oo 255 255 E 0 0 255 mi v 0 255 255 9 Efect3D_X 9 Efect3D_Y i Effect3DColorBase Digital Link The available options for this Link are described on the ne
262. io was running 3 9 4 10 Domain Changed Domain has been changed by user USER in SESSION in machine MACHINE CAUSE Generated whenever a Domain file dom is modified where 113 USER contains the user s login name who changed this Domain SESSION contains Studio or E3 Server MACHINE contains the name of the computer where the command to change this Domain was generated CAUSE might be Domains Changes were applied to the computer editing this Domain e Project projectname was added enabled e Project projectname was added disabled e Project projectname was removed e Project projectname was disabled 3 9 4 11 Manual Server Switch Standby server activated by user USER in SESSION in machine MACHINE Generated whenever a Domain s backup server activation is forced via E3 Server s Server Activate menu where e USER contains the user s login name who activated the backup server or Anonymous if no authentication was requested when that server was activated e SESSION contains E3 Server menu on Windows Notification Area e MACHINE contains the name of the computer where the command to activate the backup server was generated 3 9 5 Projects Tab Users can add remove or edit projects prj files of a Domain To open this item right click the E3 Admin icon on Windows Notification Area select Domain Options and then Projects tab The window on the next figure is then di
263. ion LoadFormulaValues Formulai Engine1 Model3 Application LoadFormulaValues_ Formulai Enginei Model4 End If End Sub Where CheckBox1 is Check Box s name This uses the LoadFormulaValuesQuiet method if this object is enabled Otherwise the LoadFormulaValues method is used 4 Repeat the previous procedures from creating a SetPoint for items of Engine2 modifying required scripts After finishing these changes this Screen should look like the following figure 4 E3 Viewer Application Formulas ice f Engine 1 External Diameter Height Internal Diameter OK r Quiet Engine 2 External Diameter Height Internal Diameter OK M Quiet Load Values Final Screen for this Formula 5 Execute this application and check its results 463 Formulas CHAPTER Reports A Report is an ActiveX component named ActiveReport which allows viewing and printing instant values of system variables and data stored on a Database Alarms Historics Queries and Formulas This data can be printed either in text or graphical format and this later format is performed by using an E3Chart object To usea Report follow these procedures 1 Right click the Organizer and select the Insert Report in option aa Server ob GB projectl prj A Find Replace Object Counting G Document Scripts a Check lt New File gt Edit links Load All Objects Close All Obj
264. ion needs to store or retrieve data froma Database commands are sent in SQL Structured Query Language format A Query features a friendly interface that allows building queries in a graphical form and an immediate preview of the generated SQL code A Query allows showing data from the last N days hours or months final and initial date and queries The Query wizard is responsible for creating a text that builds a filter or query and users have no need to know details such as date etc To use this feature follow these procedures 1 Right click a project s Screen and select the Insert Standard Query option NOTE When creating a Report or an E3Browser object a Query object is automatically added to it However users can also insert this object on a Data Folder on a Screen on a Viewer or on a Viewer Folder For more details please check the corresponding chapters Before defining a Query it is necessary to inform a Database Server that this Query uses to retrieve data To do so select a server on the Database Server list box Define database server xa Please type your database server before creating your query Database server v Defining a Database Server A Query setup depends on the object to which itis linked Query 366 Fields Variables Visualize SQL Click in button to add tables in this query a mM Query Settings To check which are Query setup requirements please
265. irst and ing greater values first field is sorted value of the current field nN radars for this field a cE intervals When defining a filter the window on the next figure appears allowing to definea comparison type and a value to compare Filter Definition Only indude rows where E3TimeStamp E E equals to not equal to greater than greater than or equal to less than less than or equal to like not like Defining a filter A comparison data type can be defined when clicking the corresponding combo box and then selecting one of the types on the list box Query 372 er Only indude rows where FIC 101_Quality equals to 9 100 Or And jotenatio cM Nr And NULL z 9 v Boolean oO and Byte Integer Long Currency Single Double Date String Settings to define a filter Comparison values can be constants for example 123 45 ABCD etc or user defined variables To create a variable simply type a name between the following symbols e lt gt if this valueis a number e lt gt if this valueis a String e lt gt if this valueis a date The variable s value can be defined using the Variables tab or using the SetVariableValue method via Script 17 1 2 Variables Tab This tab allows defining default values for user defined variables These variables may also have their values changed at run time b
266. is change to appear If an object named Pump was created for example which has a property named Status which receives an external information disclosing whether this pump is turned on or off thus changing its color When inserting this object on a Screen E3 automatically renames this object to Pump1 Users can keep this name or rename it to another one Then users must inform which variable is linked to the Status property Suppose that a certain I O Tag represents the status of this pump Therefore a Link between the Status property and the referred Tag must be created The same procedure must be performed for other instances copies of the Pump object required in the project 9 2 2 XObjects In addition to XControls graphical objects users can create a data library called XObject With it users can define a data structure which is executed in the server Such structure can perform calculations links communications alarm acknowledgments historical recordings etc regardless of a graphical interface Viewer opened or in execution at that moment To create an XObject right click the Objects Library XObjects item in Domain mode select the Insert XObject in 253 Libraries option and then the name of the library Fk XObjecti x db X or EEN a S Property2 Variant a A Empty eS Property3 Variant a A Empty 4 4 gt gt Properties 4 Scripts XObjects When inserting an XObject the view of
267. is completed data is immediately added to its corresponding slice and E3Playback automatically triggers queries to update adjacent slices This way while playback clock is moving forward data queries are performed and when playback clock moves on to the next slice it is almost certain that it already contains all data loaded In case playback clock is in Play gt mode and between a slice without data or with incomplete data E3Playback remains temporarily paused waiting for queries of that slice to be completed E3Playback also tries to minimize database access getting information from Last Previous Event Next Event After Previous Summary and Next Summary fields to avoid querying this data again For example e Ifa query to a Tag did not return the next event after that query s period this means that this Tag does not have any event after that query s ending date and time and therefore this Tag does not need to be queried on the next time slices e Ifa query returned a previous summary alarm events on that period and the next summary for a slice itis possible to calculate the previous summary of the next slice simply by combining the previous summary and events occurred during the current slice This way there is no need to query a database for the previous summary of the next slice 20 5 Configuring E3 Database Objects This section explains how E3 objects must be configured so that data stored ona database can be used by an E3Pl
268. is field allows registering multiple network addresses The options for this field are the following e Separators allowed for each address are space comma semicolon tab and line break If atleast one of the addresses typed in this field returns success then the network is considered without failures Server names are case insensitive Repeated names are discarded Spaces before or after server names are trimmed Enables an automatic server switching when a local failure is reported in the main server Local failures are detected and reported byan application using the Application ReportF ailure method The server switching is only performed if the backup server has no failures Indicates an activation time for the backup server Default value is 15 seconds This time directly affects the ping timeout among servers If itis too low switches every 1 second ping timeout in 160 ms there may be spontaneous server switches caused by small network failures Presents the following pre activation profiles available Minimal Activates only basic services Maximum E3 activates all available services when in standby Links I O Drivers scripts and Databases Custom Users can define which services are needed Each option can be individually enabled or disabled 100 OPTION DESCRIPTION Pre activate the following services Allows users to select services to activate as long as the previous option was set to Custom
269. is list is empty E3 Studio 58 Settings Import Fitters Identifiers Properties Identifiers for object classes Identifiers tab The available options on this tab are described on the next table Available a for Identifiers tab DESCRIPTION anior os name Indicates the name of the selected class in this option 59 E3 Studio OPTION DESCRIPTION Allows users to change the value to use on the ObjectType column of the CSV file This column s initial value is always the object s class name For each changed value here an entry is generated on the INI file in Types section These values are not case sensitive thatis AAA aaa and aAa are the same value If users define the same value for more than one type only the first type is considered during the import process and an object may be created witha wrong type Booo Adds object classes x t CS OCCCCC Removes the selected object class Displays a window with a help text e Properties On this tab users can select which object properties they want to use on the import or export process This list s initial value is ObjectType and all other properties must be manually added E3 Studio 60 cot i Properties tab The available options on this tab are described on the next table 61 E3 Studio Available options for Properties tab OPTION DESCRIPTION Column name Allows users to change the
270. is object s properties functionality can be found on Scripts Reference Manual in its respective chapter 4 2 OPC Server In addition to an OPC client OPC Driver E3 also works as an OPC Server DA Data Access 2 0x This allows E3 to expose all existing objects in the executing Domain I O Tags for example to applications external to E3 Some examples are Elipse SCADA E3 which can be executing on another application as a client or an OPC client from another manufacturer as long as this client implements the OPC DA 2 0x standard or later NOTE E3 s OPC Server is an additional module since version 3 0 and it needs a specific license on a protection device Please contact Elipse Software for more information 4 2 1 Features To use E3 s OPC Server itis not necessary any extra configurations justruna Domain so that any OPC client can communicate with E3 To connect to an E3 s OPC Server from any client select the server identified as Elipse OPCSvr 1 An OPC Server allows any client to easily import all Tag definitions to a Domain the Browse function Of course the available Tags are just objects that are part of a server that is Screen items Viewer are not accessible using an OPC Server Because itis based on the same linking technology used by internal links among objects E3 s OPC Server allows clients to use Tags that are mathematical expressions and with transparent connection or disconnection during execution 4 2 2
271. is occurrence was found its location inside that object whether itis a property a Link etc and the text containing this occurrence The Replace tool replaces occurrences found by another specified text Find Replace Domain Project X Find what tag Replace with Replace al a je One by one Match case C all 7 Whole word Co enka ope Name itemalTagi VD Data DemoTag1 property Name DemoTag1 Find Replace window There are three ways to perform a find and replace operation e By selecting an itemin Organizer right clicking it and then selecting the Find Replace option This search is performed starting on this item following its hierarchy only child objects are searched 25 E3 Studio e By clicking E3 Studio s Tools Find Replace menu This search is performed on all open projects and libraries e By clicking Find Replace E on Default toolbar This search is performed on the entire Domain The available options are described on the next table Available options for Find Search tool OPTION DESCRIPTION Starts searching for this text results of the previous search written matching its case Finds entire words only Does not consider this text as a sub string of another one Contains a text to use as replacement the next valid row results list at once options Selects the previous occurrence on the results list NOTE To select an object and show the exact position wh
272. istoric table Generates the structure in the Database g Configures the indexes to create in the Historic Keeps a Historic object without a direct link to an existing table Retrieves fields from the original table Links the Historic object to an existing table 3 Open Historic s properties window To do so right click this object and select the Properties option Some of this object s properties can be configured by using the Properties List without creating scripts for this To configure any property locate it on the Properties List and perform the necessary adjustments More information about this object s properties functionality can be found on Scripts Reference Manual on the chapter referring to Historic object NOTE A Historic object can be configured to work as an Alarm Area Historic 354 16 1 Settings When inserting a Historic object in a project the E3TimeStamp field is automatically created in a table The E3TimeStamp field shows date and time in which this value was retrieved unlike a Tag s timestamp Remember that this is a read only field Users can link a Tag to an E3TimeStamp field If there is no Link it uses the system s current time for storage NOTE Using system s current time to store the E3TimeStamp field is only available when the table is created by the Historic In case of using an existing table users must link a Demo type Tag with its Type property configured as 3 Current Time so th
273. itter s property then gets the dockRemaining value which means it occupies the remaining space The Organizer s object icons identify the exact position of every Splitter Splitter positioning options parent Splitter LS ee This Splitteris above the parent Splitter parent Splitter OOOO a This Splitteris on the right of the parent Splitter dockRemaining This Splitter occupies the remaining space after positioning its sibling Splitter Every Splitter corresponds to a view of a Screen or Frame of a process or to a URL Universal Resource Locator To use this resource follow these procedures 1 Right click an open Frame and select one of the options Split Horizontally or Split Vertically according to Splitter s type 187 Frames Set as Secondary Splitter Select Screen or Frame Split Horizontally Split Vertically Delete Find Replace Object Counting Import Export Document Scripts Check SELE MB X Edit links Copy Links E Show in Organizer Show in Explorer oF Properties Inserting a Horizontal or Vertical Splitter 2 To remove a Splitter right click an open Frame and select the X Delete option 3 Users can invert a Splitter s original selection turn a Main Splitter into a Secondary Splitter and vice versa using the same menu In a Main Splitter right click a Frame and select the Set as Secondary Splitter option Ina Secondary Splitter select the Set as Main Splitter op
274. k m File name Save as type CSV Files CSV Exporting an object am Advanced Type CSV File CSV File CSV File CSV File CSV File CSV File CSV File CSV File CSV File During the export procedure all properties Links collections and collection items from the selected object and from its children are automatically exported A CSV file is then generated with one row for each exported object as well as for each Link collection or collection item available on these objects For each property a column is created on a file where it is informed the value of that property for each object The selected object called a root object is exported with the Name property s column blank For all other cases this column contains a hierarchy with names separated by dots An example of an export process starting at an ODriver object 45 E3 Studio Driver1 Block1 Elementi Hement2 Block2 Hement1 Tagil Hierarchy of object Driver1 ObjectType Name Prop1 Prop2 Prop3 IODriver 0 True IOBlock Block1 0 False 0 IOBlockElement Block1 Element1 0 False 0 IOBlockElement Block1 Element2 0 False 0 IOBlock Block2 0 False 0 IOBlockElement Block2 Element1 0 False 0 IOTag Tag1 0 True If needed users can configure object export using templates which are presented on topic Templates When using a template itis possible to configure whether Links collections and co
275. keys defined on a Historic object are replaced by data from the selected table When this itemis used two other options are enabled 27 Keep Historic unlinked to existing table and Get fields from original table When the 27 Keep Historic unlinked to existing table option is enabled Studio shows the message on the next figure Historic 364 Are you sure you want to turn this Historic into a user Historic You will lose all your field settings System message regarding Historic setup By clicking Cancel this table keeps its current configurations However by clicking OK this table is restarted with its initial fields in which thereis only a default field enabled E3TimeStamp histi x 4 gt E oS eS AS col oe E E3TimeStamp O 3 DateTime 0 4 m gt 4 gt gt Design A Scripts Historic object after enabling the Keep historic unlinked to existing table option The Get fields from original table option on the other hand recovers data froma Historic linked to an existing table which was removed Historic object using the Get fields from original table option 365 Historic CHAPTER Query A Query object helps in the process of defining Database queries of an application Every time an E3Browser or a Report object searches for data on a Database itis necessary to send a command to know which data is needed for that object Therefore every time an applicat
276. l Add Index window The available options on this window are described on the next table Available options for Add Index window OPTION DESCRIPTION Index name Specifies the index name for this index are unique must belong to this index Shows the selected field s sort order Ascending or Descending Type SSS dShows table s field type Change field order Changes field s sort order on this table by moving it up or down on this list By clicking OK table indexes are confirmed To cancel this configuration click Cancel 359 Historic 16 1 3 Table Settings After defining all previous options it is necessary to configure information for a Historic object s table and then generate this structure on a Database To do so right click a Historic object and select the Properties option Go to the Historic tab according to the next figure T E Histl properties DB Hist E3 Item Alarms Area Historic Links Database Server s aj Table Type database s table name use this name later in queries Table name Interval between records ms 1000 Discard Discard data from the main table 1 Month s r Discard from backup data older than 12 H Month s Database structure creation Click the button to create Historic tables Create Table Historic tab Each field on Historic tab has a corresponding property The available options on this tabe are described on the next t
277. l servers controlling application versions or else working with different software and hardware manufacturers E3 solves this problem byusing the concept of Domain which includes in one single environment the definition of the computers running real time tasks servers and the project databases that must be executed in these servers with the possibility of running many projects in each server Users can also add delete or modify projects at run time without affecting other parts of the running Domain Each project can contain any type of object such as Screens I O Drivers Alarms Historics Reports Formulas Databases among others When two or more projects are within the same Domain they can access properties and objects among themselves as they reside on a single database This is possible by using Links connections that an object can perform with any other If both objects exist and are running the connection is active and any value change is asynchronously sent among the objects depending on the connection type If one of the objects is destroyed or stopped the connection is broken then the application is notified about it and can then indicate that status in a user defined way The Domain structure is restricted to servers and similar such as server machines projects users and passwords The client interface for operation and visualization called E3 Viewer can connect to any E3 Server directly with proper Viewer licen
278. le Custom v Pre activate the following services I Links 10 drivers no communication I Scripts M Database ok Concet_ ay _ Options tab The available options on this tab are described on the next table 99 Available options for Options tab OPTION O DESCRIPTION Hot Standby Enables the Hot Standby mode If disabled a Domain is executed in the serverithas been loaded with no Hot Standby support If enabled users can selecta main server where a Domain executes and optionally a standby server Selects the name of the main server to run a Domain To register and configure servers go to the Servers tab Domains OPTION O DESCRIPTION Backup Server PING addresses to check network integrity Activate backup server on local failure Time to activate backup server Backup server pre activation profile Domains If enabled selects a backup server to run a Domain This server remains in standby with the application loaded in E3Run ready to be executed if the main server fails or if the backup serveris manually activated The Hot Standby algorithm demands a third network entity the other ones are the main and backup servers to determine whether a network is working If itis not possible to access neither the integrity address nor the backup server the main server assumes that the network interface has problems and immediately terminates the Domain execution Th
279. le Project 1 prj 1 09 Version Report The available options are described on the next table Available options for Version Report dialog box OPTION DESCRIPTION Project Library Name of an open project orlibraryina Domain Version Indicates a project or library version This version is generated internally by E3 and itis incremented every time a project is saved either manually or automatically In case of protected projects and libraries if this version cannot be saved itis not possible to increment it either However if users have permission to open and change a project or library this version is incremented normally Comment Shows a project related comment This comment can be edited via DocString property In case of libraries this field is blank NOTE These fields are strictly for viewing therefore their edition is not allowed 35 E3 Studio 2 4 6 WatchWindow WatchWindow tool allows viewing the current value of any property or Tag at run time in E3 Studio To use this tool click El on Default toolbar or go to the Tools WatchWindow menu to display the dialog box on the next figure W Data DemoTag1 Count DocString Enabled IsAlarmArea Maximum Minimum Name PathContainer PathName PathVolume Period Scan EA TimeStamp aP Type 9 Value 9 A L 9 9 A A A A 9 9 9 Count A DocString PF Enabled P IsAamArea SIVA Data DemoTag2 27 09 2013 09 05
280. lease check Driver s help or call Elipse Software s 141 Drivers technical support 4 1 2 2 Tags Reported by Events Tags reported by events can return more than one value at every reading or return no value atall Tags reported by events aim to read data on demand usually stored on Driver until read by a reading operation They are generally used for reading events mass memory data and unsolicited messages received froma device Driver s documentation must specify which Tags available to an application are reported by events The most common usage is to collect SOE Sequence of Events For example on devices that store really fast variation sequences of digital Tags in memory or that store telemetry data in memory tables this data can remain stored in those memory tables such as in the following figures Table with three events and six data fields For the first example one I O Tag is needed to read value A The Time field is returned in Tag s TimeStamp property For the second example on the other hand one I O Block Tag with six elements from A to F is needed with the Time field once again returned in Block s TimeStamp property In common Tags not reported by events a scan time can be configured which determines a period to read that Tag At every reading operation that Tag returns a value I O Tag a block of values I O Block Tag or returns an error To read all tables previously described in this case three
281. lick Apply to view changes applied to this window and click OK to save them The Scale tab defines Axis scale settings 393 E3Chart General Scale m Scale type Numeric scale Maximum 10 0 Minimum Show latest data Real time Time interval Historical data Select gt f Custom Ee Type to break line Scale tab Each field on this tab has an equivalent method or property The available options are described on the next table E3Chart 394 Available options for Scale tab OPTION O DESCRIPTION Numeric scale Establishes this Axis as a numerical scale This field is equivalent to Axis ScaleType property Configuration options for numerical scale are e Minimum Determines the minimum value of a scale This field is equivalent to Axis SetMinMax method e Maximum Determines the maximum value of a scale This field is equivalent to Axis SetMinMax method Show latest data Real time Shows a time interval to display on this Axis always relative to the current time This field is equivalent to Axis SetRealTimePeriod method Time interval Historical data Specifies a fixed time interval Configuration options are e From Initial timestamp for this interval e To Final timestamp for this interval e Select Select a time interval This field is equivalent to Axis SetHistoricPeriod method invert scale invers values on the selected scale Formatting Sp
282. list and click Eto expand all its sub items 6 Select at least the following options and click OK e Web Management Tools e IIS Management Console e IIS Management Scripts and Tools e IIS Management Service e World Wide Web Services e Application Development Features e ASP e ISAPI Extensions E3 Viewer and E3 WebViewer 516 e ISAPI Filters e Common Http Features e Static Content e Default Document e HTTP Redirection e Security e Basic Authentication e Request Filtering 7 WS then startits installation process to install it users must have an installation CD on Windows Server 2003 SP2 and Windows XP SP3 8 Wait for this process to finish to configure IIS After installing IIS e3web asp e3web2 asp docwrite asp docwrite2 asp and e3downloader cab files must be copied to C InetPub wwwroot This folder is created during IIS installation Apart from asp files E3 WebViewer installer e3webvi ewer x86 enu exe must be copied to this folder This installer is used when a client machine accesses a server for the first time in case E3 had not been previously installed on that machine This file can be downloaded from Elipse s website IIS still needs to be configured to work correctly Configuration is different in case IIS and E3 Server are on the same machine or on different machines To configure it please check the E3 Installation Guide chapter E3 WebViewer Installation 24 4 2 Viewing on Client Application If a
283. llection items are exported or not whether a root object is exported or not and which properties of each object must be exported among other configurations To do so follow these procedures 1 Right click an object and select Export 2 Click Advanced to configure or select a template 3 On the dialog box select a CSV file and then click Save To import objects follow these procedures 1 Right click an object and select Import 2 On the dialog box select a CSV file and then click Open E3 Studio 46 1 amp Importing 3 objects lt Look in J csv J e amp Ey A az Name Date modified Type Peas ee _ 1 csv 2 20 2013 4 35PM CSV ie 2 csv 2 20 2013 4 35PM CSV File _ 3 csv 2 20 2013 4 35PM CSV File Desktop _ 4 csv 2 20 2013 4 35PM CSV File _ 5 csv 2 20 2013 4 35PM CSV File _ 6 csv 2 20 2013 4 35 PM CSV File Libraries _ 7 csv 2 20 2013 4 35PM CSV File A _ 8 csv 2 20 2013 4 36PM CSV File er 19 csv 2 20 2013 4 36PM CSV File Computer A Network 4 m File name v Files of type CSV Files CSV v Cancel Template ot Advanced Importing objects When importing for each row read froma CSV file there is an identification of an object to create Only the child at the end of the hierarchy can be created The remaining path must already exist For example in an object Folder1 Folder2 Tag Tag only Tag can be created Folder1 and Folder2 must exist previously So itis allow
284. llow this procedure 1 Right click a project s name in Explorer and select the Insert Frame option In Domain mode right click the View Viewer and Frames item select the Insert Frame in option and then the project s name Organizer x Domain Project 1 E Settings H FE Objects Library View m mnan Screens Insert Viewer in gt CD Fevons EC EET CB Project Gi Resource G a Server objects 4 Find Replace lt New File gt Explorer Object Counting W Document Scripts A Check Edit links Load All Objects Close All Objects Save All Objects Inserting a Frame in Domain mode Frames have subdivisions called Splitters which can be inserted or removed froma Frame by right clicking its Design view Initially a Frame has one main Splitter which can be further subdivided either horizontally or vertically into two or more Splitters and so on For each new pair of Splitters created by the Split Horizontally and Split Vertically Frames 186 options there is always a Main Splitter and a Secondary Splitter Only a Main Splitter have values that explicitly define its position and a Secondary Splitter gets the remaining value So when a Splitter is subdivided horizontally its SplitDockPosition property gets the dockTop value Likewise if a subdivision is vertical this property gets the dockLeft value A Secondary Spl
285. llowRead property set to False or even with no value to be reported this row appears in gray When a Tag has communication errors its row turns into red and in case it has no problems its row turns into blue To interrupt this monitoring process right click an I O Driver again and select the Deactivate Driver option 4 1 2 How I O Drivers Work An lOServer is an E3 module responsible for communicating with a device Itis inside an OServer process that Driver s DLLis loaded and communication with that device is then performed Drivers 138 I O Tags enable users to read or write a set of values by using an I O Driver where they are inserted Users can also use I O Blocks to read more than one variable simultaneously To access each I O Block value use a Block Element which can be inserted in that object These objects are discussed in the next topics By default E3 creates an OServer for each I O Driver at run time Based on each Tag s scan time its Scan property a Driver periodically requests each Tag value Every time a Tag value or Tag quality is modified its value is then reported to an I O Driver Each variable s cycle time check is made sequentially In case some variable s cycle time expires an OServer then keeps asking for its value moving on to the next variable until the whole spreadsheet is complete and then it returns to the beginning for a new scan Users can reserve a smaller cycle time for variables that nee
286. local path of the DOM file for example c path file dom 3 9 8 Properties Tab Allows controlling various Domain configurations To open this item right click the E3 Admin icon on Windows Notification Area select the Domain Options option and click the Properties tab The window on the next figure is then displayed 119 Domains iv E3 Admin Domain Configuration x Options Security Viewer groups Events recording Projects Servers Remote Domains Properties 4 lOServer Processes Pool Pool Enabled False v Drivers per Process 0 Maximum Number of Processes 0 Pool Enabled Set this property to True to enable Pool of OServer processes You will also need to set the number of processes per driver and or the maximum number of processes PS Make sure these drivers support Process Pool Unsupported drivers must be configured with DisablelOServerPool True Properties tab The available options on this tab are described on the next table Available options on Properties tab OPTION DESCRIPTION Pool Enabled Enables or disables OServer s process pool NOTE Be sure that all Drivers in use in the application support this process pool feature Drivers must be compiled with IOKit version 2 0 6 or newer Drivers that do not support this feature must be configured with their DisablelOServerPool property in True Default value for this option is False Drivers per Process Defines the maximum nu
287. loro Dados Saneamento ETA anima Turbidez Dados Saneamento ETAxoBB01 StatusManut Display chart in Timeline Every Tag added to Timeline has an automatically defined color which can be changed by using the Change color option on the contextual menu This option opens the system s color dialog box allowing to select a new color or customize the selected color 20 3 3 Bookmarks Bookmarks are used to highlight occurrences on E3Playback s time line Bookmarks Available options for Bookmarks toolbar Adds a bookmark on the Adds a name to a selected timestamp bookmark on the time line atthe selected date and time Edits the selected Allows editing the bookmark selected bookmark also changing date and time name or description bookmark from time line a created on time line E3Playback ICON COMMAND ACTION Moves to the previous Selects a bookmark bookmark immediately ahead on time line and on event list simultaneously Moves to the next Selects the next bookmark bookmark on time line and on event list simultaneously By clicking YS Add or v Edit the following window is then displayed Add Edit Bookmark E3 Date time ms 2 26 2013 v 6 19 38 AN 992 a Name Comments PO a Add or edit bookmark The available options on this window are described on the next table Available options for Add or Edit Bookmark window OPTION DESCRIPTION Date time ms Allows sele
288. ls 100 Background color O White v Available columns Selected columns Pen name Pen description Status Average Begin Te ry oeme DiffY F nick V Show column titles F Display text in pen s color Properties of a Legend object Some fields on this tab have a corresponding property or method The available options are described on the next table Available options for Legend tab OPTION DESCRIPTION Show Legend Enables viewing a Legend The list box near this option defines a Legend s position This field is equivalent to Legend s Visible property and the list box for Legend s position is equivalent to Legend s LegendPos property Determines a Legend s size in pixels Depending on its position it can be its width or height The other dimension then follows E3Chart This field is equivalent to Legend s Size property Background color Determines a Legend s background color This field is equivalent to Legend s BackColor property visualization on a Legend Legend Adds a column to a Legend This option is equivalent to Legend s InsertColumn method 409 E3Chart OPTION DESCRIPTION properties of Legend s column fields Remove Removes the selected column from a Legend This option is equivalent to Legend s RemoveColumn method Up and Down Changes the position of a Legend s column These options are equivalent to Legend s ChangeColumnPos method Show column titles Enables a head
289. m E3Browser and E3Chart developed by Elipse Software Microsoft Forms developed by Microsoft and Report ActiveReports developed by Data Dynamics E3Alarm E3Browser E3Chart and Report objects have specific chapters further in this Manual Microsoft Forms objects are described in another topic on this chapter In addition to these ones users can insert any ActiveX object To register an Activex in E3 follow these procedures 1 Open the Tools Manage Active X menu The following dialog box is then displayed c ta lba E m Registered controls in Windows Registered controls in E3 CommonDialog Class a E RMChart CTreeView Control E EEE E2ControlsLib DeviceManager Class H 4 E3WebViewer Control a EsAlarm HHCtrl Object E38rowser HHCtrl Object E3Chart acne a 4 E3PlaybackLib per Class KMRDPProtocolManager Class i M ListPad dass DDActiveReportsViewer2 Microsoft ActiveX Hot Spot Control 1 0 na DDActiveReportsDesigner F DDActiveReports2 ActiveX Control configuration window 259 ActiveX Available options for ActiveX Control configuration window Windows and that can be added to E3 registered in E3 Register Registers the selected control in E3 If this control is not compatible with E3 a dialog boxis then displayed warning users about this incompatibility Remove Removes the selected control from the Registered controls in E3 list moving it back to the Registered con
290. m Source s Ack This field s limit is 50 characters when stored ona Database AlarmSourceName Stores Alarm Source s name This field s limit is 100 characters when stored ona Database For alarm events this is the name of the Area this Alarm Source belongs to For other events for example by using Alarm Server s LogTrackingEvent method it can be a user defined text This field s limit is 100 characters when stored on a Database ChangeMask Not used and its value is always 0 zero Alarms 294 OPTION O DESCRIPTION ConditionActive Indicates whether this Alarm Source is in alarm This field assumes values 0 Inactive condition or 1 Active condition ConditionName Name of this condition if itis an alarm event This field presents the following values e DeadBand Dead Band type Alarm Source e Digital Digital type Alarm Source e Level Analog type Alarm Source e RateOfChange Rate Of Change type Alarm Source If this eventis not an alarm for example when using Alarm Server s LogTrackingEvent method this value is always an empty String This field s limit is 100 characters when stored on a Database ne associated to this Alarm Source used internally by an Alarm Server CurrentValue Determines Alarm Source s value converted to Double at the time of the event For other events for example by using Alarm Server s LogTrackingEvent method this value is always zero 0 The field s limit i
291. m is displaying the icon NOTE The unknown status indicates that an E3Alarm did not receive a confirmation from the Alarm Server that this connection was successful This is the default status for versions earlierthan 4 7 335 E3Alarm CHAPTER Storage A Storage is an alternative module for historic data recording With this module users can transform production data processes and other collections into management information This module allows a great amount of information to be collected via OPC servers Elipse Drivers databases in general or even text files and data stored in commercial databases Microsoft SQL Server and Oracle by user defined historic objects in a compact and efficient way Information storage follows a logic that data is only stored when there is a significant user defined variation The analysis of these variations is performed by the BoxCar BackSlope algorithm which allows depending on the configured dead bands a significant data compression with full recovery of useful information Data recovering in E3 environment can be performed by a standard query tool which allows users to graphically assemble a query structure similar to Microsoft Access or SQL Server or even editing SQL queries directly Extracted data can be viewed as a table E3Browser or as a chart E3Chart or even as a report that can be viewed on screen using Report s PrintPreview method printed directly on paper or exported to
292. m table e E3Browser works normally because database queries are allowed inside an E3Playback 20 3 5 Event List An Event List displays a chronological sequence of playback events which allows an event by event browsing A playback event can be e Achange ona Tag value e Achange on an alarm status Events x YF Date time Tag Path Event S W 2013 02 26 06 21 35 707 Bookmark1 a W 2013 02 26 07 22 18 583 Bookmark 2013 02 26 09 16 42 727 DadosDestilacao Valv201 Alarmes LO Abertura e 2013 02 26 09 16 42 742 DadosDestilacao Valv501 Alarmes LO Abertura e 2013 02 26 09 16 42 742 DadosDestilacao Valv401 Alarmes LO Abertura e 2013 02 26 09 16 42 742 DadosDestilacao Valv301 Alarmes LO Abertura e 2013 02 26 09 16 42 758 DadosDestilacao TIC301 Alarmes HE Valor em H 2013 02 26 09 16 42 758 DadosDestilacao TIC101 Alarmes HIE Valor em H Event List Columns on this list are described on the next table Columns of Event List COLUMN DESCRIPTION Date time Displays this event s date and time as stored on the database Tag Path Displays the Tag oralarm source that generated this event or the Bookmark s name 439 E3Playback COLUMN DESCRIPTION If this eventis a change on a Tag value displays this new value If qualityis not Good 192 itis displayed before the value for example Bad 20 45 433 If this eventis a change on an alarm status displays the sub
293. main or not These objects are shown inside the project or library they belong to sorted out alphabetically E3 Studio 38 Domain Project 1 Fee Explorer j PROJECT1 C Example project 1 pr lt Data i DemoTag1 IntemalTag1 B DB C InitialScreen m Viewer E top Explorer mode Application maintenance can be handled in both modes Operations performed in one mode are immediately reflected in the other mode To make it easier to locate all objects both modes are interchangeable between each other and between the Design tab in the object s view To alternate between viewing modes follow these procedures 1 In Domain mode right click an object and select Show in Explorer to viewitin Explorer mode 2 In Explorer mode right click an object and select Show in Organizer to view it in Domain mode 3 In either mode right click an object and select Show in Editor to view it on Design tab 4 Inany object s view on Design tab right click an object and select Show in Organizer or Show in Explorer to view it in Organizer in its respective mode When left clicking an object its properties can be viewed and edited in the Properties List if enabled By right clicking an item in Organizer the options on the next table are displayed Available options in the Organizer OPTION DESCRIPTION lose Closes the current project or library Updates project or li
294. mains A Domain is a set of objects and configurations that define a supervisory system They correspond to Eli pse SCADA Applications E3 is a modular environment to develop and execute supervisory systems composed by modules described on the next sections 3 1 E3 Server E3 Server coordinates all E3 modules Italways runs as a service even in Demo mode be it registered as a service or with the regserver parameter and it must also always be running It can also be started up when a local E3 Studio is initialized or via shortcut for example e3admin start app dom to run a Domain It is responsible for e Checking and managing user licenses from different E3 modules e Starting stopping or monitoring Domain s runtime process E3Run e Opening editing or manipulating DOM files e Controlling user access to Domain objects e Monitoring other Domain servers and implementing Hot Standby E3 Server is capable of working with only one Domain file at a time and this is called the open Domain Domain files can only be manipulated via E3 Server 3 1 1 Licensing E3 Server supports two licensing modes Active License and Demo The licensing mode is defined during server s initialization If there is a valid protection device a hardkey or softkey type E3 Server enters the Active License mode If no device is detected it then enters the Demo mode If there is a device switching E3 Server compares licenses of this new device wit
295. may be necessary 12 4 E3 Objects and Permissions It is necessary to configure permissions in a Database to use E3 objects in a project These permissions are listed on the next table Available options for permissions OBJECT PERMISSION ___ Formula Full permission User historic Reads and queries existing tables Historic Full permission Alarm Server Full permission In permissions a Full permission expression means users have permission to e Create or remove existing tables Create indexes and keys Insert and exclude data from tables already created e Perform queries on resulting tables Users do not need to be Administrators to have Full Permission on any object 285 Database CHAPTER Alarms E3 provides a set of objects that allows users to monitor alarms in an application With them users can specify and manage alarms and events of process variables Alarm conditions can be managed in several sources This system is formed by a centralizing object named Alarm Server and one or more configuration objects named Alarm Configuration The next topics contain detailed information about these objects 13 1 Alarm Configuration An Alarm Configuration object is where Alarm Areas are inserted and organized To insert this objectin a project follow this procedure 1 Right click the project s name in Explorer mode and select the Insert Alarm Configuration option In Domain mode right click the Server Object
296. mber of Drivers that execute on each OServer process NOTE This limit can be exceeded if the number of processes in this pool reaches the maximum configured in the Maximum Number of Processes option Default value Domains 120 OPTION DESCRIPTION Maximum Number of Processes Defines the maximum number of OServer processes that are created bythis pool The value 0 zero default for this option allows an unlimited number of processes This configuration can be changed while a Domain is executing but it only affects Drivers started after that change or on the following situations where the Domain is updated e By clicking Nin E3 Studio e By selecting the Domain Refresh option on E3 Admin menu on Windows Notification Area By generating an event that forces E3Run to receive the Domain configuration NOTE For more information please check the topic Pool of lOServer Processes on chapter Drivers 3 10 Other Options for Windows Notification Area In addition to the options listed on the previous sections there are other configurations available via E3 Admin s contextual menu on Windows Notification Area 3 10 1 Shortcuts This option allows executing applications installed with E3 via E3 Admin s contextual menu on Windows Notification Area The following applications can be executed e Log Viewer E3 Studio e E3 Tweak e E3 Viewer The Log Viewer item opens Elipse Event Log Viewer already with the fil
297. mber of Elements as the number of variables declared in a Block To use this resource follow these procedures 1 Right click an I O Block and select the Insert I O Element option Ei Domain Project 1 E E Settings i E Objects Library i View ini Server objects f Drivers and OPC EH Driveri Create Block Elements ke Onsen ner j i W Databases Rename 3 AA Analog Alarm n pa eai AS Dead band Alarm CT amp A Digital Alarm X Delete A Discrete Alarm AB Rate of Change Alarm A Find Replace Object Counting Import id Export J Document Scripts iB Check x Edit links Copy Links Show in Editor Show in Explorer T Properties Inserting a Block Element In case of a device used to collect data informs Tag values that need to be converted users can use Tag scales which are basically a specification of a linear 151 Drivers conversion between two different bases To do so users must enable Element s EnableScaling property and inform DeviceLow and DeviceHigh parameters via their respective properties which are respectively low and high limits of device s data and also inform EULow and EUHigh parameters via their respective properties which are low and high data limits in engineering units Some of this object properties can be configured directly on Properties List without creating scripts for this More information on th
298. me vertical distance among three or more objects Horizontal Flip Applies a horizontal reflection effect to the selected objects Vertical Flip Applies a vertical reflection effect to the selected objects 7 3 2 Grid Aset of horizontal and vertical lines that work as a reference for placing objects on a Screen It is only viewed in E3 Studio and not at run time In E3 Studio users can show or hide the grid via the Arrange Grid menu or by clicking i on Alignment toolbar Grid properties can be configured via the Arrange Edit Grid menu When this option is selected the following dialog box is displayed Screens and Screen Objects 210 Grid Properties Style Dots Dotted lines Snap to arid Size and color Height 200 Width 200 Color CL Gray v Grid Properties The available options are Available options for Grid Properties window OPTION DESCRIPTION intersections Dotted lines The grid shows the whole line dotted Snap to grid Aligns the mouse to the grid automatically E horizontal lines a vertical lines cotor oo Determines the grid color 7 3 3 Rotate It allows rotating any Screen object that has its origin at its center or at any other point on the Screen To use this resource follow these procedures 1 Select an object on Screen and click Rotate on Screen toolbar 2 Click one of its rotating vertexes in green and drag the object to the desired
299. mmended Lok _ cme ay Security tab The available options on this tab are described on the next table Available options for Security tab OPTION DESCRIPTION User cannot change their password Prevents users from changing their passwords atrun time Domains 102 OPTION DESCRIPTION Password expires after days Establishes user s password expiring date Before password expires the application warns users how many days are left to change it After that period if the password has not been changed users are disabled characters for user s password letters and numbers numbers for user s password for user s password lowercase characters uppercase and lowercase characters Block user account after failed logins Establishes a maximum amount of login failures tolerated by the application before blocking user s account Unblock user automatically after minutes Unblocks user s account after a certain number of minutes Warn user days before password become Establishes a date for users to start expired receiving daily messages about password s expiring date After that date if users do not change their passwords they are blocked and onlyan Administrator can unblock them Password checking is not case sensitive Allows password validation regardless of case sensitivity This option is not recommended Password Blocking User accounts can be blocked in the following situations
300. mport id Export J Document Scripts A Check Edit links Copy Links Show in Editor Show in Explorer o gt Properties Configuring a Database 21 2 Templates The first tab on Formula s viewis called Templates Templates define which data types can be stored in each Formula s variable and their restrictions 453 Formulas Formulai x 4 pb X Template 1 Integer R E E Template2 1 Integer R Template3 1 Integer R M 4 gt gt Templates X Units A Values A Scripts Templates tab The available options on this tab are described on the next table Available options for Templates tab OPTION DESCRIPTION Name Defines Template s name Type Defines Template s type Restrictions Determines Template s restrictions The toolbar on Template s view contains the following options Add F to create a new Template and Remove to delete the selected Template When clicking Restrictions E the following window is then displayed Formulas 454 Restriction Configuration x Restrictions define how the formula data can be modified in runtime by an operator Limit Type C Unrestricted limit The operator CAN modify the data Restricted limit The operator can NOT modify the data Absolute limit The operator can type values between and fd 4 C Percent limit The operator can type values between below and EA above the original value Ex If the origin
301. ms that are executed whenever an event occurs E3 uses VBScript Visual Basic Script in its scripts and thus it can instantiate any system registered ActiveX object To access a Database the most commonly used ActiveX is ADO ActiveX Data Object which can be easily handled in E3 scripts First itis necessary to create an ADO connection which can be performed by using 279 Database the following script Set DBConnection CreateObject ADODB Connection DBConnection Open Provider MSDAORA _ DataSource connectionOracle User_ ID UserID Password passwd After creating a connection users can run a SQLcommand directly through that connection as shown next DBConnection Run _ UPDATE Table SET name John WHERE id 10 Users can also view all records which are returned as a Recordset query as shown next Set Recordset CreateObject ADODB Recordset Recordset Source Table Recordset ActiveConnection DbConnection Recordset CursorType 1 adOpenKeyset Recordset LockType 3 adLockOptimistic Recordset Open Then users can browse the returned table by using the MoveNext and MovePrevious commands as well as many other ADO commands Users can also use a SQL query to handle specific parts of a table by using the Source property 12 2 3 Technologies Used by E3 for Accessing Oracle E3 basically uses two technologies to access Oracle Databases ADO ActiveX Data Object and OCI Oracle Call Interface ADO is
302. n Load lt Domain file gt Loads the specified Domain E3Admin Stop Stops the running Domain E3Admin Close Stops and closes loaded Domain E3Admin Refresh Refreshes the loaded Domain E3Admin Help Shows this window Dialog box with E3 Admin s command line options If the load start or viewer options are used Windows Vista or later may ask for an Administrator authorization a process known as privilege elevation whenever E3 Admin has not been started by a user who is a system Administrator and depending on Windows User Account Control configuration If the currently user logged in is not an Administrator and Windows User Account Control configuration does not allow the authorization window E3 Admin itself displays an error message such as the one on the next figure 85 Domains E3 Admin mym x Current logged user does not have credentials to perform this action E3 Admin error message NOTE Windows must be restarted for User Account Control configurations to be applied In case there are Domain restrictions the load stop refresh and close options also ask for an E3 user login 3 4 OServer An lOServer is a process responsible for executing I O Drivers OServers are created maintained and monitored by the E3Run process 3 5 E3 Studio E3 Studio is an application development and configuration environment It allows opening and editing prj or lib files E3 Studio is a multi user e
303. n change its Caption property to Enable Pen Visualization 6 Goto this Button s properties and select Scripts tab On Command Button s Click event write the following code Sub CommandButton2_Click Set Pen1 Screen Item E3Chart1 Pens Item Pen1 Pen1 Visible True End Sub 7 Run this project and check its results 19 2 4 Creating a Pen via Scripts The following example shows how to create a Pen via script To do so follow these procedures 1 Create an E3Chart ona Screen 2 Create a Command Button on this Screen For its Caption property write Create Pen 3 Goto this Command Button s properties and select Scripts tab Type the following script on its Click event Sub Text1_Click Set E3Chart1 Screen Item E3Chart1 MsgBox Click OK to create the Pen Set Pen E3Chart1 Pens AddPen Pen1 Pen DataSourceType realtime Pen VerDataSource Data DemoTag1 Pen UseTimeStamp true At x uses timestamp Pen Color RGB 255 Pen DocString test MsgBox Click OK to connect Pen Connect Starts getting data MsgBox Click OK to frame E3Chart1 FitPen 417 E3Chart MsgBox Click OK to disconnect Pen Disconnect Stops receiving data MsgBox Click OK to remove Pen E3Chart1 Pens Remove Pen Name End Sub 4 Run this project and check its results 19 3 Specific Runtime Behavior An E3Chart has a series of features only available at run time They are described on the next top
304. n create a table with all application Strings where the first column is the name of an Internal Tag created in Viewer and each subsequent column contains a String corresponding to a language This table can be created in Access for example When opening Viewer and defining a language load Viewer s Internal Tags with a table of Strings corresponding to the selected language This can be performed using a Query object on a Screen Here is an example of a script Sub Screen1_OnPreShow Arg Set rs Item Query1 GetADORecordset rs MoveFirst For i 1 To rs RecordCount Application Item rs Fields TagName Value Value _ rs Fields Arg Value Arg is a parameter passed to the Screen containing the name of the column referring to the chosen language rs MoveNext Next End Sub Another way is creating a Table Link in all properties with translatable content using the same source for all Links For each value range of this Link place a String referring to a different language The source can be an Internal Tag whose value can be defined when opening Viewer In case of using the MsgBox method use the same Tag as a condition to choose which String is used 27 14 Viewer I cannot connect a remote Viewer to a Server Why is this happening POSSIBLE CAUSE There is a firewall blocking access to this Server SOLUTION Users must unblock all ports used by E3 The procedure to unblock a port on Windows firewall is described next NOTE The
305. n E3 Studio E3 WebViewer is an ActiveX component that causes a browser to behave as an E3 Viewer which enables viewing and controlling E3 applications via Internet Thus it is possible to view and interact with a plant floor process by using a regular web browser This browser can be installed in any computer on a network with access to E3 Server After installed an E3 WebViewer works exactly as an E3 Viewer downloading an application Screens bitmaps etc to the local machine All E3 Viewer functionality E3Chart E3Alarm etc is supported by an E3 WebViewer tekok http localhost e3web2 asp localhost AE Unt E3 WebViewer running viewing an application 507 E3 Viewer and E3 WebViewer NOTE E3 Viewer and E3 WebViewer both accept the same zoom options described on topic Zoom of chapter Screen and Screen Objects In addition drawing quality of Screens can be modified at run time by using both E3 Viewer s and E3 WebViewer s contextual menu and selecting one of the options of the Quality all screens menu For more information please check Viewer s RenderQuality property on Scripts Reference Manual 24 1 Viewer Only Read Only Mode A Viewer Only mode Read Only or restricted access mode is a way of controlling access of a Viewer has to a server Domain as opposed to a Viewer Full mode which has no access restrictions By using user permissions settings on chapter Security and acc
306. n a remote Viewer using Internet Explorer Why is this happening POSSIBLE CAUSES 533 Viewer is not installed in the remote computer e There is a firewall blocking access to this server Frequently Asked Questions SOLUTION Users can install Viewer on the remote computer or else copy Viewer s installation file to Server s folder C Inetpub wwwroot Thus every time there is an attempt to open a Viewer using Internet Explorer on a remote computer where Viewer is not installed the installation process starts immediately 27 15 Libraries When opening a Screen there is a message declaring that an object cannot be correctly loaded POSSIBLE CAUSE An XControl of a Library that was being used inside this Screen was deleted or else a Library that contains this XControl was removed from a Domain SOLUTION In the first case if this XControl was deleted there is no way to recover it To fix this error remove the ElipseX object that is inside a Screen in the Organizer users can see an exclamation point over object s icon On a Screen there is a black square with an X inside it In the second case add this Library to a Domain When opening a Screen there is an error message declaring that an ActiveX library cannot be opened POSSIBLE CAUSE Some ActiveX objects used on that Screen were not registered and added to this computer SOLUTION Register and add this ActiveX object by using the Add ActiveX option available on
307. n properties the available Links are Simple Bi directional Analog Digital Table Reverse and Multiple There is also a link among ElipseX properties and objects which still cannot be modified for more details please check the chapter Libraries In the simplest case specifies the path to an object or property This path can be filled in by using AppBrowser which can be opened by clicking l on the right side of this field In general this is an expression allowing logical and arithmetical operations as well as evaluating functions for properties objects and constants By specifying the source of a Link its text appears in blue in case it corresponds to a valid expression If this expression contains errors as in non existing object paths or as in objects belonging to projects not loaded its text appears in red In these cases the Verify Domain option informs the places that need corrections or revision The available types of Links are explained on the next topics 8 1 Simple In a Simple Link the value in the Source field is copied to the property each time the first one is modified Links 232 Source Data DemoTag1 Value 9 Efect3D_X 9 Efect3D_Y i Efect3DColorBase Simple Link To use this resource follow these procedures 1 Select the object for the Link 2 Right click this object and select the Properties option 3 Click the Links tab and select the property to perform the Link Stud
308. na simple and organized way It helps editing and configuring all objects involved by using a hierarchical options tree It has two viewing modes Domain and Explorer Fl project prj C Remote Domains 5 Objects Library m View m Viewer and Frames 4 Screens m Reports Resources Pi Server objects iJ Drivers and OPC fy Data objects Databases A Alarms Sy Explorer Ga PROJECT1 C Example project 1 prj Organizer The Domain mode shows only information about open objects belonging to a Domain This information is divided into four groups Settings Objects Library View and Server Objects Each group presents its objects sorted out alphabetically 37 E3 Studio inside its respective node E34 Drivers and OPC E w Data objects i Lj Databases i Explorer Domain mode The Settings group shows all configured servers as well as names of project and library files belonging to a Domain The Objects Library group collects ElipseX objects from all libraries in a Domain sorted out by type XObjects and XControls The remaining E3 objects are in View or Server Objects groups View contains objects running in the client machine Objects running in the server machine arein Server Objects The Explorer mode shows all projects and libraries currently open in E3 Studio whether they belong to a Do
309. nd colors Users can also select colors by severity for each alarm type 329 E3Alarm Eal Item Position Connections Filters Columns Sorting Colors Font _4 gt Alarm colors by severity Click E to redefine colors for only one type of severity for the selected alarm type The window on the next figure is then displayed Colors by severity The available options on this window are described on the next table E3Alarm 330 Available options for Colors by severity window OPTION DESCRIPTION Override background color Determines alarm s background color only for the selected severity If this option is not selected the selected color in the Background color option of the selected alarm type remains active Override text color Determines alarm s text color only for the selected severity If this option is not selected the selected colorin the Text color option of the selected alarm type remains active Override blinking Redefines a blinking option for alarm text and background for the selected severity If this option is not selected the selected option in the selected alarm type remains active 14 1 6 Font Tab On Font tab users can configure a font for E3Alarm s header and rows E3Alarm1 properties E3Alarm E3 Item Position Connections Filters Columns Sorting Colors Font lt gt Properties Font Size Tahoma v 12 75 Effects Bold Unde
310. nd Oracle To install Oracle please refer to this product s documentation Accessing an Oracle database can be performed in two ways either by accessing an Oracle Database from E3 or via scripts Each one of these procedures are explained on the next topics 12 2 1 Accessing Oracle via E3 To insert a new Oracle Database follow these procedures 1 Right click the project s name in Explorer and select the Insert Database option In Domain mode right click the Server objects Databases item select the Insert Database in option and then the project s name The object is then created and its script edition window is opened 2 To configure it go to the Configuration tab on Properties window 277 Database DBI properties DB DBServer a Item Alarms Area Configuration Links Database 7 Orade Database Connection Use TIMESTAMP type 7 Use ADO Orade drivers Configuration for an Oracle Database The available options on this tab are described on the next table Available options for Configuration tab OPTION DESCRIPTION stAccess 1 stOracle or 2 stSqlServer Connection Name of the connection provided bya database administrator Database 278 OPTION DESCRIPTION Use TIMESTAMP type Allows using Oracle s TIMESTAMP type with a precision of milliseconds and available since version 9 0 In case this option is disabled uses a DATE type with a precision of seconds NOTE For an
311. nd it may switch to an Active or Standby status if an active Domain is reconfigured IMPORTANT To run a redundant application in E3 itis necessary that all servers run the same software version and also have a local updated copy of Domain files prij lib etc A dom file however is automatically synced by E3 Server that is changes made to a dom file on one server are automatically copied to this dom file on other Domain servers To do so a dom file must exist at the same path on all servers Hot Standby uses a REC connection therefore it only works if E3 Server is started up on all computers involved in this communication 519 Hot Standby If an E3 Studio user or a Hot Standby user is also an Administrator of a remote computer running E3 Server they can remotely control this service by using services msc via the Action Connect to another computer option 25 1 Configuring The settings to implement Hot Standby are the following 1 Locate the path of the Domain files dom prj lib etc on the main computer and copy that folder to the standby computer In case a different path to the Domain files has been set in the Root folder for Domain files option on Servers tab users must use that path when copying those files 2 Database files must be handled differently For further information see the topic Using Databases with Hot Standby 3 Goto the E3 Admin x icon on Windows Notification Area and select the Domain
312. nd select the Import option On the list of file types select the Elipse SCADA files e2f option and then select the previously exported file There is no need to select a template If this import process was successful that Screen is filled with the objects and no error message is displayed Image files used by this Screen must be handled as follows e Image files with relative paths in Elipse SCADA s application These files must be inserted manually as Resources in E3 projects Users can insert several resources at once by right clicking the Resources item in Organizer and selecting the Insert resource in option e Image files with absolute paths these files must remain on their original directories E3 searches for them on the same directory where they can be found by an Elipse SCADA s application E3 Studio 70 NOTE Itis advisable to insert all files in a project as Resources so that E3 Viewer can download them automatically via network This avoids the need to install all files manually on client machines 2 6 6 Links To import or export Links in E3 users must select the corresponding optionina template There is no way to exclude a specific Link type either all of them are imported or exported or none at all Each Link takes one rowina CSV file Link identification is performed using the following keywords e AgSimple Simple Bidirectional or Reverse Links they must be distinguished by their Reverse and B
313. new Pen Go to this Pen s properties and on Data tab Pen Type item select the Historic option and then indicate the configured Query field Indicate a table field in the Vertical Axis Field item In the Horizontal Axis Field item indicate the E3TimeStamp field Click OK Create a new Command Button on this Screen and in its Caption property write Update Historical E3Chart Go to this Button s scripts and on its Click event write the following code Set Chart Screen Item E3Chart1 Query SetVariableValue Start now 1 24 Query SetVariableValue End now Chart HorScaleBegin now 1 24 Chart HorScaleEnd now Chart Queries UpdateData End Sub Run this project and check its results 19 2 3 Enabling or Disabling Pen Visualization The following example shows how to enable or disable Pen s visualization on an E3chart To do so follow these procedures 1 Create an E3Chart on a Screen E3Chart 416 2 Goto E3Chart s properties and select Pens tab Create a new Real Time Pen and link it to a Demo Tag on its horizontal Axis 3 Create two Command Buttons on this Screen On the first one write Disable Pen Visualization in its Caption property 4 Goto this Button s properties and select Scripts tab On Command Button s Click event write the following code Sub CommandButton1_Click Set Pen1 Screen Item E3Chart1 Pens Item Pen1 Pen1 Visible False End Sub 5 For the second Command Butto
314. ng al on Default toolbar In this item there are a series of vector graphical elements divided into categories which can be dragged to Screens or to ElipseXs The available types of symbols are 3D Pushbuttons 3D ISA Symbols Air Conditioning Architecture Arrows ASHRAE Controls and Equipment ASHRAE Ducts ASHRAE Pipes Basic Shapes Blowers and Fans Boilers Buildings Chemical Processes Computer Hardware Computer Keys Containers Controllers Conveyor belts and Production Lines Ducts Electrical System Flexible Tubes Finishing Food Outflow Meters General Symbols Heating HVAC Icons and Bitmaps Industrial Miscellany International Symbols ISA Symbols Laboratory Machinery Maps and Flags Material Handling Mining Pipes Pulp amp Paper Mixers Engines Nature Human Machine Interfaces Panels Industrial Accessories Power Devices Processes Cooling Processes Warming Pumps Security Scales Segmented Pipes Sensors Cuts in Tanks Textures Valves Vehicles Water and Water Supply Wires and Cables To use this feature follow these procedures 1 Click Gallery on Default toolbar 2 By selecting this tab users have access to sets of symbols grouped in categories Select the category from the upper part of the window 3 To insert an object from the symbol library on a Screen simply click the desired object and drag it to the Screen 4 After inserted the object can be freely edited and modified accordi
315. ng that both configuration and generation of the file containing scripts documentation are finished Script documentation wizard Done Script documentation wizard has all necessary information to create your documentation file Click in Finish button to create documentation file lt Back Finish Cancel Final window to generate a file Some relevant observations XControl and XObject scripts are recorded only once in a file because they are found during library search Instance scripts are stored when an instance s parent objectis searched e Picks are internally scripts therefore they are also documented e Filestorage is performed alphabetically per object name inside every project or library e Itis not possible to add scripts to an existing file via Wizard Every time this Wizard is started a new file is created in case it already exists itis overwritten e This tool may take a while to generate a documentation file in case the application is too large and the search involves many types of objects To improve a search try generating a file for each E3 s object type E3 Studio 34 2 4 5 Version Report Version Report tool enables viewing versions and comments of open projects and libraries whether they belong to a Domain or not To access this tool click 4 on Default toolbar to display the window on the next figure Version report L E0 Project Library Version Comment pe C Examp
316. ng to the features described for image objects such as for example change the filling color using the OverrideFillMode OverrideFillColor or OverrideLineColor properties with no need to transform the object into an E3 graphical object 247 Libraries m ISA Symbols J E Bes bea La Ea 3DAdsorptio 3DAdsorption g 3DAgitatedBa 3DAgitator A 3DAtmospher 3DAutogenou Gallery 9 2 User Library ElipseX An ElipseX is an E3 s object library In addition to drawings an ElipseX may contain internal variables that can be exported to an application besides programming logic scripts thatis availablein all object s copies diminishing the need to repeat code in several parts of an application ElipseXs are encapsulated ina lib file Users can create all ElipseXs to useina specific project in the same Library file lib or divide them among several files as desired To create a new library in E3 follow the next procedures 1 Select the New Project menu and then click Next 2 Inthe Type of Application option select the E3 Object Library option Libraries 248 Application Wizard x Application Type d Choose the application type you want to create Select the application type a C Standard application 3 E3 Object Library 3 Blank application Application name ExampleLib Save the application in folder C Example ExampleLib Browse cons Creating a user li
317. ngency of the other that is if a main server fails a backup server immediately starts running with no losses in this process This is known as a Standby server Thus E3 Hot Standby tool aims at allowing a server to remain in standby waiting for a possible failure of another server an active server Switching to an active server can be manual or automatic A manual switching is activated via E3 Admin menu on Windows Notification Area of the standby computer the Server Activate option An automatic switching occurs when a standby server detects that a main server is not running anymore A server can assume one of the following statuses Server under Maintenance This status is indicated in Domain server s settings A server under maintenance does not participate in any Domain event e Active Server Only one server can be active in a Domain ata certain time An active server is the one running the application E3Run e Standby Server Only one server can bein Standby mode in a Domain ata certain time A standby server runs E3Run in Standby mode and an application remains loaded only waiting for a command to start operating A backup server monitors an active server and if itis not answering a backup is then activated e Inactive Server A server switches to inactive when itis declared in a Domain but itis neither selected as the Main nor as the Backup server Even when inactive this server monitors changes in a Domain file a
318. ns access the same database Users enable database access in the application setting up a DBServer object on both servers Main and Standby with the same location parameters of the database on the network To ensure system s continuity itis important that the database be on a separate machine accessible by both servers In the second way data recording is performed on different databases In this case users must have two databases executing locally on both servers Thus users can ensure that access to these databases is always available because the machine executing the application also runs the database An interesting option in this caseis syncing between different databases of the main and secondary application DBServer s EnableSynchronization property enables this feature in the application When itis active all data stored on the main database is updated on the Standby database almost instantly NOTE If the main application cannot send data to a Standby server then data remains stored on local disk for sending it later when communication between these two computers is reestablished ensuring that tables generated by the application are the same Hot Standby 522 CHAPTER Advanced Settings There are certain E3 configurations that can be performed directly in Windows Registry although this procedure is not advisable Elipse Software has a tool called E3 Tweak which performs registry settings using a graphical interface
319. ns application s historical data Selecting a Database Go to the Properties list and configure E3Playback s InitialScreen property to point to FrameApp Frame E3 Playback 424 S Formulas no documentation E Frame E InitialScreen im Payoodsce S UpperMenu PlaybackScreen a Paste Selecting a Frame for InitialScreen property 4 Open the UpperMenu Screen and insert a Stopwatch image on the right upper side open the Gallery and select the Misc Symbols 1 category COP 245 5 Sanitation Utilities UpperMenu Screen 5 Double click the Stopwatch add an Open Screen Pick on the Click event to open PlaybackScreen on the main Frame and then configure itas in the next figures 425 E3Playback Cluppermenu x 4 gt Picture gt Al dick nAdA Xs s Click Fires when object is clicked on E Open Screen Opens Screen in main frame Se Open Screen PlaybackScreen In Frame Initial zoom Parameter 90 E Enable scrollbar E Specify screen position E Specify screen size Left pixels Width pixels himetric 0 Top pixels Height pixels himetric 0 PS Use hm in order to specify a HIMETRIC size For pixels use only numbers Samples 1000hm 3500hm 100 400 Open Screen Pick E3 Playback 426 Window style configurations 6 Execute this a
320. ns with local or remote Alarm Servers Alarms 312 AlarmFilterl properties Standard AlarmFilter E3 Item Connections Filters Ordering Links x Connection filter Cees LOCAL AlarmServer1 ConnectionFilter f Connections tab The available options on this tab are described on the next table Available options on Connections tab OPTION DESCRIPTION Adds a new Connection to an Alarm Filter This option corresponds to the Add method of the Collection of Connections x Removes the selected Connection This option corresponds to the Remove method of the Collection of Connections NOTE The Connection created automatically with an object cannot be removed Connection Name Name of this Connection Press the F2 key to edit this name This option corresponds to the ConnectionName property of a Connection object on the Collection of Connections Server name Friendly name to identifya Domain from the selected Alarm Server This option corresponds to the DomainName property of a Connection object on the Collection of Connections 313 Alarms OPTION DESCRIPTION Alarm Server Name of the Alarm Server which can be a local Domain as well as a Remote Domain This option corresponds to the AlarmServer property of a Connection object on the Collection of Connections Click Bic select an Alarm Server using AppBrowser Connection filter Name of a Filter that contains the configuration of the al
321. ntly running The standby computer displays an icon represented by two yellow bars M indicating that it is in Standby mode 25 2 Running a Redundant Domain To run a redundant Domain just start one of its servers the other servers are automatically started by this first server To start a Domain create a shortcut to E3 Admin using the following command line E3Admin exe start lt Domain_Path gt This server will start the Domain servers and then it will be automatically closed A Domain can be also started via E3 Studio To do so open the Domain and click gt 25 3 Stopping a Redundant Domain A Domain can be stopped by any of its servers via E3 Admin ix icon on Windows Notification Area Select the Domain Stop option and then Active and Standby servers finish the E3Run process A Domain can be restarted by selecting the Domain Run option If users select the Domain Close option the Domain is stopped and then closed and E3 Servers are available to run other Domains IMPORTANT These options to stop and close a Domain AFFECT ALL DOMAIN SERVERS not only the server executing this command 25 4 Stopping One of the Domain Servers The correct way of stopping one of the Domain servers is by selecting it as in Maintenance mode on Servers tab of E3 Admin Domain Options settings If the active server is in Maintenance mode the standby server then switches to the active status To set that server back into the Domain desele
322. nts milliseconds with higher precision 7 After all data tables and Tag paths are detected a simple query is then performed on each one of these tables to determine the oldest and newest date stored on this table This allows determining date intervals where playback is allowed NOTE 1 A valid date interval is not updated during a playback process then new data added to a database aftera database assembling process is only available if playback window is closed and opened again NOTE 2 In Demo mode or with an E3 Studio license the allowed playback period is restricted to the last six hours of data stored on a database 20 4 2 Playback Queries The amount of playback data available can be huge depending on the application For a smoother Screen browsing E3Playback performs database queries in short periods of time called Slices Each playback data slice has a fixed width of one day Every time the clock is 443 E3Playback positioned on a certain date and time E3Playback creates or finds out the time slice that contains the current date and time Each data slice has the following information Period of time of that slice starting and ending date and time A list of Tags that already have their data loaded on that slice For each Tag stored ona slice the following data is kept e The last event of the Tag previous to the beginning of that slice e All Tag events inside that slice s interval e The next Tag event after
323. nvironment that is several E3 Studios can work on the same files at the same time E3 Studio uses a REC connection to communicate with an E3 Server 3 6 E3 Viewer E3 Viewer is a runtime user interface It shows Screens at run time and enables users to operate an application E3 Viewer can run from anywhere on a network with access to an E3 Server with no need to copy the application to other E3 Viewers because Screens and bitmaps areloaded on demand at run time 3 7 Components A Domain is composed by the files described on next sections Domains 86 3 7 1 Configuration File A dom file stores four types of information e Domain configuration options e Alist with prj and lib files containing Tags Screens object definitions etc Server configurations computers that executes a Domain e User configurations and access permissions 3 7 2 Project File A Domain can have one or more project files Each prj file contains object definitions Tags Screens Historics Alarms bitmaps etc The organization of objects inside a prj file is free several folder levels can be created inside a prj and each folder can contain any type of object Users may want to split objects ona supervisory system into two or more prj files depending on their needs At run time each prj can be activated regardless of the other ones even in different servers 3 7 3 Library File Library files lib contain user defined objects ElipseX wh
324. ny hierarchical reference e period Indicates any aggregation reference e ns browse name A String that follows a slash mark or period specifies a browse name of an item This name can be prefixed with its Namespace index If omitted assumes a value of 0 zero e amp ampersand escape character Inserts a reserved character in place For example an expression amp Name is replaced by Name Reserved characters are the following e slash mark e period e lt less than 177 Drivers e gt greater than colon number sign exclamation point e amp ampersand A formal definition of an OPC UA path in BNF notation is the following lt relative path gt lt reference type gt lt browse name gt relative path KPOrareMeesiayaes see V7 8a te Pee y ene 7 lt browse name gt gt lt browse name gt lt namespace index gt lt name gt lt namespace index gt lt digit gt lt digit gt Kohipaless 9g 2 8a Pae B39 Pale oss eee e lle lt name gt lt name char gt amp lt reserved char gt lt name gt Kpeserveciehars e 77 E ee ere lt name char gt All valid characters for a String excluding reserved chars E3 does not support OPC UA Node Identifiers Nodelds that do not belong to a server where Tag browsing is performed Gateway servers These Tags therefore are not displayed on a window for selectin
325. o to File Users menu A dialog box is then displayed to configure application s permissions users and groups 487 Security H A Alarms _Pemmissions Run Domain C Stop Domain DI Edit Domain is command is GRANTED to this user regardless of the groups to ich he she belongs to I Disable permissions check User Permissions window 23 1 Users On Users tab it is possible to configure information about users who have access or not to an application To use this feature click the File Users menu and then select the Users tab Security 488 5 User Permissions Jn Permissions Users Groups User Name New Edit Remove Groups Please choose what group this user belongs to Available groups Belong to Administration Users tab The available options on this tab are described on the next table Available options for Users tab Name Indicates the currentuser O New Creates newuser S O Edit Edits properties of the selecteduser Remove Removes the selected user Available groups Shows all available user groups in an application Belongs to Shows all groups to which this user belongs 489 Security OPTION DESCRIPTION Adds groups from the list Available groups to the list Belongs to Removes groups from the list Belongs to When clicking New or Edit the dialog box on the next figure is then displayed Security 490 This is an administr
326. oid that a variable when oscillating around an alarm s limit generates an unnecessary amount of Return Message Allows specifying a text displayed to users when this alarm is notin an active condition 13 3 2 Digital Allows monitoring a digital variable by specifying whether this alarm is rising 1 or True or falling 0 or False 305 Alarms DigitalAlarm1 properties DB DigitalAlarmSource E3 Item Source Formatting Links Digital Digital Alarm Value Message text Severity Need ACK True High vV Delay ms 0 Return message Digital tab The available options on this tab are described on the next table Available options for Digital tab OPTION DESCRIPTION Digital Alarm Enables a digital alarm Value Determines a Boolean value for this alarm True or False Message Text Allows specifying a text displayed to users when this alarm is in an active condition ee eee an alarm level s severity it can be High Medium or Low acknowledgment Delay ms Specifies a delay time in milliseconds When this value is equal to 0 zero default no delayis applied Return message Allows specifying a text displayed to users when this alarm is notin an active condition 13 3 3 Dead Band Allows monitoring an analog variable by specifying a maximum difference limit a dead band value relative to a reference value a SetPoint Alarms 306 In alarm Process variable
327. older defines groups inside Viewer objects to organize Viewer Tags Counter Demo Internal and Timer and Queries If needed new Folders can be inserted into other Folders To use this feature follow this procedure 1 Right click the View Viewer and Frames Viewer item and select the Insert Panel Viewer Folder option Domain Project1 H E Settings e Objects Library lil View E Viewer and Frames fel ry Viewer ma Counter Tag aft Server object Standard y Demo Tag Edit Tag Timer Tag X Delete Viewer Folder A Find Replace Object Counting WH Impor W Export W Document Scripts M Check Edit links Copy Links S Show in Editor E Show in Explorer Properties Inserting a Viewer Folder 199 Viewer CHAPTER Screens and Screen Objects Screens are windows for monitoring processes On each Screen users can insert objects to compose the operator s interface with the system called Screen Objects Each application can have an unlimited number of Screens and Screen objects 7 1 Screen The Screen is the basic object for interfacing with the user and it can contain several objects Graphics inserted on the Screen can be deleted copied moved resized grouped or configured To insert a new Screen in the project right click the project s name in Explorer and select the Insert Screen option In Domain mode right cli
328. omain alias does not exist in the Remote Domain configuration When at least one of the previous situations occur all client links referencing a Domain are disconnected as well as all Application GetObject methods referencing a Remote Domain fail that is cause script errors As soon as this problem is solved Links should connect automatically Application GetObject methods however must be executed again 3 12 Generating Logs in E3 E3 generates logs in ETL Event Trace Log format These log files are managed by an Elipse tool called Elipse Event Log Viewer available with E3 installation With this tool users can view these files and manage the space they occupy on disk among other tasks For more information about Elipse Event Log Viewer please check Elipse Event Log Viewer User s Manual available via Start Programs Elipse Software Elipse Event Log menu Elipse Event Log Viewer can be opened using three different ways e Via Start Programs Elipse Software Elipse Event Log Log Viewer menu e Via E3 Studio s Tools Log Viewer menu e Via Shortcuts Log Viewer option of E3 Admin s contextual menu on Windows Notification Area 135 Domains CHAPTER Drivers E3 allows communication with data acquisition devices controllers PLCs Programmable Logic Controllers RTUs Remote Terminal Units or any other type of device by using its own I O Drivers or OPC Servers according to the type of device or communication ne
329. ommand prompt 2 Expand the DCOM Config item in Component Services Computers My Computer right click the E3OpcClient item and select the Properties option 3 Select the Identity tab select the This user item and fill in the account information 4 Click OK and restart the computer to apply these settings 4 3 2 OPC Tag Group An OPC Tag Group object gathers a series of OPC Tags that share the same update parameters scan time and dead band An OPC Tag Group is mandatory to create OPC Tags To insert an OPC Tag Group follow this procedure 1 Right click an OPC Driver and select the Insert OPC Tag Group option 161 Drivers El 8 Domain Project 1 E E Settings a Objects Library E View Close ii 1 Server objects 6 Eg Drivers and Import tags i Ha Driveri E Deactivate Communication faa SI Server information LJ Databases a Tag counting a5 Explorer Insert gt OPC Tag Group eae A Analog Alarm Edit AB Dead band Alarm Ag Digital Alarm D Discrete Alarm A Find Replace Ap Rate of Change Alarm Object Counting Import Export Document Scripts Check X Delete SE w Edit links Copy Links S Show in Editor ME Show in Explorer F Properties Inserting an OPC Tag Group Some OPC Tag Group properties can be configured using Properties List without creating scripts for this To configure any property locate it on Pro
330. on Protects a file against unauthorized changes or views This resource is used to prevent a given library or project from being accidentally changed or that developer s exclusive procedures from being copied e The Add protection option allows users to configure a protection password for an application 503 Security 1 protection Please type and confirm the studio protection password for this file Password Confirm password Lo c Add protection e The Change password option changes E3 Studio s protection password for that file P Change protection password Please type the previous and new studio protection passwords Previous password New password Confirm password Change password e The Remove protection option removes an edition protection from a file To do so click it type a password and click OK The application then opens a dialog box that informs whether this action was executed successfully e Execution Protection This option is used to protect a file against unauthorized execution To do so users must ask for a protection device recorded password which is performed by Elipse Software This protects the developer against project s unauthorized copies for example To do so when asking for an E3 Server s license users must provide that execution password This process is performed after purchasing a server e The Add protection option allows users to configure a
331. on about objects from a CSV Comma Separated Values file and recreates them in the configuration environment E3 Studio For each object users can get information on properties Links and collection items The export tool in E3 stores information about selected objects from the configuration environment E3 Studio into a CSV file For each object users can store its properties Links and collection items Therefore it is possible to e Create new E3 objects froma CSV file as long as these objects are not direct child objects of the project or library e Import or export any property from any type of E3 object e Import or export any type of Link from E3 objects e Export any type of E3 s objects collection and import their properties e Import or export any type of item from E3 s objects collection E3 Studio 42 Any E3 object can be imported or exported The selected object for this operation is called the root object So users can import or export a Data Folder with user defined XObjects for example or even export a Screen listing all its child objects In addition to objects Links and collections can also be imported and exported Users have the option to inform whether they want to import or export Links and collections NOTE The import and export tool only considers properties and Links from E3 objects and collections Information not described in properties are not imported or exported That is for example the case of s
332. onfigured using the Properties List without creating scripts To configure any property locate it on Properties window and perform the necessary adjustments For more information on E3Chart properties please check the Scripts Reference Manual 19 1 Settings To configure an E3Chart right click it and select the Properties option 387 E3Chart 19 1 1 Item Position and General Tabs On Item tab users can view object s name and assign a description to it E3Chartl properties E3Chart a Item Position General Axis Pens Legend Queries Font Links Name Documentation Contexts _ Item tab Each field on the Item tab has a corresponding property The available options are described on the next table Available options for Item tab OPTION DESCRIPTION Determines object s name This field is equivalent to object s Name property Documentation Free text that enables documenting object s features and functionality bya developer This field is equivalent to object s DocString property The Position tab specifies E3Chart s position on a Screen E3Chart 388 E3Chartl properties E3Chart E3 Item Position General Axis Pens Legend Queries Font Links Position Size cs 9445 625 Width 10583 LE 2275 4166 Height 6615 Position tab Each field on this tab has an equivalent property The available options are described on the next table A
333. onnection itis handled as a value change The Edit Links window allows using copy and paste features among property Links The Copy Link option copies a Link from the selected row and the Paste Link option pastes that Link to the selected row replacing the previous Link Links 244 Option to copy or paste a Link 245 Links CHAPTER Libraries E3 has tools that allow transforming any object or set of objects of an application into a user library Libraries can be composed of frequently used objects and subsequently reused in another application E3 provides two types of user libraries the Gallery a library of vector graphical symbols which can be freely used in the applications and a user library tool called ElipseX The use of libraries in E3 is highly recommended most of the time due to the productivity gains they bring to the applications Some advantages of Elipsex e Reusing source code e Reducing tests during development e Creating default interfaces for developed objects e Reducing development time of new projects e Protecting project s content 14 8 Domain Project 1 Ey Settings SEFE Objects Library Eg XObjects ii XObject 1 Qk XObject2 E XObject3 id XObject4 y XControls l XControl1 QE XControl2 El XControl3 El XControl4 E m View 4G Server objects a Explorer Libraries in Organizer Libraries 246 9 1 Gallery The Gallery can be accessed by clicki
334. operties are described on the next table Available options for Options tab OPTION DESCRIPTION Choose refresh type Specifies a time interval in which data is updated This value must be greater than 1000 ms This field is equivalent to the RefreshTime property Choose selection type Specifies a selection type on E3Browser s table This field is equivalent to the SelectRow property 18 2 3 Color Tab The Color tab specifies E3Browser colors referring to its columns and cells If the desired color is notin the default color palette itis necessary to set it up by clicking Edit Custom Color which then opens a dialog box to edit a color 383 E3Browser Item Position Query Style Options Color Font Links Properties Color Set Standard Colors ka Color Palette Color tab The available options on the Color tab are described on the next table Available options for Color tab selected property Colors or Windows System Colors property Edit Custom Color Edits a new custom color different from default colors E3Browser 384 18 2 4 Font Tab On the Font tab users can define E3Browser s font specifications Item Position Query Style Options Color Font Links Properties Font Size Arial v je 75 GridFont ToolbarFont Effects M Bold l Underline I Italic I Strikeout Sample Text Font tab The available options are relative to fon
335. orage orif it contains several tables This field is equivalent to Pen s Neel alee a vertical Axis This field is equivalent to Pen s ScaleY property Beea en src a horizontal Axis This field is equivalent to Pen s ScaleX property The Style tab specifies a Pen s style 401 E3Chart 7 Enable high alam Enable low alam Style tab Each field on Style tab has a corresponding property The available options are described on the next table Available options for Style tab OPTION DESCRIPTION Drawing style Specifies Pen s drawing type This field is equivalent to Pen s PenType property Dash style Specifies Pen s dash style This field is equivalent to Pen s PenStyle property E3Chart 402 OPTION DESCRIPTION Line thickness Determines line thickness in pixels This field is equivalent to Pen s Width property Background color Specifies line s background color This field is equivalent to Pen s BkColor property Documentation Specifies a documentation that can be displayed on this Legend This field is equivalent to Pen s DocString property Enable high alarm Enables a check ona high alarm This field is equivalent to Pen s EnableHighLimit property Its text box enables users to establish a limit for this alarm It is equivalent to Pen s HighLimit property Enable low alarm Enables a check on a low alarm This field is equivalent to Pen s EnableLowLimit property Its text box enables users to est
336. ording to the type of Viewer license in use on chapter Domains a server then determines whether a Viewer is in Full normal or Only restricted mode When an Only mode is on several restrictions apply to actions that can be written to a server In this case the following items are blocked by script error or by generating an error message e General writing on server s object properties via Viewer Links e General writing on server s object properties via Viewer scripts e Viewer s SetValue and ToggleValue methods including Load and Toggle Value Picks e Calling server s object methods via Viewer scripts please check for exceptions further on this topic e User administration via Viewer by using Viewer s UserAdministration method e Acknowledging alarms via E3Alarm e Using Viewer s LoadFormulaDlg LoadFormulaValues and LoadFormulaValuesQuiet methods The following items remain allowed when this mode is on e Reading server s object properties via Links or scripts e Calling methods considered non restricted for server objects via Viewer scripts These are Item all objects Refresh OPC Group FindUnit FindValue GetValueData and GetUnitData Formula GetAlarm Alarm Source GetE3 QueryFields GetADORecordSet and GetAsyncADORecordSet Query and GetObject ServerApplication e Changes in the Advise status of server Tags e Changing user s own password Viewer s ChangePassword method E3 Viewer and E3 WebViewer
337. orer and then selecting the Insert Viewer option In Domain mode right click the View Viewer and Frames item select the Insert Viewer in option and then the project s name 191 Viewer 6 1 Configuration By using Viewer properties users can specify Viewer configurations Communication errors and create Links or scripts 6 1 1 E3 Viewer On E3 Viewer tab users can configure Viewer s title Screen and zoom as well as other properties as explained next Viewer properties Panel Viewer a Item E3 Viewer Settings Communication errors Links Tite E3 Viewer Application Initial Screen or Frame InitialScreen Zoom v Enable scrollbar in Initial Screen Show Zoom menu when right dicking Keep Screens loaded on memory 8 aK Inactivity time minutes 5 Number of retries for user password confirmation 2 KeyPad T Show when a SetPoint gets focus Hide when pressing ENTER Hide when pressing ESC E3 Viewer tab Each field on E3 Viewer tab has a corresponding property The available options are Available options for E3 Viewer tab OPTION DESCRIPTION Title Determines Viewer s title This field is equivalent to the Viewer s Caption property Viewer 192 OPTION DESCRIPTION Initial Screen or Frame Determines Viewer s initial Screen or Frame By clicking the application opens the AppBrowser where users can select the initial Screen This field is equivalent to the Vi
338. ork servers ii VMware Shared Folders G Microsoft Terminal Services G Microsoft Windows Network ii Web Client Network o H E OPC Server search options Use standard and registry enumerators recommended C Use only the standard enumerator OPCENUM service C Use only the registry enumerator o oa Selecting an OPC Server The available options on the OPC Server search options item are described on the next table Available options for OPC Server search options item OPTION DESCRIPTION Use standard and registry enumerators E3 tries to search for Driver recommended specifications either via Windows Registry or via standard OPC enumerator OPCENUM Use only the standard enumerator E3 tries to search for Driver specifications OPCENUM service only via standard OPC enumerator OPCENUM Use only the registry enumerator E3 tries to search for Driver specifications only via Windows Registry By clicking OK an application displays Driver s data indicating path and server Drivers 156 name To activate OPC Driver communication click Activate Communication Close k Server objects Eg Drivers and OF Import tags ci Gur hl D Activate Communication eet m a JE Server information i ia Data a UJ Databases 34 Tag counting i Ss Alarms a re Explorer Insert gt Rename Edit X Delete A Find Replace
339. ormation about attributes of the currently selected audio format Configure audio Displays a window allowing to change the recording format and audio attributes Show summary when finish recording Enables or disables a window displayed when the recording process is finished 20 3 2 Timeline A Timeline allows visually tracking down and controlling playback clock Timeline x i i M i i 03 30 04 00 04 30 05 00 05 30 06 00 06 30 07 00 07 30 08 00 08 30 09 00 26 Feb 2013 26 Feb 2013 26 Feb 2013 26 Feb 2013 26 Feb 2013 26 Feb 2013 Timeline 433 E3Playback Options for this component are described on the following table Available options for Timeline DESCRIPTION Displays a time line Users can move this time line from side to side by clicking and dragging the mouse Zoom is controlled by the mouse wheel Moving it up is equivalent to zooming in Moving it down is equivalent to zooming out Users must first click time line background before trying to zoom in or out When pressing the CTRL key a zoom operation is performed three times faster Marks the current position of playback clock When playback is in Pause mode users can drag the cursor from side to side changing playback clock while dragging the cursor Itis always visible on the time line Displays periods of time that already have loaded data e Alight green line means that on this period data is fullyloaded A dark green line indicates that da
340. otocol to connect to an E3 Server s database queue 3 3 E3 Admin E3 Admin is the module responsible for monitoring and controlling an E3 Server It is depicted by the icon R on Windows Notification Area This module starts whenever a user logs in Windows or whenever an E3 Server service starts E3 Admin is also responsible for handling the following Domain control options via command line e3admin lt domain_name gt options or e3admin options lt domain_name gt Command line options are the following e start or start Starts a user informed Domain This option is not mandatory Even when itis notinformed this Domain is started e viewer or viewer Runs Viewer for the application Domains 84 e load Similar to the start option but it only loads a Domain without executing it It cannot be used with the viewer option e stop Stops the running Domain if there is one This option must be used alone e close Stops and closes the running Domain if there is one This option must be used alone e refresh Forces a Domain update without using a Viewer e help Shows a dialog box with command line options for E3 Admin as in the next figure z Admin x Options available E3Admin Opens E3 Admin and starts E3 Server if necessary E3Admin Start lt Domain file gt Runs the specified Domain E3Admin Start Viewer lt Domain file gt Runs the specified Domain and opens the Viewer E3Admi
341. pHeader with the DataField property equal to Day E3TimeStamp 4 Insert a SetPoint in the GroupFooter with the DataField property equal to the field name where the average will be calculated 5 Configure the following GroupHeader s SetPoint properties SummaryFunce 1 ddSFAvg e SummaryGroup GroupHeader1 SummaryRunning 1 ddSRGroup e SummaryType 3 ddSMSubTotal 22 3 6 8 Check Box A Check Box object inserts data into a Report which may or may not be bound to a Database Its value is a Boolean n a a CheckBox a E a g Check Box After inserted on a Report this object is named as CheckBox 22 3 6 9 Bar Code A Bar Code object allows generating a picture that converts a sequence of numbers and characters into a bar code This bar code is either a numerical or alphanumerical representation used to facilitate different processes This representation is decoded using scanners pens or optical reading devices 479 Reports Bar Code After inserted on a Report this object is named as BarCode 22 3 6 10 Page Break A Page Break object is a point where a page finishes and another one starts ina Report For example users can force a page break to ensure that a chapter title always begins on a new page If users work with documents having several pages and manually insert page breaks it may be necessary to frequently reinsert them as this document is edited Users can also prevent a page bre
342. path is used to determine existing objects in the Remote Domain The name of the dom file without the path is used to check whether remote connection is being performed with the right Domain at run time Thus if the name of the Domain loaded in the remote E3 Server is not correct the connection will not be completed and the remote objects will not be available Another possibility is to keep a copy of the Remote Domain on the Client machine and type the path of that copy in the Domain File field Hence E3 Studio will then use that local copy to determine which objects exist allowing offline work This copy must have the same name of the Remote Domain for this connection to work but it is not necessary to have the same directory hierarchy In addition for a connection among Domains all E3 Servers involved must run the same E3 version It is not possible for example connect to a Domain running E3 version 2 5 To enable an E3 Server to accept connections from other Domains that is to work as a Remote Domain server no further configuration is needed After correctly configuring these items just run all E3 Servers to establish remote connections NOTE For more information about Remote Domain configuration please check topic Domain Configuration Remote Domains 131 Domains 3 11 2 Licenses Both the E3 Server running the Client Domain and the one running the Server Domain must have specific licenses for Remote Domains
343. pedfies tis Field s size Source specifies this Alarm s data source Propagate Forces an immediate update on all alarms thatinherit this User Field s value whenever it receives a forced value orif its Link changes eo Td ds a User Field at the end of this list Kx Removes the last User Field on this list User Fields can only be included or excluded at the end of this list Excluding User Fields from this list reflects on all Alarm Areas and Sources related to this Alarm Server but only if the removed Fields were not configured with a forced value or a Alarms 300 Link Otherwise these Fields still appear on Alarm Areas and Sources The next figure shows an Analog Alarm with User Fields inherited from an Alarm Server TOPES UD ANGIOGAIGITIOOUICE Item Source User fields Formatting Links Analog User fields UserField1 Inherited Inherits from upper area UserField2 Inherited Inherits from upper area UserField3 Inherited Inherits from upper area UserField4 Inherited Inherits from upper area The sources of user fields for this alarm can be redefined here Blank sources keep the source defined on the Alarm Server or on the Areas hierarchically above them Inherited User Fields 13 3 Alarm Sources All information relative to alarm conditions is defined in Alarm Sources as well as event types that must be generated for each condition Alarm Sources always contain an alarm expre
344. perties List and perform the necessary adjustments For more information on properties please check the Scripts Reference Manual 4 3 3 OPC Folder An OPC Folder defines groups or subfolders for a better organization of variables Each OPC Folder can be renamed as needed and new Folders can be inserted inside one another If an OPC Folder is disabled at run time its whole content is deactivated To use this resource follow this procedure Drivers 162 1 Right click an OPC Group and select the Insert New Folder option Jy Drivers and OPC B Driveri OPCDrivert H a Data objects HJ Databases Tag counting Rename 3a Copy Cut amp OPC Block OPC Tag X Delete A Find Replace Object Counting W Import id Export G Document Scripts Check SR Analog Alarm AB Dead band Alarm Ag Digital Alarm D Discrete Alarm AB Rate of Change Alarm Edit links Copy Links S8 Show in Editor ME Show in Explorer o Properties Inserting a new OPC Folder 4 3 4 OPC Tag An OPC Tag is an object that reads or writes values on a device A Tag reading is performed automatically by an OPC Server with a scan time defined by an OPC Group where it is inserted To use this resource follow these procedures 1 Right click an OPC Group and select the Insert OPC Tag option 163 Drivers S bago Data aa fJ Databases Tag counting
345. perties of the existing item e 2 ignorealways Always ignores the item being imported e 3 createalways Always creates a new item auto incrementing its name In case this variable is not defined the askalways value is then applied This option is not used in the export process Defines which object classes must be imported or exported This filteris not recursive thatis if an object class that may have child objects is included these child objects are not automatically included It cannot be used along with the exclude variable Only what is defined in this variable can be imported or exported Defines which object classes must not be imported or exported This filteris not recursive thatis if an object class that may have child objects is excluded these child objects are not automatically excluded It cannot be used along with the include variable Only what is defined in this variable can be imported or exported NOTE Asemicolon character cannot be used as a full or partial name of a column neither can it be used as a full or partial name for an identifier This limitation is due to the fact that a semicolon defines a comment in an INI file Thus a variable created in either Columns or Types section to define an identifier that has a semicolon cannot be read correctly Example Header header ObjectType Name DocString N1 B1 N2 B2 N3 B3 N4 B4 Scan AllowRead AllowWrite types Tag Block Element Configuration sep
346. perty Properties in bold are already on the list TextFont type properties 2 6 5 Importing SCADA Objects to E3 Starting with Eli pse SCADA version 2 29 a new functionality was incorporated allowing users to import Tags alarms and certain Elipse SCADA s Screen objects into E3 2 6 5 1 I O Tags PLC and Block Elipse SCADA s I O Tags are imported individually for each I O Driver To do so open an application in Elipse SCADA and follow these procedures 1 In Elipse SCADA s Organizer open the Drivers folder and select a Driver 2 Click Export E3 Studio 64 Driver Configuration Scripts Tag List Cross Reference I PEI gal Application Nene Tags Screens Driverl Alarms ae i e Recipes Description E Historic Elipse Driver Modicon Modbus v2 07 Build 1 El Reports Eh Drivers E Driveri Driver Location H Remotedpplications Browse d Databases c windows system32 modbus dll ae eloa h Watcher Steeplechase Parameters Driver Help l OPCServers PI P2 P3 P4 UserList fo fj jo fo Advanced V Abort on error Extra I Hide mouse during communication Export I Retry failed communications Close Exporting Drivers 3 Selecta file s location and name to generate In addition to a file with Tag settings a new file is generated with the same name followed by an _Alarms suffix This file is used later when importing ala
347. plays the total amount of points on the real time part Status messages for the historical part Info Query Name waiting Waiting for query initialization This means that some query s change or update request has been detected Info Query Name initializing This queryis starting At this time there is a validation of Pen fields Error Query Name Initialization fail Before loading query data an E3Chart must have information about what fields are available on its query to perform a link between these fields and the XField and YField properties Thus a failure occurred when retrieving these fields which might be a network or SQL syntax error Error Field not found XField Field Name The field informed in the XField property was not found on this query Check if this field is selected on query s edition screen or on SQL code Error Field not found YField Field Name The field informed in the YField property was not found on the query Check if this field is selected on query s edition screen or on SQL code Error Query Name Error Message Indicates that there is an error on this query and data cannot be retrieved Possible messages displayed in Error Message are described on the table below the historical part from a server Error Invalid query QueryName Query The queryindicated by Pen s QueryName Specific messages for query failures Failed when adding data Cannot load data into memory
348. plitter s position ona Frame This field is equivalent to the SplitDockPosition property Determines the value to attribute to a Frame Itis only visually effective if modified in a Main Splitter This field is equivalent to the SplitValue property Some Frame or Splitter properties can be configured via Properties List with no need for creating scripts To configure any property locate it on Properties List and perform the necessary adjustments For further information please check the Scripts Reference Manual Frames 190 CHAPTER Viewer The Viewer is the object performing application viewing With it users can view Screens at run time as well as manipulate the application It can run from anywhere on the network with access to an E3 Server It is not necessary to copy the application to other Viewers because Screens and bitmaps are downloaded at run time as needed There can only be one Viewer per Domain 1 8 Domain Project 1 i Objects Library w EB Projectl prj E Insert Frame in lt New File gt gt Server objects A Find Replace Hy Explorer Z Object Counting J Document Scripts A Check Edit links Load All Objects Close All Objects g Save All Objects Viewer in Domain mode To create a Viewer in the project follow these procedures 1 Check if there is already a Viewer in the Domain or insert a new one by right clicking the project s namein Expl
349. position 3 If needed change the object s rotation center indicated by a green circle 211 Screens and Screen Objects 7 3 4 Tab Order among Objects Establishes a browsing order via TAB key among two or more objects at run time that is the order in which the objects gain focus To enable this option follow these procedures 1 Select a Screen and click Tab Order on the Screen toolbar 2 Click the objects in the desired order A number with the browsing order then appears on the upper left side of each object 3 When the Domain runs navigation among these objects are then performed in that specified order Option 1 Option 2 Option 3 Tab order To keep the initial order of the objects follow these procedures 1 After creating an object on a Screen click Tab Order 2 With the CTRL key pressed click the second to last object 3 Release the CTRL key and then click the last object the previously created object Screens and Screen Objects 212 7 3 5 Group or Ungroup It allows users to turn more than one object into a single one with specific properties To use this resource follow these procedures 1 Select on Screen the objects that will be part of the group 2 Click Group Ti A new object is then created This operation can be performed in cascade and a group can contain any objects including other groups 3 To undo this action click Ungroup Fi 4 To editan object contained in a group
350. possible If Historic data is indispensable on playback users must follow these recommendations Configure the UserTable property to False if this property remains in True the Fields table of this Historic is not generated and this Historic is not recognized by playback Place each Tag on a separate field do not use expressions on field s source for example Create an index for E3TimeStamp field Without this index Historic queries get slow turning playback impracticable Use tables with a few fields and if possible add an individual index for each field mainly for fields with little variation Configure the CompressedTable property to True and use the DeadBand property on this Historic The next figure shows how to configure an E3TimeStamp field index 447 E3 Playback Y Add Index Ea Index Definition Index name E3TimeStamp The index fields contain unique data Select the fields used in this index Field Name _Order Type _ C E3TimeStamp 0 Ascending 3 fdDateTime O Field 0 Ascending 1 fdinteger C Field2 0 Ascending 1 fdinteger O Field3 0 Ascending 1 fdinteger O Field4 0 Ascending 1 fdinteger Change field order Move Down Cancel Index definition for an E3TimeStamp field 20 5 4 Licensing Elipse Software provides two playback packages according to its tools e Basic Playback e Advanced Playback It is Basic Playback plus Video Recording and Screen Capture tools
351. pplication open Viewer click English then Application Preview and finally click the Stopwatch icon Then the playback Screen should be displayed 427 E3Playback 4 m pjm lt lt o lt o gt ax 2013 02 14 10 46 34 594 BAR A 08 00 0820 08 40 0900 0920 0940 10 00 1020 1040 11 00 1120 Lsa dii a Sa Sega 11 40 12 00 12 20 12 40 K 1 1300 1320 13 40 siai LLLA Date time i i m _ _ Next Event Dados Saneamento ETA ani Erro Tag na lt Empty gt Ruim 0 Dados Saneamento ETA ani Erro Tag n lt Empty gt 00 00 00 Ruim 0 Dados Saneamento ETA ani Erro Tag n lt Empty gt 00 00 00 Ruim 0 Dados Saneamento ETA ani Erro Tag na lt Empty gt 00 00 00 Ruim 0 Dados Saneamento ETA ani Erro Tag na lt Empty gt 00 00 00 Ruim 0 Dados Saneamento ETAani Erro Tag na lt Empty gt 00 00 00 Ruim 0 alt Dados Saneamento ETA ani histSane OK lt Empty gt 00 00 00 Ruim 0 ul Dados Saneamento ETA ani histSane OK lt Empty gt 00 00 00 Ruim 0 h Dados Saneamento ETA ani histSane OK lt Empty gt 00 00 00 Ruim 0 z Playback Screen 7 Click IIto enter Online mode The first playback data is then loaded and playback clock is positioned on the center of available data E3Playback 428 Yee We He a oo bE lt o lt o gt o gt EE 2013 02 14 12 53 14 594 Baza i i 08 00 08 20 08 40 09 00
352. property equivalent to the TableName propert Discard data from the main table Enables or disables discarding data from the main table Data is considered old according to the Discard data older than option This field is equivalent to the EnableDiscard property 341 Storage OPTION DESCRIPTION Discard data older than Perform discard every Move discarded data to the backup table Discard from backup data older than Create Table Determines a time interval minutes hours days or months during which data is kept on the main table If data is older than the interval on this option it is discarded This field is equivalent to the Discardinterval property and the field to select a time unit for this interval is equivalent to the DiscardTimeUnit property Determines a discard interval minutes hours days or months for old data ona table This field is equivalent to the VerificationUnit property Enables ordisables storing discarded data on the backup table This field is equivalent to the EnableBackupTable property Determines a maximum time interval minutes hours days or months for data on the backup table until itis discarded regardless of the time data remains on the main table For example to keep data for 24 months on the main table and six more months on the backup table this option s value must be 30 months This interval must be longer than the one configured in the Discard data older than o
353. ption of the main table This field is equivalent to the BackupDiscardinterval property and the field to select a time unit for this interval is equivalent to the Database This option is also available by right clicking a Storage objectin Organizer and selecting the Create DB Structure option After defining table configurations click Create Table This action creates a table structure on the database The table structure of a Storage is similar to a Historic table with a table of definitions a main data table and a backup table if selected For users to identify externally that itis a compressed table check if the _Fields table was created Storage 342 Storage Fields Bg oO O FieldID O FieldName O FieldQuality O FieldDescription O FieldSource O FieldType O FieldEU O FieldLowEng C FieldHighEng O FieldDeadBand O FieldDeadBandUnit O FieldMinRecTime O FieldMaxRecTime O FieldSize O Field VARTYPE O FieldScanTimeMs Fields table This table contains the fields described next _Fields table fields FIELD DESCRIPTION FieldDeadBand Dead band FieldDeadBandUnit Dead band unit As a percentage of the previous value oras a percentage of engineering limits a fixed value Fieu sd ngineeringunit O FieldID Index ofa field registered on a Storage stored automatically Tag s chart in milliseconds FieldSize C SNCOC field ssize o O FieldSource Link used by this field to obtain
354. query is executed In this case DBServer 2 Specify the Table property a query table hereitis Data 3 Configure the Name property keep the original name Query1 Reports 482 22 4 3 Fields Setup In this example four temperatures are created and stored on a Historic object and our Report focuses on these temperatures In this case all values read from this Historic object are printed using this Report To read data froma Database the ideal area is the Detail Area as itis automatically repeated as many times as required This way five SetPoint objects must be inserted in this area These SetPoints can be linked to a SetPoint that is configured using its DataField property Here the following values are used e Field1 E3Timestamp e Field2 Temperaturel as configured on the Database e Field3 Temperature2 22 4 4 Preview Itis possible to view this Report by clicking Preview LA available in its edition area To do so itis necessary to point out the project s Database server to the MDB file in the folder where this example was saved 22 5 Usage Examples The next sections contain some examples of using Report s features 22 5 1 Setting Up a Bitmap Path When Printing To use this feature write the following script on the OnFormat event of a PageHeader or ReportHeader Section Sub OnFormat Report Sections ReportHeader Controls Image2 Figure _ LoadFigure C mail test bmp End Sub 22 5 2 Se
355. r Alarm Table Generation To specify configurations for an Alarm Server right click this object and select the Properties option On Configuration tab users can specify Database settings and determine fields to generate an alarm table Alarms Ala properties DB AlarmServer e Item Configuration User fields Links V Store alarms on a database Database Server O Table name Alarms V Discard data from the main table Discard data older than 1 Month s ka Perform discard every 1 Month s 7 V Move discarded data to the backup table Discard from backup data older than 12 Month s x Fields configuration Define which alarm event fields will be recorded Fields Database structure creation Click the button to create the alarm tables Create table Configuration tab Each field on Configuration tab has a corresponding property The available options on this tab are described on the next table Available options for Configuration tab Store alarms on a database Enables or disables alarm data storage on a Database This field is equivalent to the Logging propert Table name Defines the name of an alarm table This field is equivalent to the TableName property Database Server Defines which Database server stores alarm data This field is equivalent to the DataSource property Alarms 292 OPTION DESCRIPTION Discard data from the main table Discard data older than Pe
356. r E3 Server limits as configured on a protection device For example if a protection device has ten Viewer licenses and a group specifies five connections only these five licenses are used However if a protection device has five Viewer licenses and a group specifies ten connections protection device s limit is obeyed and only five connections are used Viewer group configurations should be performed preferably when a Domain is stopped In case they are performed while a Domain is running they have no effect until all Viewers are disconnected 105 Domains 3 9 4 Events Recording Tab There are two different event categories System Default and Manual events System Default Events are events automatically generated by E3 which may have their registration enabled or disabled individually e User login or logout e User password change e User login failure e User database change e User account blocking e Domain start or stop Domain change insert remove enable and disable projects and libraries change Domain configuration e Domain update when users apply changes performed in projects via E3 Studio e Manual switching of a Hot Standby server Manual Events are application defined events These events are generated by user scripts by using the Application TrackEvent method These events can be generated both in Viewer and in Server E3Run Viewer is a manual event generator Use the Application TrackEvent method
357. r in an E3 Studio application this object s viewis opened as seen on the next figure 153 Drivers b OPCDriverl X 4 gt X gt to 3 ie Name Item ID Scan Value Qual Timestamp Value unscale ea E 39 OPCGroup 1 1000 m Folder1 amp OPCTag1 Mall 28 0 12 1899 00 00 00 000 Nall amp OPCBlock1 28 0 12 1899 00 00 00 000 M 4 gt Design A Scripts OPC Driver s view The available options on this view are described on the next table Available options for OPC Driver s view ICON OPTION DESCRIPTION Adds a new Group to a Driver a Tag Block or Folder to a Group oran Element to a Block Removes the selected S or Activate deactivate Activates or deactivates communication Driver communication Imports Tags to this OPC Driver Displays a window with Driver s settings 5 Displays the total amount counting of Tags in this Driver 4 3 1 Configuration An identification for other objects belonging to an OPC Driver can be inserted manually or else automatically retrieved from an OPC Server To do so open Driver properties window by right clicking it and then selecting the OPC Driver tab Drivers 154 Activate Driver Information OPC Driver tab Type an Address and a Server ID and then click Select The following window is then displayed 155 Drivers OPC Servers mx Select a local or network OPC server Local servers ElipseSCADA OPCSvr 1 Netw
358. rB PARAMS p1 2 p2 text p3 1 1 2001 Viewer s help dialog box 24 2 3 Via Start Menu To execute a client application users can access E3 Viewer available on the Start Programs Elipse E3 Viewer menu E3 then shows the following dialog box so that users can inform an application s server path E3 Viewer and E3 WebViewer 512 Starting E3 Viewer Er E3 Viewer version 4 6 122 Copyright C 1999 2014 Elipse Software Ltda Type the E3 Server path Local Server Network Server Samples DomainServer 192 168 0 23 SVR1 SVR2 Start Viewer in read only mode Ree E3 Viewer If E3 Server is in the same machine as E3 Viewer select the Local Server option If they are in different machines select the Network Server option and inform either a name or an IP address of the machine running E3 Server If E3 Server is available in a port other than the default 6515 inform this port number in the Network Server field right after IP number separated by a colon To connect in Read Only mode select the Start Viewer in read only mode option 24 3 Viewer Logs E3 generates logs in ETL Event Trace Log format These log files are managed by an Elipse tool called Elipse Event Log Viewer available with E3 installation With this tool users can view files and manage the space they occupy on disk among other tasks For more information on Elipse Event Log Viewer please check Elipse Event
359. rackets such as DOMAIN PATH In this case the same rules applied for naming objects are valid A Domain name needs brackets if it Starts with a character thatis nota letter with no diacritical marks nor e Contains any character that is nota letter with no diacritical marks nor a number 0 9 nor an underscore 3 11 4 User Permissions Similar to what happens with Viewer access to objects froma Remote Domain can be limited to a Read Only mode Whenever this situation occurs the same type of access limitations applied to a Viewer Only applies here However unlike Viewer in this case the control is performed per user and not per IP or license To do so users can use the user configuration on permission Remote Domain write access which is on the Domain security item Domains 132 Users Groups Security items Domain mig Viewer H E Screens nM Alarms Ee O Run Domain C Stop Domain C Edit Domain X This command is GRANTED to this user regardless of the groups to P l Disable permissions check ok Cancel User Permissions With that it may be necessary that the Remote Domain connection specify a user to have complete access to Domain objects This user must be specified in the User in Domain field via the Use this account option on Remote Domains tab of the Client Domain configuration There users must specify both login and password of an existing user in the Domain
360. rding Projects Servers Remote Domains Properties Enable system events recording c li al E User login User USER has logged in SESSION in machine MACHINE User logout User USER has finished his her session of SESSION in machi Password change Password of user USER has changed Login fail User login USER in SESSION in MACHINE failed CAU User database change User USER has changed user database Blocked account User account USER has been blocked Domain started Domain has been started by user USER in SESSION in machi Domain dosed Domain has been closed by user USER in SESSION in machin Domain updated Domain has been updated by user USER in SESSION in mach Domain changed Domain has been changed by user USER in SESSION in mac Manual server switch Standby server activated by user USER in SESSION in machi Lox J ome Events recording tab The available options for this tab are displayed on the next table Available options for Events recording tab po OPTION DESCRIPTION Enable system events recording Enables event recording in E3 Automatically select application database Enable this option to let E3Run pick up a Data Server to store data If an application contains only one Data Server this object is used If there is more than one itis recommended to use the Use this database option Use this database Enable this option to sp
361. recision To pass parameters more easily users can add a user function to a Database that converts DateTime values into Float values according to the next example CREATE FUNCTION E3GETFLOATVALUE dDate datetime RETURNS FLOAT AS BEGIN RETURN CAST dDate AS float END There are some usage examples for these functions in the next topics 15 2 4 1 E3LastValue Returns the last value stored on a Database for a given Tag Formal description is E3LastValue strTableName VARCHAR 1 strFieldName VARCHAR 1 strFilter VARCHAR 5 type int bQuality int Storage 348 Where strTableName Table name strFieldName Field name strFilter Filter options for this value if needed e type Data type 0 String 1 Bit or Integer or 2 Analog bQuality If not equal to O zero it only includes Tags with Good quality Returns a single row query with E3TimeStamp Quality and FieldValue fields Usage example EXECUTE E3LastValue TableXxX OTeyemey U9 2 Gl 15 2 4 2 E3Archive Returns a value stored relative to an instant according to the ArchivedValue function It is used for Prev 0 Next 2 and ExactTime 3 sub types Formal description is E3Archive iSubType amity strTableName VARCHAR 1 dData float strFieldName VARCHAR 1 strFilter VARCHAR 5 type int bQuality int Where e iSubType Function sub type 0 Previous 2 Next or 3 Exact instant e Data Tim
362. red by a series of N parameters from N1 to N4 which vary according to an I O Driver to use To use this resource follow these Drivers 146 procedures 1 Insert an1 O Tagin a project by right clicking a Driver and selecting the Insert I O Tag option Browse DLL Settings gt Activate Communication j Zp Tag counting Rename o CO Eda C New Folder Analog Ala X Delete 3p P AB Dead band Alarm A Find Replace AQ Digital Alarm E Object Counting Discrete Alarm WH Impor AB Rate of Change Alarm iW Export i G Document Scripts i Check Edit links Copy Links S Show in Editor ME Show in Explorer F Properties Inserting an I O Tag 2 Studio then opens up a window asking for a number of Tags to create in this Driver as well as their names This name is auto incremented and if this option remains blank Tags are created with a default name 147 Drivers Adding IOTag Quantity cl Adding I O Tags In casea devicein use to collect data informs Tag values that need to be converted users can use Tag scales which are basically a specification of a linear conversion between two different bases To do so users must enable Tag s EnableScaling property and inform DeviceLow and DeviceHigh parameters via their respective properties which are respectively low and high limits of device s data and also inform EULow and EUHigh par
363. rent methodologies RGB red green and blue components or HSL hue saturation and lightness components Screens and Screen Objects 224 New Current Customized color RGB scale describes a color by mixing three primary colors as follows e Red Indicates the amount of primary red component in color composition e Green Indicates the amount of primary green component in color composition e Blue Indicates the amount of primary blue component in color composition Each one of these three color elements can have an intensity degree that ranges from 0 zero to 255 HSL scale describes a color by mixing three primary components as follows e Hue Specifies a color distribution within the visible light spectrum e Saturation Indicates the intensity of a certain hue A highly saturated hue has a more intense color while a less saturated hue seems grayer e Lightness Indicates the amount of light applied to a color The higher the luminance the lighter the color Conversely the lower the luminance the darker the color These elements can also have their intensity degree ranging from 0 zero to 255 Thus specify a value for each item according to the color tone or else select the desired color directly with the mouse pointer on window scales 225 Screens and Screen Objects Numerical value for each color is obtained using the following formula Red 256 Green 256 1 Blue 256 2 Thatis Red
364. rform discard every Move discarded data to the backup table Discard from backup data older than Enables ordisables discarding data from the main table Data is considered old according to the Discard data older than option This field is equivalent to the EnableDiscard property Determines a time interval minutes hours days or months during which data is kept on the main table If data is older than the interval on this option it is discarded This field is equivalent to the Discardinterval property and the field to select a time unit for this interval is equivalent to the DiscardTimeUnit property Performs an alarm verification according to the period specified in this field minutes hours days or months This field is equivalent to the Verificationinterval property and the field to select a time unit for this interval is equivalent to the VerificationUnit property Enables ordisables storing discarded data on a secondary table backup table This field is equivalent to the EnableBackupTable property Determines a maximum time interval minutes hours days or months for data on the backup table until itis discarded regardless of the time data remains on the main table For example to keep data for 24 months on the main table and six more months on the backup table this option s value must be 30 months This interval must be longer than the one configured in the Discard data older than option of the main table
365. right click the object and then select the Edit Group option NOTE Itis possible to adjust objects inside a group to the nearest pixel the Snap to Pixel effect by using the key combination CTRL SPACEBAR In this case the effect is applied to every object inside the group and it can be undone by using the key combination CTRL Z 7 3 6 Animation A feature that applies movement to an object at run time which is available on the Screen toolbar The available types of movements are the following BB e m Linear Slider The object receiving this feature performs linear movements according to the configuration of object s properties To enable this option follow these procedures 1 Select the object on Screen and click Ti Linear Slider 2 With the mouse pointer enable object s orientation configurations E m s a a a a Linear Slider e D Rotation Slider The object receiving this feature performs circular movements according to the object s rotation center and its angle To enable this option follow these procedures 213 Screens and Screen Objects 1 Select the object on Screen and click mi Rotation Slider 2 When the objectis created its default rotation center is defined as its center with a zero degree horizontal inclination relative to that center At that time the vertexes of the selected object are indicated by small circles and its center by two circumscribed circles 3 When moving the mou
366. rline Italic Strikeout Sample Text Font tab The available options refer to font type size and effects 331 E3Alarm 14 2 Runtime Behavior An E3Alarm has a series of features that only apply at run time These features are explained on the next topics 14 2 1 Viewing Alarms At run time system alarms can be viewed on an E3Alarm Condition Name Active Condition Enabled Digital Rate0fChange E3Alarm at run time Among the alarms that meet the configured filters active or unacknowledged ones are displayed on an E3Alarm Usually these alarms can be divided in two cases e f Alarm Source s Need Ack option is set to False this alarm is considered acknowledged since its activation with no need to acknowledge it In this case this alarm is visible until it leaves its active condition e If Alarm Source s Need Ack option is set to True users can acknowledge this alarm either before or after its variable leaves this alarm s condition In both cases this alarm only leaves E3Alarm list when both conditions are met The BannerMode property when set to True allows viewing only a single alarm message on an E3Alarm object The displayed message depends on the configuration performed on Sorting tab 14 2 2 Alarm Acknowledgement In its default configuration whenever users right click an E3Alarm a contextual menu with the Acknowledgment option is then displayed By selecting this option the
367. rm configurations to E3 To import these Tags to E3 follow these procedures 1 Insertan I O Driver in Organizer 2 Renamethis Driver to the same Driver s name used in Elipse SCADA application so that all Driver s Tag references are correctly imported later 3 Right click the I O Driver and select the Import item 4 On thelist of file types select the Elipse SCADA files e2f option and then select the file previously exported without the Alarms suffix There is no need to select a template 65 E3 Studio Look in J Bipse SCADA e e By A de Name Date modified Type RP i Applet 1 9 2013 3 36PM File folder Recent Places J Drivers 1 9 2013 3 36PM _File folder J HasP 1 9 2013 3 36PM _File folder Desktop orc 1 9 2013 3 36PM _File folder a _ tags e2f 2 21 2013 1 39PM_ E2F File coal _ tags_Alarms e2f 2 21 2013 1 40PM _ E2F File Libraries A Computer Network File name Files of type Elipse SCADA Files E2F Template Importing I O Tags 2 6 5 2 RAM and Demo Tags To export RAM and Demo Tags follow these procedures 1 In Elipse SCADA s Organizer click the Tags item 2 Click Export E3 Studio 66 Tag Group Cross Reference a Application Tags New Group tagDema fas q tagRAM New Tag Screens Alarms Report Main tag group l e Recipes E Historic Export Reports Eh Drivers E Driver R
368. rm1 properties DB DiscreteAlarmSource E3 Item Source Formatting Links Discrete x iess f Subcondition Subcondition Empty A Subcondition2 Subcondition2 Empty 4 uli p Delay ms 0 Return message Discrete tab The available options on this tab are described on the next table Available options for Discrete tab OPTION DESCRIPTION eo y s a new Sub condition to this alarm Map all subconditions Allows mapping and syncing Alarm Sub conditions from semantics available in the source object This feature is currently supported only by Elipse Power server objects therefore this button remains disabled by default in Elipse E3 Name ____fsub ondision s name ____ sia O Alarms 310 this alarm occurs or not condition is active S behavior It can assume values 0 Alarm 1 Event or 2 Return Severity Sub condition s severity type It can assume values 0 High 1 Medium or 2 Low Need Ack Indicates whether this Sub condition needs acknowledgment or not Delay ms Specifies a delaytime in milliseconds When this value is equal to 0 zero default no delayis applied Return message Allows specifying a text displayed to users when this alarm is notin an active condition 13 4 Alarm Filter The Alarm Filter object allows specifying alarm filters just like an E3Alarm except that it does not have a graphical representation that can be displayed on a
369. rty locate it on Properties List and perform the necessary adjustments For more information on properties please check the Scripts Reference Manual 4 4 OPC UA Driver An OPC UA Driver implements a communication with an OPC UA server that implements historical readings such as EPM This object can be used as a data source for a Query object To insert an OPC UA Driver in a project right click this project s name in Explorer and select the Insert I O Driver OPC UA option In 169 Drivers Domain mode right click the Server objects Drivers and OPC item select the Insert I O Driver OPC UA in option and then a project s name ay iy Data ob Insert I O Driver in gt a Sir Databa k Insert OPC Client Driverin gt te amp Alms Ir Insert OPC UA Driver in Ja Projecti prj aa te Find Replace lt New File gt Object Counting Document Scripts Check S EM Edit links Load All Objects Close All Objects g Save All Objects Inserting an OPC UA Driver in Domain mode Some properties of an OPC UA Driver can be configured using Properties List without creating scripts for this To configure a property locate it on Properties List and perform the required adjustments For more information please check the Scripts Reference Manual 4 4 1 Configuration Configuring an OPC UA Driver is similar to configuring an OPC Driver To configure it right click this object and select the Select ser
370. ructure is displayed In case of any error users should try to revise their settings 7 To viewthis Historic in action saving data to a SQL Server create a Screen insert an E3Browser and configure it to access the Database Server as previously explained in the Historic and configure this E3Browser to be automatically updated every 10 seconds for example 8 Oncethis configuration is finished execute the project After some time executing E3Browser starts displaying data sent to this server 9 Users can consolidate data to display in E3 and stored in the server by using an E3Browser s Query object and SQL Query Analyzer To do so create different queries on the Database and edit them both in the Query object and in Query Analyzer The results must be the same if Domain is stopped and similar if Domain is running This difference is due to constant Database updates when a Domain is running To edit queries in a Query object enable the Enable SQL direct edition option 12 3 3 Using ADODB for Access via Script To access a SQL Server via scripts use an ADODB connection A connection String for this type of Database is defined as the following template DRIVER SQL Server SERVER server UID login_id PWD password Database 284 Using this type of access must be restricted to cases when there is no other solution E3 provides features that aim at minimizing database access via script However on some circumstances this feature
371. rver s LogTrackingEvent method Tracking Simple etc This field s limit is 100 characters when stored ona Database FormattedValue Shows Alarm Source s formatted value for its event This field s limit is 100 characters when stored on a Database NOTE This is a read only field FullAlarmSourceName Stores Alarm Source s full path including Areas Alarm Configuration and possible Folders where it might be inserted For example Folder1 AlarmConfig1 Area1 AlarmSource1 mooo o o o o en a on ne a momentitenters an alarm condition InTimeDbl Similar to the previous field Itis used to store a Double data type for Oracle or SQL Server databases Message Text configured on an Alarm Source or specified by another event for example by using Alarm Server s LogTrackingEvent method This field s limit is 200 characters when stored on a Database OutTime Stores value s date and time at the moment itleaves an alarm condition or zero 12 30 1899 if this alarm has not left its active condition yet OutTimeDbl Similar to the previous field Itis used to store a Double data type for Oracle or SQL Server databases Alarms 296 OPTION O DESCRIPTION Quality of Alarm Source s value at the moment of an event This field assumes the following numerical values e 0 63 Bad quality e 64 127 Uncertain quality e 128 191 Undefined value e 192 255 Good quality If this eventis not an alarm for example b
372. rverPool property to False so that it runs outside this Pool in an exclusive OServer process On the Properties tab of a Domain configuration users can control the maximum number of OServer processes in this Pool as well as the maximum number of Drivers that run on each OServer Behavior options for a Pool of OServer Processes DRIVERS PER PROCESS MAXIMUM NUMBER OF POOL S BEHAVIOR PROCESSES As application Drivers are activated an OServer process is created for each Driver up to the maximum number M After that every new Driver activated is then added to Pool s lODriver that contains less Drivers As application Drivers are activated E3 then adds them to a Pool s OServer process that has not reached the maximum number N of Drivers running in it If all Pool processes reached their maximum limit then a new OServeris added to that Pool Drivers 144 DRIVERS PER PROCESS MAXIMUM NUMBER OF POOL S BEHAVIOR PROCESSES As application Drivers are activated E3 then adds them to a Pool s OServer process that has not yet reached the maximum number N of Drivers running in it If all Pool processes reached their maximum limit this behavior then depends on the amount of processes in that Pool and if the number of Pool processes is less than the maximum M then a new process is added to that Pool Otherwise a Driveris added to the process with less Drivers running NOTE In this mode the maximum number of
373. rvers are objects responsible for executing system variables such as Internal Demo and Timer Tags as well as XObject instances To use this feature follow this procedure 1 Right click the project in Organizer and then select the Insert Data Server in option Domain Project 1 H E Drivers and OPC ei J Databases Eal er Projectl prj Find Replace New File gt Object Counting Document Scripts Check SEMB Edit links Load All Objects Close All Objects g Save All Objects Inserting a Data Server 11 1 Data Folder A Data Folder defines groups to organize variables If necessary new Folders can be inserted into one another To use this resource follow this procedure 1 Right click a Data Server and select the Insert Panel Data Folder option Data Server 266 Close Rename Edit X Delete A Find Replace Object Counting WH Import i Export E Document Scripts M Check Edit links Copy Links Show in Editor E Show in Explorer library Standard R Analog Alarm AB Dead band Alarm AB Digital Alarm D Discrete Alarm AB Rate of Change Alarm m Counter Tag a ora rode v Demo Tag Internal Tag Timer Tag A Properties Inserting a Data Folder 11 2 Counter Tag A Counter Tag is an object that counts time in seconds up to a pre determined value or
374. s Alarms item select the Insert Alarm Configuration in option and then the project s name Alarms 286 a Settings H Objects Library Ef Server objects f Drivers and OPC ni igy Data objects i W Databases E y Explorer Insert Alarm Server in n Find Replace lt New File gt Object Counting Document Scripts Check a lB Edit links Load All Objects Close All Objects i Save All Objects Inserting an Alarm Configuration 13 1 1 Alarm Areas Alarm Areas allow grouping a set of Alarm Sources as well as other Areas This makes managing operating and monitoring a set of related alarm sources easier such as e Filtering a visible set of alarms in the summary e Enabling or disabling a set of Alarm Sources e Acknowledging a set of Alarm Sources e Checking the total amount of active or unacknowledged alarms of a set of Alarm Sources If needed new Areas can be inserted within others To insert this object follow this procedure 1 Right click the Alarm Configuration object or an Area object in Explorer mode and select the Insert Area option In Domain mode right click the Alarm 287 Alarms Configuration object and select the Insert Area item a os jE AA Analog Alarm Edit AB Dead band Alarm AQ Digital Alarm A Discrete Alarm Find Replace AB Rate of Change Alarm Object Counting Import Export Document Scripts Check Delete
375. s 100 characters when stored on a Database Enabled Determines whether alarm check is enabled or not This field assumes values 0 Alarm source s check disabled or 1 Alarm source s check enabled EventCategory Category of this event For alarms this field may assume the following values DeadBand Dead Band type Alarm Source Digital Digital type Alarm Source Level Analog type Alarm Source RateOfChange Rate Of Change type Alarm Source For other events for example when using Alarm Server s LogTrackingEvent method it may assume user defined values This field s limit is 100 characters when stored ona Database EventCLSID Unique identifier for alarm s lifetime When a new alarm occurs on a Source a new EventCLSID number is then generated Thus it keeps the same CLSID on the Database while itis still on the list of active and unacknowledged alarms perme Pa and time of an Alarm Source s value at the time of an event 295 Alarms OPTION O DESCRIPTION EventTimeDbl Similar to the previous field It is used to store a Double data type for Oracle or SQL Server databases EventTimeUTC Date an time of an Alarm Source s value at the time of an event relative to Greenwich time Its value is the same as the EventTime field and itis keptin E3 for compatibility reasons EventType Type of an event For alarm events it is always Condition For other events it can be a user defined text such as when using Alarm Se
376. s an object Ungrou group 7 Inserts a tool forlinear sliding Inserts a tool for rotation Brings an object to the Bring to Front front inside a group ALT Sends an object to the Send to Back back inside a group ALT Brings an object forward Bring Forward inside a group ALT Sends an object Send Backward backward inside a group ALT PAGE DOWN a a level layers E3 Studio 22 object ind Rectangle lay rs Available options for Draw toolbar COMMAND ACTION Defines object s Background Color background color Foreground Color Defines objects foreground color Border Coloi Defines object s border color Border Style Defines object s border style Border Thickness Defines object s border thickness Fill Style Defines object s fill style Align Left Aligns objects to the left COMMAND ACTION Align Top Aligns objects to the top 7 Aligns objects to the all objects 5 Applies the same height all selected objects horizontally P objects horizontally objects vertically Applies a horizontal Horizontal Flip reflection to the selected object Applies a vertical Vertical Flip reflection to the selected object Align Right Aligns objects to the right 23 E3 Studio Available options for Formatting toolbar ICON COMMAND ACTION Determines font color PBB Si Format text as bold Formats a textas underline PE Aie Aligns text to the left f Aligns text to the center DO Sign Rig
377. s and Screen Objects sssssessssscssssccscssescsscsssscsecscescsecaceecsessceecaesscesansecaesansees 200 TV SCL OOM iasiscsssncsssstsccsccccescusveseusesecssosadsssssenctsesetssnisnsiuesessuss sdestncesceovesetscesssssssessdestssessensets 7 2 Screen Objects 7 3 General Configurations sisenesid E S EE a ait 209 TA Color Formatting esseen a i N R a 223 75 Nale Format iecssscvessescvscessien cstneciueceessh scteracueccesessssecscsducctetauseaccsscesniesoediaces cotetsestbectsots 226 SLUMS E AS E E A A TEESE AT 8 1 Simple 8 2 Bi directional sscccscccccsevessccvsetccnccsseesvonsenescussevcnsssestscresndensdsevednsesdnccuscesesceessessouecceeiucseverss 233 pe DIST Oa EE S AAEE e A E E ces EA EA TE AA E SA ANAO inne E N S i A TRR RER oo T o l AAE EE EE EE T EE 8 6 Reverse g7 MUN PO a Saeue cevesausbeseusuceevsosestecvectuesee BB Litt EQUti On ssccscsscsccacececsescrstancesseseusetescecessancnsestenstvetvsaccensscsaresasscitessssepeessicesteeedaseeserts DQ E o B T E A PEE SAE E AS ES AE QW Gale ry nnair ennhi na E R NR ERER s 9 2 User Library ElipseX 9 3 When to Create an Elipse x ia c ciscscssciesscsscdessisecsceacsctasstesastesnssassedenseeesbeseseasesonesavetae 258 ANO No AA PATENATA E O A AEA EEE A E AEAEE EE E EE 259 10 1 Microsoft FOr mS ssccavinccscscesicocosstessssdscresnsecnedsseasesnsecesdoccestusescesussaVessnesssedssedestecescenects 262 10 2 Elipse KeyPad n a aaee Ee E a ieie as 264 11 Data Server si T1 1 Data F ld r sisson
378. s are described on the next table Available options for Grid Settings OPTION DESCRIPTION Show Grid Enables ordisables a grid Align Controls to Grid Enables or disables the alignment of controls in a grid Grid Columns Specifies the number of columns ina grid GridRows Specifies the number of rows in a grid Specifies the ruler s unit type pixel or centimeters The Styles option specifies settings referring to Report s style Reports 474 Normal Heading FontName Heading FontSize a Heading3 Heading4 Bold False Italic False Z Underline False Z StrikeThrough BackColor ForeColor Horizontal Alignment Left Vertical Alignment Top M Report s Styles The available options are described on the next table Available options for Styles OPTION DESCRIPTION New Delete List Specifies a Report s style Itis possible to inserta new style by clicking New to delete a style by clicking Delete or to use an existing styles on this list Font Colors Misc Specifies settings fora Report s style fonts background and foreground colors orientation etc 22 3 3 Script Editor The Script Editor is used to create scripts in E3 Reports The language used to create scripts in a Report is Active Scripting which interacts with Visual Basic When Script Editor window is open it provides methods and events for Report s objects and components To use thi
379. s availablein an application that may contain the selected group and the list Belongs to display the list of groups to which the selected group belongs To add a group to another group follow these procedures 1 Select a group to insert into another group 2 Onthe list Available groups select a group to which this group is going to belong 3 Click Add to add this group which then appears on the list Belongs to 4 Toremovea group select it on the list Belongs to and then click Remove NOTES Users must notice the hierarchy between users and groups If a certain option is disabled for a user but enabled for a group this user permission precedes the group which has this item disabled A group option is only respected when the same user option is set as neutral 23 3 Permissions The Permissions tab allows configuring user and group permissions for Screens Alarms Domains and Viewers A permission check is an information that a group member has about a command that acts on a specific object 497 Security H O Screens H A Alarms ar Run Domain C Stop Domain C Edit Domain is command is GRANTED to this user regardless of the groups to ich he she belongs to l Disable permissions check Permissions tab The available options on this tab are described on the next table Available options for Permissions tab OPTION O DESCRIPTION Users Groups This option lists users or user groups configured in
380. s can be configured via Properties List with no need for creating scripts for that To configure any property just locate it on the List and perform the necessary adjustments 7 2 Screen Objects The following objects can be inserted on a Screen e Primitives from the Graphic Editor Lines Circles Rectangles Polygons etc e ActiveX controls supplied by Elipse E3Alarm E3Browser E3Chart and E3Playback e ActiveX controls supplied by a third party Screens and Screen Objects 202 e Non vectorial images BMP JPG GIF files etc Vectorial images WMF EMF files etc Default Windows controls List Combo Box Scroll bar etc ElipseX objects composed by any of the previous objects Viewer Folders Queries Counter Demo Internal and Timer Tags The primitives from the graphic editor available in Studio are listed on the next topics They can be freely rotated or resized except for the Picture object After creation each object remains selected to edit its properties if needed 7 2 1 Line It allows drawing straight lines connecting two specified points during its creation To use this object follow these procedures 1 Select the Line N on Screen toolbar 2 Click the Screen to create the Line s origin and then drag the mouse until its desired final point 7 2 2 Connector This object is used to connect two or more Screen objects by using a line The Screen objects which can be connected are the Rectangle the
381. s discussed on the next topics 2 9 1 Acess via Script To use AppBrowser from a script open a script view and click on the Scripts toolbar In this mode objects are separated as shown on the next figure E3 Studio 78 AppBrowser a a e CommandButton1 4 Mouselcon a z E InitialScreen F MouseOver MouseOverChild m Viewer Application P MouseOverChild j a i oe Pi Informs whether mouse pointer is on Tasks A Name s F VBScript 2 Parent d one of the objects inserted on the s E3Globals A PathContainer Screen If True MouseOverChild is A PathName enabled Otherwise it is not This A PathVolume property is only available at run time Picture Default value is False tong PicturePosition Screen Fi TabStop How do you evaluate information on this topic MouseOverChild a Paste C a E Very Unsatisfactory Satisfactory Good Excellent Cancel A x Good X ee EENE E E A ORES On th Accor AppBrowser via scripts e left panel The first item displayed isolated is the Context A context objectis the one originating the call to AppBrowser that is the script s owner The second item is the full Hierarchy to reach a context object if this context is notin project s root This object can be expanded and the context object itself can be seen in this hierarchy If the context is not a server object the third item displayed is the V
382. s equivalent to the Viewer s WindowMovable property Always on top Indicates if the window must be always on top of other windows This field is equivalent to the Viewer s WindowStayOnTop property Small titlebar Enables a small title baron the window This option only works if the Title bar option is selected This field is equivalent to the Viewer s WindowSmallTitle property Screen resolution Selects a Screen resolution 640 x 480 800 x 600 1024 x 768 1280 x 1024 or 1600 x 1200 Advanced Opens a window for advanced settings 195 Viewer By clicking Advanced the following window then opens Advanced settings x Screen resolution in pixels Use current computer s resolution Use user defined resolution Horizontal 1024 Vertical 768 Deduction on Screen resolution in pixels Use current computer s settings C Use user defined settings Monitor resolution in dots per inch DPI Use current computer s resolution C Use user defined resolution Lok ce Advanced settings The available options for this window are Available options for Advanced settings window OPTION DESCRIPTION Screen resolution in pixels Allows users to choose from the current computer s resolution or from any other user defined resolution in pixels Deduction on Screen resolution in pixels Allows users to choose the deduction on Screen s resolution from the current computer settings or from any other user d
383. s feature click Script Editor which is available on the Reports toolbar 475 Reports 5 A Script Editor Object ActiveReports Document Events OnReportStart hd Sub OnReportStart End Sub Close Script Editor In the Object field users must specify an object to create a script and in the Events item a Report s event in which this action occurs 22 3 4 Load RPX File Imports a Report configuration from an external file 22 3 5 Save as RPX File Exports a Report configuration to an external file 22 3 6 Objects This section contains information about objects that can be used in a Report 22 3 6 1 Line A Line object links two given points It allows drawing straight lines by specifying two points during its creation or in polygons Line After inserted on a Report this object is named as Line Reports 476 22 3 6 2 Rectangle A Rectangle object allows drawing rectangles by using all of object s width or height It is created from two vertexes a a a a a a a a Rectangle After inserted on a Report this object is named as Shape 22 3 6 3 Round Rectangle A Round Rectangle object is a rectangle created from two vertexes with round corners based ona rounding factor When inserted or edited it displays a small point next to its upper left corner which allows modifying its rounding factor i i i Round Rectangle A
384. s must inform its complete path in the format Object Collection Name Example E3Chart1 Pens Pen1 On Type column one of the following keywords must appear e DispChartPen E3Chart Pens e ILegendColumn E3Chart Legends e IAxis E3Chart Axes e TableBindRow Table Link rows 2 6 8 Logs and Failure Report During the import or export process a log file with errors and other relevant events that occurred during the process is generated in case the ImportExport log section is enabled To enable this section see chapter Advanced Settings By the end of the operation there is an option to view an import failure report In this report there is a list of failures which are probably CSV file errors such as an object not found among others E3 object importing problem on There has been some problems during import Check the indicated row in the CSV file eC Links Value is not a valid value for Name column 3 Links Value is not a valid value for Name column 4 Import failure report 73 E3 Studio 2 7 Properties List Properties List is a window for configuring properties of the selected object Properties List s title always displays the name of the currently selected object For this window to be visible in the project users must select the Properties List option on View menu The next figure shows a Properties List of an I O Block Element object with its properties sorted alphabetically
385. s tab displays all fields from tables used in a Query When clicking 4 itis possible to select other tables for this Query 369 Query Inserting a table To select all table fields to usein this Query select the first item on the list box corresponding to an asterisk symbol To add a specific field simply select its corresponding check box Query 370 Alarms Fields Ed oO O FieldDeadBand O FieldDeadBand Unit O FieldDescription O FieldEU C FieldHighEng O FieldID O FieldLowEng O FieldMaxRecTime O FieldMinRecTime O FieldName O FieldQuality O FieldScanTimeMs O FieldSize O FieldSource O FieldType O Field VARTYPE Selecting table fields Due to performance issues itis important to add to a Query only fields that are really interesting for analysis On the columns area the chosen fields are displayed m 0 NoOz A O d 0 No Orde o 0 No Orde oO 0 No Orde m 0 No Orde o MI N No Orde m m Columns area Each column displays the following defined properties for each field of the selected table or tables Available options for column setup OPTION DESCRIPTION Columns Shows the name of selected columns When clicking the combo box of each row users can redefine the desired column column also known as an alias belongs to 371 Query OPTION DESCRIPTION Show CC nals or disables this field Ordering Allows sorting values No sorting Ascending lesser values f
386. s tool generates a text file that can be edited in any text editor Adocumentation file is formatted with a wizard called Script documentation Wizard This wizard helps users to configure a scripts documentation file 29 E3 Studio Welcome to E3 Script Documentation Wizard This wizard will help you create a script documentation for To proceed dick Next lt Back Script documentation wizard A Documentation file window defines information about a file that stores application scripts Type the name of a file where scripts documentation are generated in the Filename field Specify a place where this file must be saved in the Save file in folder field and if necessary click Browse E3 Studio 30 Documentation file Type filename where documentation will be saved Script documentation helps you organize your application scritps A text file will be created with scripts and you can edit it later with your favorite text editor In which file must this documentation be saved oe Save file in folder Scripts documentation file Click Next and go to the next window The File formatting window allows users to format this file with script information They can choose between a simplified documentation containing only script names or a complete documentation containing the whole script code 31 E3 Studio Script documentation wizard a File formatting Choose the scripts information to be
387. same time or that many E3 Studios to be connected to the same remote server with multiple configurations 1 1 3 E3 Viewer Allows operating applications residing in the server from any computer running the Viewer executable program or with an Internet browser In both cases itis not necessary to install the application in the client computer because all components Screens libraries ActiveX controls will be automatically downloaded and registered 1 1 4 E3 Admin This module is responsible for E3 Server and other E3 module interfaces with users With it users can send commands to an E3 Server by using its icon on Windows Notification Area and also control the Domain via command line Introduction 2 1 2 Architecture To supervise a specific process with a SCADA system usually an application containing the definition of variables involved is built up with names and paths Screens definitions of alarms and others which is called an Application Database When this process requires using two or more computers there is a need to make sure that each application on each computer exchange data with the others Most traditional SCADA systems were based on a common structure to accomplish this task e Each SCADA server must havea copy partial or not of the application configured on the local database e Each SCADA server has and runs only one database ata time This lead to some management problems such as applying changes to al
388. scdecescescesesecscossudsedeessensens QT LTIES CHAM E E A E AE E A E E dvosescosassceseasnsctasavtcocoeees 531 27 TQ n EKo 1 OAA T A EA E E EA 531 DT a e WINKS E A ELO A A AE AE OIA EN SAE E S A ESS 27 14 Viewer 27 15 Librari S n aaa raa oaase EES ESEE EE SEEE ER SR Si 534 P RE L POMt AEEA EE AAA T 535 27 17 Domains AN Projects sissscsecssssvcessacssccsvasvesessnsocecesesessnsessevensossseneessssansodssancestsnsncies 536 27 18 StOrEd Procedur svscesecsasscocesscscvecesccsersssossresesesvecorsesceasesssscsaresutsonssessscsserecesscsssoeats 538 27 19 Remote Domains CHAPTER Introduction Developed by Elipse Software E3 is a powerful platform for supervising and controlling processes fully focused on network operation and distributed applications E3 is a SCADA Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition system that offers an advanced object model a powerful graphical interface in addition to an architecture allowing fast application development and maximum connectivity to devices and other applications Its concept incorporates state of the art technologies in software development increasing performance productivity and quality of applications as well as the process itself thus reducing costs and losses Systems built with E3 usually start from real time data collection from data or control acquisition devices such as PLCs Programmable Logic Controllers RTUs Remote Terminal Units DAQs Data Acquisition Boards M
389. scending v Then by E Descending m Sorting tab The available options on this tab are described on the next table Available options on Sorting tab OPTION DESCRIPTION By field Sorts the alarms according to the specified field This option is equivalent to the PrimarySortField property Default sort orderis performed using the InTime field in descending order Then by Sorts the alarms starting atthe item specified in the By field option The next item is sorted based on the specification indicated in Then by fields These options are equivalent to the SecondarySortField ThirdSortField and FourthSortField properties respectively Ascending Sorts the alarm fields in ascending order These options are equivalent to the PrimarySortAscending SecondarySortAscending ThirdSortAscending and FourthSortAscending properties set to True respectively 317 Alarms OPTION DESCRIPTION Sorts the alarm fields in descending order These options are equivalent to Descending the PrimarySortAscending SecondarySortAscending ThirdSortAscending and FourthSortAscending properties set to False respectively Alarms 318 CHAPTER E3Alarm An E3Alarm monitors active or unacknowledged alarms in an application With this object users can check the status of alarms as well as acknowledge them manually Ac Source Domain Severi Source name Source name full Condition Name JANo Local Medium Al
390. se pointer over the center or vertexes users can change the center by dragging or rotating the object from one of its vertexes relative to the center Rotation Slider NOTE For Screen objects of type Picture that use the Bitmap file format files with bmp extension the animation feature is not available 7 3 7 Object Overlaying It allows editing the way two or more objects are overlayed The available options on the Screen toolbar are Available options on the Screen toolbar ICON OPTION DESCRIPTION th Bring to Front The selected object is brought to the first position in the overlaying order ALT HOME Send to Back The selected objectis sent to the last position in the overlaying order ALT Screens and Screen Objects 214 ICON OPTION DESCRIPTION Oh Bring Forward The selected object is brought forward one position in the overlaying order ALT PAGE UP Send Backward The selected objectis sent backward one position in the overlaying order ALT PAGE DOWN 7 3 8 Zoom When editing a Screen users can choose the most appropriate and comfortable zoom level for this operation Zoomis available via Zoom contextual menu with levels ranging from 10 to 800 in addition to the Fit Width Fit Height Fit Page and Fit options according to the next figure Zoom 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 150 200 400 800 Fit Width Fit Height Fit Page Fit Zoom menu In
391. server is using a web server such as IIS type this server s address or IP on browser s address bar for example http servername virtual_directory or http 192 0 0 21 virtual_directory where virtual_directory is a directory created during IIS configuration according to E3 Installation Guide During server s first access browser starts component installation in case they had not been previously installed as stated at the beginning of this chapter This component is signed by Elipse Software and users must accept that installation to start its configuration 517 E3 Viewer and E3 WebViewer Do you want to install this software E Name E3Downloader Publisher Elipse Software Always install software from Elipse Software Never install software from Elipse Software Ask me every time Erene pire While files from the Internet can be useful this file type can potentially harm your computer Only install software from publishers you trust What s the risk WebViewer Installation After installation E3 WebViewer opens in a browser and viewing a server s application In the next access itis not necessary to install components and connection is faster E3 Viewer and E3 WebViewer 518 CHAPTER Hot Standby Hot Standby is a feature that allows implementing a fail over concept ina supervisory system This concept consists in a possibility of having two servers main and backup one acting as a conti
392. servers Name Address Ping Clock Status Connection Role E3 Admin Monitor window The available options on this window are described on the next table Available options for E3 Admin Monitor window OPTION urrent domain ing addresses Address lock or Running with the server Shows a list of functions reported by the server Active This is the Domain s active server Standby This is the Domain s standby server Failure n The server has local failures reported Priority The server requested priority to run the Domain This indication forces the active server to switch to Standby mode Candidate The serveris a candidate to run the Domain E S The server has active OServers 125 Domains 3 10 5 Start Up The E3 Admin Start up window allows users to control the Domain to start automatically The configured Domain is only executed if this E3 Server is notin Demo mode To do so right click the E3 Admin icon on Windows Notification Area and then select the Start up option The window on the next figure is then displayed T E3 Admin Start up mym When starting up E3 Server automatically run C The loaded Domain C ooN No Domain can E3 Admin Start up window The available options on this window are described on the next table Available options for E3 Admin Start up window OPTION DESCRIPTION The loaded Domain When starting up automatically exe
393. ses The E3 Viewer has three special features e Application projects reside exclusively on the server e Internet Explorer can be used as an operating interface without any change e The client interface can alternate from a switched off server or a failed one to the next available server without interrupting the monitoring process One alternative for using E3 Viewer on the client machine is using the Terminal 3 Introduction Service technology This is a service that began with Windows NT 4 0 and its function is to allow remote access among computers via a protocol called RDP Remote Desktop Protocol This protocol allows interaction between a client station and a server machine which is accessed remotely An E3 Viewer is executed in a new user session created on the server machine which by its turn transfers video data to the client machine and receives back mouse and keyboard events All In One Viewer _ Server X S Viewer Executed at Client Machine Server REC Protocol Viewer r lh lh 4 Q Viewer Executed at Server Machine and Accessed via Terminal Service Viewer Viewer in Terminal Server Service RDP Protocol Wd Wb CG E3 architecture Introduction 4 1 3 Block Diagram E3 s internal architecture is completely scalable with each main task run by a separate service The following diagram shows an overview of its main blocks Web Clients E3 Viewers Studio E3 Admin
394. several different formats such as Acrobat PDF HTML TXT CSV TIFF and GIF among others Storage s main function is to allow recording data in a compact way With this tool users can recover with great accuracy all changes in process variables thus occupying less space on a database Some examples are shown on next topics Uncompressed chart Processed information contains several points Storage 336 VARIABLE TIME Uncompressed chart Compressed chart Information is virtually the same as the previous one but with fewer points VARIABLE TIME Compressed chart Storage recording is performed as follows e After defining a table in Storage properties this table is generated by clicking Create Table and data is stored using these definitions If a Tag quality varies data is also stored e Data is not stored if this variation occurs in a time interval smaller than the minimum programmed time interval the MinRecTime field To insert this tool in E3 follow these procedures 337 Storage 1 Right click the project s name in Explorer mode and select the Insert Storage option In Domain mode right click the Server objects Databases item select the Insert Storage in option and then the project s name El Domain Project 1 Ll Settings H Objects Library H E View Ce ol Server objects H E Drivers and OPC ity Data objects oE O Insert Databasein gt 4 amp Insert Historic in gt EE
395. shown to configure a Legend Column object Fat 411 Description column properties ln Initial width pixels Column title Pen description Text alignment Left Format isi Fel Description column properties window E3Chart Each field on this dialog box has a corresponding property The available options are described on the next table Available options for Description column properties window OPTION DESCRIPTION Defines column s initial width in pixels This field is equivalent to Legend Column s Width property Column title Determines column s title This field is equivalent to Legend Column s Caption property Text alignment Determines Legend column s text alignment This field is equivalent to Legend Column s TextAlign property Specifies a format for the selected column This field is equivalent to Legend Column s Format property 19 1 5 Queries Tab Queries are used to display Historic values on an E3Chart On Queries tab users can add or remove Queries as well as configure them E3Chart 412 Item Position General Axis Pens Legend Queries Font Links Queries Query1 v Configure Add Remove Queries tab The available options are described on the next table Available options for Queries tab OPTION DESCRIPTION Shows the selected Query for edition Configure Configures the selected Query Adds a new Query For more inform
396. significant digit or O zero when there is none Inserts the significant digit Inserts the significant digit ora blank space when there is none The decimal separator defines how to display the fractional part of a number The comma indicates that the value must be divided by a thousand for each comma after the format s digits Regardless of Windows Region and Language configurations the dot and the comma must be used on the format s text to indicate the thousands and decimal separators but the formatted output complies with the system s regional configurations Examples Available options DATA FORMAT FORMATTED OUTPUT 12000 1234567 1 234 567 0 7 5 1 1 Scientific Formats A number can be presented in scientific notation mantissa and exponent when after any digit there is an E E e or e followed by digits to format the exponent When using E or e the exponent is displayed with a sign and when using E or e the sign appears only for negative exponents and the exponent always displays a digit even if itis O zero The number of digits right to the decimal place affects the displayed exponent Examples Scientific formatter DATA FORMAT FORMATTED OUTPUT 1000 E 00 1E 03 1000 e 00 10e02 7 5 1 2 Text Formats The character copies data values on the position where it appears This format must appear in the fourth field for example or directly when there is only one field Examples
397. sked Questions generated for example can be implemented this way StartDate CDate Screen Item StartDateText Value EndDate CDate Screen Item EndDateText Value Set Report1 Application LoadReport Report1 Set Query Report1 Item Query1 Query SetVariableValue StartDate StartDate Query SetVariableValue EndDate EndDate Reporti1 PrintPreview How to display dates used as a filter on a Query of a Report s Page Header First add two SetPoints on Page Header one to display the start date and another one to display the end date and create a script that passes those values loaded on Screen SetPoints and transferred to that Query to these two SetPoints The script to be created on Page Header object on Report s OnBeforePrint event can be as follows Set data Application GetFrame Screen Report Sections PageHeader Controls Field5 Text data Item StartDateText Value Report Sections PageHeader Controls Field6 Text data Item EndDateText Value Then link two Internal Tags to Screen s SetPoints where dates are specified Link these Tags to Report s SetPoints How do print two Reports on distinct printers Create the following script on Report s OnReportStart event Sub OnReportStart Report Printer DeviceName Printer Name End Sub How do use an OnError script event to display an error message when printing a Report fails Report s OnError event does not allow running scrip
398. splayed Domains 114 2 E3 Admin Domain Configuration x Options Security Viewer groups Events recording Projects Servers Remote Domains Properties Project name ame A project1 pr project1 pi N Maintenance mode disabled Projects tab The available options on this tab are described on the next table Available options for Projects tab OPTION DESCRIPTION This option lists all names of projects in an application Add Remove By using these options itis possible to remove or add projects in an application To add a project click Add and then fill in the Project Name field To remove a project select it and then click Remove The PRJ file is not deleted from disk only from Domain s project list Project Name Type the name of the project file which must be a path relative to Domain s directory the directory containing dom files Example Screens prj Hydro Station1 prj 115 Domains OPTION DESCRIPTION Maintenance mode disabled This option allows disabling project s execution thus avoiding errors when the Domain is executed When this option is enabled the icon Mindicates that this projectis not used Projects displaying an icon Pare enabled and are executed 3 9 6 Servers Tab Users can add remove or edit servers from a Domain Use the list on the left to select one or more servers to change This list also indicates whether a server is enabl
399. ssion a data source whose value can be checked according to several available conditions These sources are Analog Dead Band Digital Rate of Change and Discrete To insert this object follow this procedure 1 Right click the Server object in Explorer mode and select the Insert Alarm option Analog Dead Band Digital Discrete or Rate of Change In Domain mode select the desired object in Server objects item and select the Insert Alarm option Analog Dead Band Digital Discrete or Rate of Change 301 Alarms E gi Domain Project 1 E Settings H Objects Library Ely Server objects H E Drivers and OPC iaa Data objects _ lj Databases pe AlamServer1 B A nR Insert gt iy A Rename 3 Eqlorer a Copy Cut X Delete Inserting an Alarm Source M Area AB Dead band Alarm A Digital Alarm c Discrete Alarm AB Rate of Change Alarm A Find Replace Object Counting H Import i Export G Document Scripts Check Edit links Copy Links Show in Editor ME Show in Explorer aa Properties Some of these object s properties can be configured on the Properties List without scripts To configure any property locate it on the Properties List and proceed with the necessary adjustments More information on the functionality of this object s properties can be found on the Scripts Reference Manual In each alarm sub condition users can configure its limits an e
400. sword s expiring date A few days before this deadline an application displays a message reminding users of the need to renew their password When they choose to do so a dialog box opens to perform this task If this password expires before users actually change it they cannot log in this application and the This account is blocked option is automatically enabled This condition remains until an administrator manually unblocks it characters for user s password have letters and numbers numbers for user s password for user s password lowercase letters have uppercase and lowercase letters This account is blocked Indicates that user s account is blocked This option is automatically enabled if this password expires or when users type it incorrectly a certain number of times User must change their password in the next Establishes that users must change their login passwords the next time they log in Security 492 OPTION DESCRIPTION Password checking is not case sensitive Enables password validation regardless of letters being uppercase or lowercase This option is not recommended When performing a user s login by using Viewer s Login method or by using the File Login menu the dialog box on the next figure is then opened Restricted access my Please type your user name and password to logon Domain C Example Projecti dom Authentication Windows E3 User name Password a _ one
401. t reportFilter TextDelimiter report Export reportFilter MsgBox Exported to TXT using filter End Select End Sub Reports 484 22 5 5 How to Create Reports Displaying Page N of M To create a Reportin which each page prints an indication of Page N of M where N is the current page and Mis the total amount of pages create two Texts and two SetPoints These two Texts correspond to Page and of texts which must be inserted in the Caption property Those two SetPoints correspond to N and M values with the following properties Field N e Name txtPageNumber e SummaryGroup GroupHeader1 e SummaryRunning 1 ddSRGroup e SummaryType 4 ddSMPageCount Field M e Name txtPageCount e SummaryGroup GroupHeader1 e SummaryType 4 ddSMPageCount 22 5 6 How to Create Reports Printing Only Value Average at Every Five Minutes To do so users must create a new group ina Report This group has a Header anda Footer Section The general layoutis e PageHeader Contains column titles e GroupHeader Remains empty but its DataField property is equal to CLng E3TimeStamp 288 because E3TimeStamp is the date and time of data in Gregorian format days since 1 1 1900 where its integer partis the number of days and its fractional partis the hours and minutes Multiplying by 288 corresponds to a total of five minutes since 1 1 1900 The CLng function converts a 32 bit integer and deletes its fractional part so that intermediate min
402. t type size and effects 385 E3Browser CHAPTER E3Chart An E3Chart is an ActiveX component specially created to work with E3 With this object users can display charts with Tags varying in real time as well as historic data stored on a Database An E3Chart is formed by several collections Acollection is a special object that manages a set of similar objects An E3Chart contains the following collections e Pen Collection Manages a set of Pens created to manipulate data sequences represented on an E3Chart e Axis Collection Manages E3Chart s Axes where different scales linked to Pens data can be configured e Query Collection Manages queries containing information about Pens for example with charts displaying historic data already stored on a Database e Legend Collection Manages E3Chart Legend s columns where information about Pens is then displayed To use E3Chart features follow these procedures 1 Right click a Screen and select the Insert E3Chart option E3Chart 386 Fit to Splitter library A Find Replace 3 MSForms d Object Counting ooe Panel mport ai 7 Standard ort lc E3Alarm W Document Scripts V Check GA E3Browser Edit links E E3Playback Copy Links RMChartx Show in Organizer ME Show in Explorer T Properties Inserting an E3Chart on a Screen 2 If necessary configure E3Chart properties Some properties of this object can be c
403. ta Server and inside it two other Folders named Engine and Engine2 Inside these Folders create three Internal Tags for each one Formulas 458 Creating Tags 5 Create two Units in this Formula named Engine1 and Engine2 Link each field on these Units to the previously created Tags FZ Formula1 x dp it X 7 E Height Data Formula Engine1 IntemalTag1 Data Formula Engine2 IntemalTag1 E intemal Diameter Data Formula Engine1 IntemalTag2 Data Formula Engine2 IntemalTag2 E Etemal Diameter Data Formula Engine1 IntemalTag3_ Data Formula Engine2 IntemalTag3_ Linking Tags to Formula Units 6 Define all Value Sets to load later into Tags Create four Value Sets named from Model1 to Model4 and type their values as on the next figure 459 Formulas F Formular x 4 gt E eA Name Modell Model2 Model3 Moden ER Height E intemal Diameter E Extemal Diameter Configuring Value Sets 7 Create a new Screen named Formulas 8 On this Screen create six SetPoints to link to each Tag in this Formula and adjust Screen size to the size of these objects This Screen should look like the following figure Engine 1 External Diameter Internal Diameter Engine 2 External Diameter Internal Diameter Formula screen 9 Create a button on this Screen using Load values as its caption This button displays a dialog box with existing values and Units to which th
404. ta of this period is currently loading A light yellow line indicates that this period contains some loaded data New database queries are needed if the cursoris moved over that period A light gray line indicates that the period has no loaded data yet To load data from that period move playback cursor over it Indicates with a blue dot each moment when there is a playback event General Zoom Bar Displays the period of data currently displayed on the Timeline compared to the total period of data available for playback In casea Tag s Display chart in Timeline option is selected in Event List or Tag List a visual representation of this Tag is displayed on the left side of the chart This representation varies according to Tag s data type e String Displays text boxes with Tag names Boolean or Digital Displays a status chart of a Tag where Tag value is drawn over a bottom line Off or False or over a top line On or True Chart line is dotted on periods where Tag quality is bad E3 Playback 434 e Double Integer or Analog Displays a line chart with Tag values Chart scale bottom and top is calculated automatically according to Tag values already retrieved by E3Playback on a database As ina digital chart chart lineis dotted on periods where Tag quality is bad This line can be interpolated or in steps depending on Tag supporting Storage or not Historic interpolation Timeline x Dados Saneamento ETA animaC
405. that slice s ending The alarm summary at the moment of that slice s beginning All alarm events that occurred during that slice s interval The next alarm event of each Alarm Source after that slice s ending When a playback clock is moved over a time slice E3Playback analyzes if all necessary Tags are already loaded on that slice as well as if all alarminformation is already loaded If some data is missing then an asynchronous query is generated to load necessary data froma database A playback query is composed of the following parameters e Period to search for starting and ending date and time e Set of Tags to search for this may be an empty set For each Tag it must return e The last event prior to the beginning of that query e All events occurred during that query s period e The next event that occurred after the query s period e Alarm information that must be searched for which is zero or more of the following options e Previous alarm summary status of each Alarm Source at the beginning of query s date and time e Alarm events on that period e Next alarm summary next event of each Alarm Source after the ending of that period s date and time To runa query on playback data usually several database queries are needed A playback data server performs these queries asynchronously and on a separate thread collects data and only returns them when all queries are finished E3 Playback 444 When a playback query
406. the Insert option and then the name of the XObject as shown on the next figure In Explorer mode right click the project s Data Server select the Insert option and then the name of the XObject Libraries 256 Domain Project1 CH ma View E a Server objects fy Drivers and OPC Edit X Delete A Find Replace Object Counting A Import uP Erari Check Edit links Copy Links A Analog Alarm AB Dead band Alarm Ag Digital Alarm A Discrete Alarm i Document Scripts AB Rate of Change Alarm S Show in Editor EE Show in Explorer Properties Inserting an XObject in Domain mode Notice that even if the library files have several XControls and XObjects when trying to insert an instance copy E3 Studio will show for the Screens only the XControls and for the Data Servers only the available XObjects 257 Libraries Invalid property Ez Object property Property1 from object Data XObject11 is not valid anymore but it is linked Data XObject11 DocString Do you want to remove this link Yes Yes No j Noa Invalid property Users can select not removing and then recreate the erased object with the property to edit remove only the property currently displayed remove all properties or not removing any property 9 3 When to Create an ElipseX Using libraries is highly recommended due to
407. the Screen to create the Rectangle s origin vertex then drag the mouse diagonally to its final vertex until the object reaches the desired size and position 7 2 4 Round Rectangle It allows drawing rectangles with rounded corners created from two vertexes To use this object follow these procedures 1 Select the Round Rectangle LI on Screen toolbar 2 Click the Screen to create the rectangle s origin vertex then drag the mouse diagonally to its final vertex until the object reaches the desired size and position 3 Onthe object s upper left corner there is a dot which is responsible for the rectangle s rounding factor Dragging it to its center or to its edge to determine its vertex curve 205 Screens and Screen Objects 7 2 5 Ellipse It allows drawing circles and ellipses To use this object follow these procedures 1 Select the Ellipse on Screen toolbar 2 Click the Screen to establish the object s initial point then drag the mouse diagonally until the object reaches the desired size and position 7 2 6 Arc It allows drawing arc cord or pie shaped objects To use this object follow these procedures 1 Select the Arc amp on Screen toolbar 2 Click the Screen to establish the object s initial point then drag the mouse diagonally until the object reaches the desired size and position 3 Inthe two cutting edges there will be two points that indicate the object s angle Drag them to open or close t
408. the productivity gain they bring Some advantages of ElipseXs are e Reusing source code e Reducing tests during development e Creating default interfaces for developed objects Reducing development time for new projects e Protecting project s content Thus using libraries is recommended for most applications However there are some criteria to indicate the need to build objects in E3 e Repetition of use If the same device or process is used more than once in the same project e User knowledgeable procedures Often a process created by a specific company must be protected against copies or changes This is common in case of service integrators or machine manufacturers Use of controllers A process controller whose memory mapping is fixed can be implemented with all available functionality The available flexibility for building and using objects in E3 allows that only variables of interest be used later ignoring the other ones NOTE For examples on how to create ElipseXs and for further information on these objects please check the Scripts Reference Manual Libraries 258 CHAPTER ActiveX ActiveX objects are COM based Component Object Model software components that can be inserted into an application to perform several tasks These objects are developed in programming languages such as C C Delphi and Visual Basic among others Some ActiveX objects are automatically registered when E3 is installed E3Alar
409. the right vertical Axis and At the bottom or At the top horizontal Axis This field is equivalent to Axis Position property Shows this Axis on both sides of a chart creating a mirror effect This field is equivalent to Axis Mirror property Determines Axis title This field is equivalent to Axis Title property Specifies scale s color This field is equivalent to Axis Color property Enables Axis visibility on a chart This field is equivalent to Axis Visible property Display text in axis color Determines if Axis text color has the same scale s color This field is equivalent to Axis EnableTextColor property Samea ibeteemlipes a grid line color This field is equivalent to Axis GridColor property Line style Determines grid line style on a chart This field is equivalent to Axis GridStyle property Show grid lines Enables grid lines view This field is equivalent to Axis ShowGrid property Tick spacing Determines an interval between scale ticks if the Automatic option is disabled If this scale is not numerical users can select a time unit to which this interval refers This field is equivalent to Axis SetTickSpacing method Automatically selects an interval between scale ticks This field is equivalent to Axis SetTickSpacing method with 0 zero as a value for its interval Number of subticks Determines the number of subticks ona scale This field is equivalent to Axis MinorTicks property C
410. this Tag supports interpolation the previous eventis the last time stamp stored on the database before the current playback time of this Tag NOTE A Tag List can also help to determine which Tags need to be written to a database to allow a full playback of a Screen by simply checking Tags with a forbidden icon When right clicking a Tag a contextual menu is then displayed with the same options described on topic Event List except in case of Tags marked with the icon in which this contextual menu appears disabled 20 4 Playback Database An E3Playback automatically detects which Tags and alarms are stored ona database This process of detecting a database is known as Assembling After a database is assembled E3Playback uses this collected information to query stored data according to Tags displayed on Screen and according to the current playback clock 20 4 1 Database Assembling A Database Assembling is always performed when an E3Playback is activated Information about database structure collected during this assembling process is kept while the playback section is active The steps of a database assembling process can be summarized as 1 Enumerate all database tables 2 Check which one of these tables have the corresponding Fields table For example when E3 generates an alarm table named E3Alarms and also generates a table with a description of fields on the alarm table E3Alarm_Fields 3 Analyze fiel
411. this folder Ce j Invalid folder warning Click Next to proceed NOTE The E3 Object Library option is discussed later in chapter Libraries 3 8 1 2 Domain On this screen users can decide to which Domain the project or library being created belongs The Add to the current Domain option is only enabled if there are active Domains in this application By clicking this option this new project belongs to the current Domain The Create a new Domain option generates a Domain to which the project or library belongs The name of this new Domain is indicated by the Type Domain name option Finally with the Don t add to any Domain option this project or library does not belong to any Domain 91 Domains Application Wizard Domain Specify if this project will be added to a Domain i A Domain is a set of related projects PRJ and libraries LIB that make up Sq an application To which Domain will this application belong CA Create a new Domain Type Domain name Project1 Don t add to any Domain lt Back Next gt Cancel Domain screen Click Next to proceed 3 8 1 3 Viewer Resolution On this screen users can configure Viewer properties by defining a working resolution for this application thatis the resolution of the computer that executes this application Thus Screens can have their sizes defined to fit Viewer s window with no scroll bars The Screen resolution option allows users to
412. this object is opened where variables can be inserted These variables are properties to be exported by the object which can be linked to a Tag or any other property of an application when the objectis in usein an application The variables with properties to be exported can be inserted by pressing the INSERT key on the keyboard or by clicking P and excluded by pressing the DELETE key or by clicking X lt The available options of this item are described on the next table Available options for XObjects view OPTION DESCRIPTION Name i ww Specifies the XControl s variable name Libraries 254 OPTION DESCRIPTION Type Determines the data type supported by the variable Notice that other data objects XObjects may be declared as Types This way users can create a data object that has another data object as a property Data objects may work as a struct oras a class in this case as in the C C language When specifying an object type for example DemoTag OTag XObject etc this property has the following behavior e Incase the ElipseX is inactive This property works as a String which specifies the path of the object instance of the configured type In case the ElipseX is active On writing this property works the same way as the previous case However on reading this property returns the specified object if it exists If the path does not point to an existing object at the time this property returns Nothing
413. time until a perfect understanding of what caused that occurrence 20 1 E3Playback Object An E3Playback the playback tool by Elipse is an ActiveX that runs inside E3 Viewer or E3WebViewer and allows viewing application Screens using historical data stored on databases E3Playback retrieves Tags referenced on these Screens from a database as well as other links between a Viewer and a server such as Viewer Tags with links to server objects and displays values animations statuses and charts according to information available on a database and a defined period of playback 20 2 Adding Playback to E3 Demo This example shows how to add a playback functionality to the demonstration application installed with E3 1 Create a new Screen named PlaybackScreen and insert an E3Playback Activex filling the whole Screen s background area 423 E3Playback Lohe e File Visualize Objects Arrange Tools Window Help Ha A ee ee Wes A PEO a A AIC SA eee ee ey AL o i AL Bal wae Fe oe eC I a E E PlaybackScreen x saf ra 2 Property Value A DBSer O a a A DocStr O P Enabled O True 9 Height 9577 9166 A Initials O 9 Layer amp hi xl For Help press F1 h 4630 609 ye 185 212 7 14314 9578 Including an E3Playback on a Screen 2 Goto the Properties list and configure E3Playback s DBServer property to point to a Database object that contai
414. tion Splitters SplitDockPosition property is automatically configured to reflect this change 4 With the Select Screen or Frame option users can select a Screen or Frame to link to Splitter s SplitLink property via AppBrowser 5 Users can insert as many Splitters as needed in a Frame Frames 188 i Fie Visualize Objects Arrange Tools Window Help HBN A i a OR Zz ALOR ee ee ee ee A SMS T al Sh m il cel id E dod er ERAF Voc Ba A ce 3 2l abl al Beetle E ae Wh e Be et AN E InitialScreen Screenl www elipse com br A Caption C Frame Tile A DocStr O A Name O Framel A Pathc D Screen A PathN O Framel A PathV 2 C Program R For Help press F1 rk w 0 0 qi 21167 14235 Frame Splitters 6 To configure Frame Splitters right click the Organizer on a Splitter and select the Properties option 189 Frames Top properties Panel FrameSet E3 Item Frame Links Screen or Frame InitialScreen B Zoom v V Enable scrollbar in Initial Screen Placing dockTop v Value 3413 13 Frame configurations The available options are described on the next table Available options for Frame tab OPTION DESCRIPTION Screen or Frame Determines either a Screen ora Frame to be opened bya Splitter Itis only enabled ifa Splitter has no children This field is equivalent to the SplitLink property Determines S
415. to I O Driver s execution interface named Driver Manager 139 Drivers Domain b Drivers Shortcuts b Licenses Statistics Monitor Start up Printer About E3 Admin Stop E3 Server Close E3 Admin Access to Driver Manager Driver Manager allows users to view all Drivers in execution displaying their properties On this window users can sort Drivers by any column by clicking a desired column s name Itis also possible to filter values on columns except for Read errors and Write errors columns by clicking El and then typing a filter for the desired column E3 Admin Driver Manager kobak Communication drivers Name Object s Read erors Write emors Process Status Shared Log Filtro a Filtro Ca Filtro is Filtro as Filtro Filtro E DNPMaster dl Driver1 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 00 2420 0974h Running No Disabled Driver Manager The available options on this window are described on the next table Available options for Driver Manager window OPTION DESCRIPTION Name Informs Drivers name O Drivers 140 OPTION DESCRIPTION Informs an I O Driver s name linked toa Driver Read errors Displays the total amount of this Driver s readings the amount of reading errors and a percentage of errors relative to the total amount of readings Displays the total amount of this Driver writings the amount of writing errors and a percentage of errors relative to the
416. to perform data is formatted and saved in a temporary file or in memory At the same time a Database has another process responsible for retrieving requests and sending them to a database as SQL commands by using OCI ve nee Store Data on Files or Memory Retrieve Data from File or Memory and Send to a Database Data Capture ocl SQL Commands Temporary Files or Memory Oracle Communication between E3 and Oracle 12 3 SQL Server With this option users can store data in a SQL Server Database 281 Database 12 3 1 Accessing SQL Server via E3 To insert a new SQL Server Database follow these procedures 1 Right click the project s icon and select the Insert Database option The object is then created and its script edition window is opened 2 To configure it select the Configuration tab on Properties window DB1 properties DB DBServer Item Alarms Area Configuration Links Database z SQL Server Database Server PO Database PO Network Library o Defut Change connection string Provider SQLOLEDB 1 Persist Security Info False Initial Catalog DB Data Source SERVER Connection string may have the following macros SERVER server name DB database name Configuration for SQL Server Databases The available options on this tab are described on the next table Available options for Configuration tab OPT
417. to print page totals number of pages page titles or any other information that needs to be printed once at the top of each page 22 2 4 Page Footer A Page Footer Section prints only once at the bottom of each Report s page It is used to print page totals number of pages page titles or any other information that needs to be printed once at the bottom of each page 22 2 5 Group Header and Footer A Report may have multiple nested groups Each group has a Header Section anda Footer Section A Header Section prints before any Detail Section in a group A Footer Section prints after all Detail Sections in a group Group Sections are inserted immediately before and after a Detail Section The number of times a group Section can print depends on how data is grouped A Report starts a new group Header Detail and Footer for each change on data gathered in that group 22 2 6 Detail A Detail Section is the Report s body which prints once for each record on its data source 22 3 Settings A Report has several objects that can be added to it which are available using the Reports toolbar Reports x RO wk O00 A BP mn 3 Fh bx 7 EF GH Reports toolbar A contextual menu is displayed when right clicking a Report Options on this menu vary according to where a mouse click is performed On Report area Only the Insert and Delete Section options are enabled Reports 466 4 Insert gt X Delete Section Report area men
418. to send an event to E3 Server The diagram on the next figure shows how different E3 processes generate and handle system events Domains 106 E3 Server STANDBY E3 Server HOT Event List Event List evt1 evtl1 evt2 evt2 Viewer Application TrackEvent Sending command to engine X Process diagram Every E3 Server maintains an internal list of events to register on a Database These events can come from three different sources e Events generated on Viewers using the Application TrackEvent method e Events generated internally by an E3 Server e Events generated by a Standby E3 Server The E3 Server Standby periodically sends an event list to the E3 Server Hot because only this oneis capable of recording events on a Database Events are placed on Hot s event queue along with other system events That is the Hot server centralizes event recording If there is a server switching events that were not recorded yet are automatically sent to the new Hot server E3Run stores on a database events sent by the E3 Server Hot E3 Server then informs Data Server s name and table to store data To configure event recording in E3 right click E3 Admin icon on Windows Notification Area select Domain Options and then Events recording tab The window on the next figure is then displayed 107 Domains E3 Admin Domain Configuration _ Options Security Viewer groups Events reco
419. ton2_Click Set Penl Screen Item E3Chart1 Pens Item Pen1 Pen1 Connect End Sub 7 Run this project and check its results 19 2 2 Updating Historic E3Chart with Data from the Last Hour The following example shows how to update an E3Chart with historical data from the last hour For this example it is necessary to have a Query to a previously created Database table 1 Create an E3Chart ona Screen 2 Goto E3Chart s properties select Axis tab and then click horizontal Axis Configure option Select Scale tab and then select the Time Interval Historic Data option 3 Goto Queries tab and then click Add The application opens a dialog box to indicate the name of a Database server where Query s table is going to be stored 4 Selecta Database server on this dialog box and then click OK The application then opens a Query configuration window 5 Onthe historical table select the E3TimeStamp field as well as some other data field to display on this chart 6 Inthe E3TimeStamp field create a filter according to the following specifications 415 E3Chart 10 11 Sub CommandButton3_Click 12 Filter Definition x Only indude rows where E3TimeStamp greater than or equal A lt Start gt C Or And fless than or equal to v BE lt End gt C Or And Filter for the E3TimeStamp field After creating a filter based on the previous specifications click OK Create a
420. total amount of writings the operating system Displays the current Driver status configured starting running finishing finished orin error If a Driveris in error this column displays an error description Driver is shared or not disabled system Enables Driver s log at run time without reconfiguring this application Users can interrupt this recording procedure by Forces an update on displayed data 4 1 2 1 Using a Timestamp Some devices and protocols allow users to send time information along with variable values I O Drivers for such devices can also return clock information stored in each Tag s TimeStamp property with a resolution of 1 ms When a device does not support this type of information or when a Driver is not prepared to handle it this I O Driver inserts the current date and time into this timestamp using computer s clock With this timestamp E3 then uses this information both for checking and storing alarms and also for generating historic files In case of Block Elements the same timestamp is informed for all Block Elements since they all have been checked at the same time If a Driver supports both Block and Tag variable readings in case of Elements representing distinct events users should use I O Tags For more information on which devices have this feature please contact Driver s manufacturer For more information on which Drivers or variable types inside devices use timestamps p
421. trieve data from an OPC UA server using an OPC UA Driver follow these procedures 1 Select an OPC UA Driver on Query s Define database server window Define database server xa Please type your database server before creating your query Database server X DriverUA1 Cancel Select an OPC UA Driver 2 The following window is then displayed allowing a Query configuration 173 Drivers fae Query Query1 x Fields Variables Visualize Type of reading C Raw Data Processed Data id Coms Title Function Fields tab The available options on Fields tab are described on the following table Available options on Fields tab OPTION DESCRIPTION Raw Data This Query returns data as stored on a server similar to Storage s CompressedDataStartEndTime query In this mode only one Tag can be retrieved ata time and it also returns this value s quality Drivers 174 OPTION DESCRIPTION Processed Data olumns This Query returns aggregated data inside a time interval similar to Storage s SampledData and CalculatedData queries In this mode several Tags can be retrieved at once although not returning this value s quality Several aggregation functions can be used such as average maximum interpolation etc Different functions can be used for each Tag and one Tag can appear several times in a Query with different aggregation functions E3 only lists standard f
422. trols in Windows list Controls with an Eicon cannot be removed only the ones with an Bi icon Browse Opens a dialog box to search foran ActiveX file Allows updating ActiveX controls on the Registered controls in Windows list which were registered after opening this configuration window Close Closes the ActiveX Control configuration window 2 Click Browse to open a dialog box and locate a file that contains an ActiveX ActiveX 260 S Register Act xl Look in IJ ActiveX Control Pad amp ex Ev te Name Date modified Type a amp L 4 J Refdocs 1 23 2013 4 30 PM ei folder Setup 1 23 2013 4 30PM File folder SCRWIZ DLL 1 23 2013 4 30PM Applicatic Desktop mw Computer a Network 1 r fem SS Files of type ActiveX Controls ocx dl Cancel Locating an ActiveX file 3 Select the file and then click Open There are two types of ActiveX objects Graphical used in application Screens and Non Graphical perform any data manipulation Graphical objects can be inserted on an application in three different ways e By selecting the appropriate object on Objects toolbar e By right clicking a Screen object in Organizer and then selecting the Insert option e By right clicking a Screen and selecting the Insert option 261 ActiveX Fit to Splitter SES E E2Animation r library gt E2Bitmap n n MSForms gt Q E2Button ae S yd Panel 199 E2Display W Import
423. ts inside it having only internal purposes This means that itis not possible to change this error message nor execute any other procedure on this event 27 17 Domains and Projects What happens to events generated by the E3 Server while the Domain is not running As long as the event recording is enabled E3 Server logs the generated events on an internal event list in memory This list is emptied in three situations e If there is an E3Run running locally thatis the E3 Server is in the Hot state Frequently Asked Questions 536 the events of this list are sent to the E3Run for recording on the Database If the recording works the recorded events are removed from the list e If there is another E3 Server running in Hot state on the Domain messages are sent to that E3 Server e If the Domain is closed all messages not yet stored are discarded l have used E3 Admin via command line and an error has been displayed Why has this happened Sometimes when using E3 Admin via command line users may wrongly configure a parameter which throws an error message The following error messages can be displayed e The Domain could not be opened because the file filename dom is read only e This message appears when the Domain file is read only e The options are not valid or the Domain name is incorrect Check the informed options and whether the Domain exists e This message appears when a non existing option or Domain name is informe
424. tting Up a Bar Code Value Within Detail Section To use this feature write the following script on the OnFormat event of a Detail Section Sub OnFormat Report Sections Detail Controls BarCode1 _ Caption Right Report Field E3TimeStamp 8 End Sub 483 Reports 22 5 3 Capturing a Screen and Generating a Print Preview To use this feature type the following script Sub Rect_Click Calling this method can also be performed by using Application CaptureScreen Screen Frame CaptureScreen C mail test bmp Application LoadReport Report3 PrintPreview End Sub 22 5 4 Generating an Export Menu To use this feature write the following script Sub Rectangle3_Click Set report Application LoadReport Report3 Select Case _ Application SelectMenu PDF Excel HTML RTF Text _ TIFF Text CSV Caseml Report Export PDF C mail reports report pdf MsgBox Exported to PDF Case 2 Report Export EXCEL C mail reports report XLS MsgBox Exported to XLS Case 3 Report Export HTML C mail reports report html MsgBox Exported to HTML Case 4 Report Export RTF C mail reports report rtf MsgBox Exported to RTF Case 5 Report Export TEXT C mail reports report txt MsgBox Exported to Text CSV Case 6 Report Export TIFF C mail reports report tiff MsgBox Exported to TIFF Caseny Set reportFilter report GetExportFilter TEXT reportFilter FileName C mail reports _ report2 tx
425. ty with that Link Text1 Links Value 2 6 7 Collections and their Items To import or export collections in E3 users must select the corresponding option in a template There is no way to exclude only some collections either all of them are imported or exported or none at all Columns in each collection depend on the properties of that collection This is handled the same way as object s property columns In case of collections and collection items properties must be included in an INI file manually It is not possible to select these properties via template settings Collections can be imported and their properties can be updated Since collections always exist and there is no way to create another collection of the same type users are asked whether they want to ignore or overwrite the existing collection If the collection item being imported already exists users are asked whether they want to ignore it overwrite it or create a new one In case users select the later option e Incase of Pens and Axes their names are properly auto incremented Incase of Table Link rows they are created at the end of a table e Incase of Legend columns an error message is displayed informing that either their names are not valid or that column already exists and its name cannot be auto incremented Legend columns have pre defined names and it E3 Studio 72 is not possible to create columns with different names In an object s name user
426. u e On an object inside a Report Only the Insert Delete Cut Copy Paste Bring to Front Send to Back Align and Format Border options are enabled 4 Insert gt X Delete Cut Copy i a Bring to Front Send to Back Align gt cfg E Format Border Report object menu e On more than one object selected in a Report All menu options are enabled 467 Reports Available options for a Report s contextual menu OPTION OE DESCRIPTION Allows inserting a new Report component The available options are the following e Insert Group Header Footer Adds a new pair of group headers or footers ina Report Insert Page Header Footer Adds a new pair of page headers or footers Insert Report Header Footer Adds a new pair of headers or footers in a Report Delete Delete Section Deletes the selected Section object or group This option is notapplied toa Report s Detail Section Reorder Groups Reorganizes the selected groups This option is valid when several Section groups pairs of headers or footers are added toa Report This option is not applied toa Caer Aer ea port s Detail Section Cuts the selected Cuts the selected object group or Section group or Section Copies the selected object group or Section Pastes an object group or Section in the current Report s Section Bring to Front The selected object group or Section is sent to the first position in the layer order Send to Back
427. ulti Loop or Single Loop controllers fire centers and weighing machines among other devices These equipments usually have some interface allowing its connection to the software such as standard serial RS232 RS422 or RS485 radio or modem private or dial up lines TCP IP or UDP IP boards directly linked to the computer bus and others E3 reads and writes data from the equipment through modules I O Drivers that implement the protocol available in each one of them public or private domain These Drivers can still bein an Elipse Software format or in OPC format OLE for Process Control With this data users can create many ways to display analyze control command store or disclose such information among them e Screens allows creating an HMI Human Machine Interface locally through local network or Internet aiming at displaying current or past data status in many ways using a graphical editor and specific objects e Alarms and Events monitors the occurrence of specific situations e Historics stores data in relational databases e Reports allows viewing and printing data among other modules and possibilities 1 1 General Description E3 can be executed on Windows XP SP3 Windows XP x64 SP2 Windows Vista SP2 Windows 7 SP1 Windows 8 Windows 8 1 Windows 10 Windows Server 2003 SP2 Windows Server 2008 SP2 Windows Server 2008 R2 SP1 Windows Server 2012 or Windows Server 2012 R2 platforms using some features available
428. unctions without searching forserver s specific functions or filtering functions not supported bya server This Query may fail when selecting a function not supported by an OPC UA server Adds one or more Tags from an OPC UA server Query Identifier Nodeld values on a server Path of a Tag on an OPC UA server Name ofa Tag on an OPC UA server Function used on this Tag This column is only available when the Processed Data option is selected When clicking F the following window is then displayed allowing to select the existent Tags on a server 175 Drivers H 9 Archives y BasicVariables E 990 ChartAnalysis H 4 DataObjects Datasets H Q DependencyPropertyManager y DiagnosticNodes 4 ExpressionVariables El Interfaces Q0 Hait_interface E lt ActiveTags H CollectorStatus H 4 CollectorType R Dados TaDemo 1 H 4 Dados TagDemo 10 Lo cm Selecting OPC UA Tags The Variables and Visualize tabs have the same behavior described on Query chapter 4 4 3 Certificates During E3 installation a certificate relative to this instance of an E3 OPC UA client is installed This certificate is needed whenever using a connection with a server whose security mode the SecurityMode property is not equal to None thatis a secure OPC UA connection This certificate can be found on CertificateStore certs folder of E3 installation as a file called Elipse E3 UA
429. uplicated collection items import Specifies how E3 must handle the occurrence of duplicated collection items during the import process The available options are Ask me what to do in each case Always overwrite existing item Always ignore duplicated item or Always create a new item e Filters On this tab users can select classes to usein the import or export process or which classes not to use E3 Studio 56 Filters tab The available options on this tab are described on the next table Available v for Filters tab DESCRIPTION i Do not sumas _ objects Defines thatall objects are imported or exported 57 E3 Studio OPTION E DESCRIPTION imported or exported imported or exported classes to include orto exclude opens a help window for this option By clicking Change a window opens to select classes as shown on the next figure ic Object classes o eal Only classes listed below will be added to the CSV file Mento E DiscreteAamSource x A DeadBandAlamSource Ap ROCAlamSource AF DigitalAlarmSource SR AnalogAlarm Source Object classes Classes that initially fill in this list are the ones of the root and child objects if a new template is being created Users can also add other classes by clicking or remove a class by clicking e Identifiers On this tab users can define identifiers for the selected object classes The initial status of th
430. using E3 Admin s contextual menu on Windows Notification Area users can run stop refresh or close a Domain directly with the Run Stop Refresh and Close options respectively In addition a Domain can be also configured for redundancy and for Remote Domains among other actions These options can be configured via the Domain Options menu 97 Domains Domains Shortcuts Licenses Statistics Monitor Start up Printer About E3 Admin Stop E3 Server Close E3 Admin Configuration options via Windows Notification Area 98 3 9 1 Options Tab On Options tab users can enable server redundancy a E3 Admin Domain Configuration Options Securty Viewer groups Events recording Projects Servers Remote Domains Properties Hot StandBy V Enable Main server Main V Backup server Time to activate backup server Fast 1s Slow 30s Switch over in 15 seconds ping 2000ms Backup i t t lt is s S S SCCS Using as faster as possible activation more CPU Activate backup server on local failure PING addresses to check network integrity Tip Use blank space tab semicolon comma or line break as separator and Network resources will be consumed and greater are the chances of unnecessary activations caused by network fluctuations Pre activated services in backup server Backup server pre activation profi
431. utes and seconds do not display This group is then printed each time this number changes thatis every five minutes Check the NewColumn and NewPage properties which must be set to 0 ddNPNone e Detail Contains SetPoints for table fields Its Visible property must be set to False so that each data acquisition that composes a five minutes average is calculated although not printed e GroupFooter Contains the following fields representing SetPoint s average 485 Reports DataField Names of table fields same as in Detail Section e SummaryFunce 1 ddSFAvg e SummaryRunning 1 ddSRGroup e SummaryType 1 ddSGrandTotal The only exception is for Date Time which is a standard SetPoint with its DataField property set to CLng E3Ti meStamp 288 288 e ReportFooter Blank or any other value If this query is between 00 00 of one day and another one its result is composed by 288 printed rows with an average of fields at every five minutes Reports 486 CHAPTER r Security By using this option users can control access to Screens Alarms Domains and Viewers based on a list of users and groups Depending on these configured options an application either grants or denies access to registered users Access permissions are configured per user or per groups of users Groups can be created to contain only users or other groups as well To open configurations for users groups or permissions follow this procedure 1 G
432. vailable options for Position tab OPTION DESCRIPTION Defines object s left horizontal coordinate in Himetric units This field is equivalent to object s X property Per object s upper vertical coordinate in Himetric units This field is equivalent to object s Y property Determines object s width This field is equivalent to object s Width property Eo the object s height This field is equivalent to object s Height property On General tab users can specify chart s style and appearance 389 E3Chart ESChartl properties E3Chart B Item Position General Axis Pens Legend Queries Font Links F Show title Paint the chart s background with C lt Dther gt E V Paint the grid s background with C White x Refresh rate seconds 0 5 General tab Each field on the General tab has a corresponding property The available options are described on the next table Available options for General tab OPTION DESCRIPTION Show title Displays chart s title This field is equivalent to object s Title property Paint the chart s background with Determines chart s background color This field is equivalent to object s BackColor property Paint the grid s background with Determines grid s background color This field is equivalent to object s GridBkColor property Refresh rate seconds Determines an interval between drawing updates ina chart This field is equivalent to object s R
433. value ona Database ArchivedValue Returns a stored value relative to a given pointin time defined by the TimeStamp variable The type of relationship defined by the FunctionSubType property can be Previous A value stored immediately before a timestamp Next A value stored immediately after a timestamp Interpolated A calculated value based on previous and next values and ExactTime If a stored value is found in the exact instant provided by a timestamp These variables can also be defined at run time by calling Query s SetVariableValue method TagAttribute Returns a Tag attribute defined by the FunctionSubType which can be FieldDescription Tag s meaning or description FieldSource path of the Tag being stored FieldType data type Double Bit String or Integer FieldEU engineering unit FieldLowEng lower limit FieldHighEng higher limit FieldDeadBand dead band for storage FieldDeadBandUnit dead band unit whether in absolute values or percentage FieldMinRecTime minimum time for storage variations smaller than this interval are discarded or FieldMaxRecTime maximum time for storage a lack of variation in these intervals forces a storage CompressedDataNValues Returns for a single Tag N values defined by the NumVals variable stored from an initial point in time defined by the StartTime variable These variables can also be defined at run time by calling Query s SetVariableValue method CompressedDataStart
434. vent related message its severity as well as the need for acknowledging this event or not Alarms A AlarmConfigt fy Areal R AnalogAlam1 Data DemoTag1 Value Z DeadBandAam1 Data IntemalTag1 Value Ey A DigtalAam1 J DiscreteAlarm1 Ap ROCAlarm1 M 4 gt Design Scripts Alarm Sources When opening the Properties window of any Alarm Source and selecting the Source tab the window on the next figure is then opened Item Source Formatting Links Analog Data source Data DemoTag1 Value al 7 Handle this alarm as an event Tl Double Acknowledgment Source tab To handle this Alarm as an event or to double acknowledge this alarm when it is active as well as when it becomes inactive click the corresponding check box All Alarm Sources have the following general properties e Message Text This message is stored in alarm event s Message field while it is active that is it can be viewed on an E3Alarm alarm summary stored on a Database etc This message text is limited to 200 characters 303 Alarms e Severity Indicates the severity of an alarm Low Medium or High The Severity field is used for building filters and for sorting messages e Need Ack Indicates whether this alarm must be acknowledged by an operator to be removed from E3Alarm s alarm list or if it is automatically acknowledged when a variable leaves an alarm condition e
435. ver item Drivers 170 e Data obje LY Select server J Database Activate Communication JE Server information Insert Edit X Delete A Find Replace Object Counting H Import p Export A Check Edit links Copy Links Show in Editor ME Show in Explorer F Properties Select server option The following window is then displayed allowing to select an OPC UA server ona local machine or on a network Drivers Select below an end point from an OPC UA server local or on the network E Network servers E G VMware Shared Folders i Microsoft Terminal Services i Microsoft Windows Network E G Web Client Network Local and network OPC UA servers For each OPC UA server locally or on a network endpoints are enumerated which can use different protocols and security modes In addition for each endpoint a server can also support different ways of identifying and authenticating users Currently E3 allows a connection only using the Binary TCP mode For this mode E3 supports security modes defined by the OPC UA standard with several combinations of security policies For authentication E3 only supports Anonymous and User and Password modes When selecting an E3 compatible endpoint the EndPointURL SecurityMode and SecurityPolicy properties of this object are automatically filled in If the UserName and Password properties of this obje
436. work DOM file by using its network path for example server folder Domain dom When using E3 Studio always editing the main copy of projects and libraries the network copy To apply changes copy modified project and library files to the local directory of Domain servers After that click Run Domain u to apply these modifications at run time E3Run Domains 3 9 2 Security Tab When using the Security tab users can determine Domain security configurations This option is used as default in case no security permission options for project s users are enabled To open this item right click E3 Admin icon on Windows Notification Area select Domain Options and click the Security tab The window on the next figure is then displayed ae atio Options Security Viewer groups Events recording Projects Servers Remote Domains Properties Configure here your Domain security options m Password general policies User cannot change their password Password expires after p days J Password must have atleast 0 character Password must have letters and numbers Password must have at least fo numbers Password must have at least fo letter Password must have uppercase and lowercase letters J7 Block user account after fo failed logins Unblock user automatically after P minute I Wam user fo days before password become expired Password checking is not case sensitive not reco
437. xplorer Insert Historic in ane Insert Storage in Insert Formula in gt Find Replace Object Counting Document Scripts Check SEMB eaga Edit links Load All Objects Close All Objects g Save All Objects Inserting a Database in Domain mode When users insert a Database in an application some options regarding Data Server types are enabled via Configuration tab on Properties window or via SourceType property on Properties List Some of this object s properties can be configured via Properties List without Database 274 creating scripts for this To configure any of these properties locate it on the Properties List and perform the necessary adjustments For more information on properties of this object please check the Scripts Reference Manual NOTE A Database object can be configured to work as an Alarm Area 12 1 Access Generates a database in MDB Microsoft Access Database format default database for E3 To use this feature follow these procedures 1 Right click the project s name in Explorer and select the Insert Database option In Domain mode right click the Server objects Databases item select the Insert Database in option and then the project s name The object is then created and its script edition window is opened 2 To configure it go to the Configuration tab on Properties window 275 Database DB1 properties DB DBServer E3 Item Alarms Area Configuration Links
438. xt table Available options for a Digital Link OPTION DESCRIPTION Specifies the value assumed by this property when the source expression is True Specifies the value assumed by this property when the source expression is False When this field is enabled the linked property alternates between the values in the To Value field if the source returns True Otherwise the returned property alternates between the values in the Value and To Value fields if the source returns False To Value lt Field On gt Specifies an alternative value to be assumed periodically by this property when the source expression or Link results in True and the Blink field is enabled To Value lt Field Off gt Specifies an alternative value to be assumed periodically by this property when the source expression or Link results in False and the Blink field is disabled 235 Links To use this resource follow these procedures 1 Select the object for the Link 2 Right click this object and select the Properties option 3 Click the Links tab and select the property to perform the Link Studio indicates several types of Links 4 Inthe Source field select the Link and click El to indicate the property to refer or write down an expression in this field 8 4 Analog An Analog Link allows users to establish a conversion scale between the source and the destination variable By using these specified values a linear scale is performed between
439. y is not aimed to do this It is only useful in Hot Standby applications to keep an Internal Tag value when there is a server switching How to save the value of an Internal Tag when stopping a Domain By using Data Server s Save method How do display the current system date and time on a Screen in my application Create a CurrentTime type Demo Tag and link it to a Display on this Screen A date and time format can be configured on the Formatting tab of a Display properties window How do I create a timer in E3 By using a Square type Demo Tag This Tag must have its Enabled property set to False and its Period property set to twice the limit time in milliseconds By setting True to its Enabled property starts counting time To run any script at the end of this timer create an event linked to this Demo Tag s Value property which is executed when that property changes its value In this script users must also disable that Demo Tag that is set its Enabled property to False so that it stops changing It is recommended to use Demo Tag s Reset property before setting its Enabled property to True 527 Frequently Asked Questions 27 7 I O Drivers What do I have to do to use bits of an I O Tag To use bits of an I O Tag users must enable I O Tag s UseBitFields property How is the counting process of Block Tags and bits of Tags in E3 The counting process considers I O Tags and the size of Block Tags Bits are not part of this
440. y using Alarm Server s LogTrackingEvent method this field is equal to an empty String Example Bad 0 Uncertain 64 128 Good 192 Severity Severity value configured on an Alarm Source This field assumes values 0 High 1 Medium or 2 Low It can also assume another user defined value if itis an event such as when using Alarm Server s LogTrackingEvent method For alarm events itinforms an expression used to evaluate alarm conditions This field s limit is 100 characters when stored ona Database SubConditionName Name of a sub condition if itis an alarm event This field can assume the following values DB Dead Band Alarm DIG Digital Alarm RC Rate Of Change Alarm LOLO Analog Alarm in LoLo range LO Analog Alarm in Lo range HI Analog Alarm in Hi range HIHI Analog Alarm in HiHi range If this eventis not an alarm for example when using Alarm Server s LogTrackingEvent method itis always an empty String This field s limit is 100 characters when stored ona Database Fe eee 5c are user defined fields They are configured on Alarm Server s User fields tab 297 Alarms After defining all these configurations an application starts inserting and storing information on the alarm table according to field specifications When clicking Create Table Studio generates an alarm s data table according to these specifications and informs whether this table was successfully generated i The database ta
441. y using the SetVariableValue method 373 Query Fields Variables Visualize SQL Configure below variables used in this query Name Value StartDate is 12 00 00 AMM EndDate ie 12 00 00 AM Variables tab The columns of this tab are described on the next table Available options for the Variables tab OPTION DESCRIPTION Name CC The name of a user defined variable Value A combo box where value s data type can be defined These options are Empty NULL Boolean Char Byte Integer Word Long Dword Currency Single Double Date Decimal and String 17 1 3 Visualize Tab This tab displays a preview of Query results when clicking Users can also define a maximum number of records to retrieve to display results faster Query 374 Click in button to run query Lestimestame Edan __ Quaity__LFistW alve a EETA 0 192 l 41330 5309147338 0 0 41330 5309147338 0 192 0 5333 41330 5309270139 0 192 1 23661861629 41330 5309385648 0 192 2 58561733756 41330 5309503009 0 192 4 35561889706 41330 5309618634 0 192 5 30842632831 41330 5309732407 0 192 723828384044 41330 5309846065 0 192 8 18596416211 41330 5309959838 0 192 9 33717242347 41330 5310075463 0 192 10 3899584917 41330 5310201852 0 192 12 0093817255 41330 5310431134 0 192 16 8308265388 4133 531N6ANA17 N 107 IN RIANRIASIRA J Retum maximum of 100 register s Result 15710 Query preview 17

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

- Service, Support  Cadillac 2011 Escalade ESC Automobile User Manual  室内面格子（固定式）  FT Terreau Ortie culture avec fond Version 22 01 09  ポンプ諸元  ProScan PLT9011 User's Manual  Mode d`emploi du tutorat PAES 2010-2011  Virtu USA GS-4040-WMRO-DW Instructions / Assembly  LP470 LP480 Guía del Usuario  LG LH-CX245 User's Manual  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file